LED tube lamp

This application is Continuation-In-Part application of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/452,857, filed on Jun. 23, 2019, which is a Continuation application of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/143,852, filed on Sep. 27, 2018, each of which are incorporated by reference in their entirety. U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/143,852 is a Continuation-In-Part application of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 16/106,060, filed on Aug. 21, 2018, which is a Continuation application of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/662,094, filed on Jul. 27, 2017, which is a Continuation-In-Part application of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/626,238, filed on Jun. 19, 2017, which is a Continuation application of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/373,388, filed on Dec. 8, 2016.

In addition, U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/662,094 claims priority under 35 U.S.C. 119(e) to Chinese Patent Application No.: CN 201710036966.4, filed on Jan. 19, 2017; CN 201710170620.3, filed on Mar. 21, 2017; CN 201710158971.2, filed on Mar. 16, 2017; CN 201710258874.0, filed on Apr. 19, 2017; CN 201710295599.X, filed on Apr. 28, 2017; and CN 201710591551.3, filed on Jul. 19, 2017, the disclosures of each of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.

In addition, U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/373,388 claims priority under 35 U.S.C. 119(e) to Chinese Patent Application No.: CN 201610878349.4, filed on Oct. 8, 2016; CN 201610955338.1, filed on Oct. 27, 2016; CN 201610955342.8, filed on Oct. 27, 2016; CN 201610975119.X, filed on Nov. 3, 2016; CN 201611057357.9, filed on Nov. 25, 2016; CN 201610177706.4, filed on Mar. 25, 2016; and CN 201610890527.5, filed on Oct. 12, 2016, the disclosures of each of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.

In addition, this application incorporates by reference in its entirety Chinese Patent Application No.: CN 201710888946.X, filed on Sep. 27, 2017; CN 201711298908.5, filed on Dec. 8, 2017; CN 201810032366.5, filed on Jan. 12, 2018; CN 201810130074.5, filed Feb. 8, 2018; CN 201810205729.0, filed Mar. 13, 2018; CN 201810272726.9, filed Mar. 29, 2018; CN 201810292824.9, filed Mar. 30, 2018; CN 201810326908.X, filed Apr. 12, 2018; CN 201810752429.4, filed Jul. 10, 2018; CN 201811005720.1, filed Aug. 30, 2018; CN 201811053085.4, filed Sep. 10, 2018.

In addition, this Application claims priority under 35 U.S.C. 119(e) to Chinese Patent Application No.: CN 201811277947.1, filed on Oct. 30, 2018; CN 201811441563.9, filed on Nov. 29, 2018; CN 201910412116.9, filed on May 17, 2019; CN 201910537220.0, filed Jun. 20, 2019; and CN 201910732298.8, filed Aug. 9, 2019, the disclosures of each of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.

The disclosed embodiments relate to the features of light emitting diode (LED) lighting. More particularly, the disclosed embodiments describe various improvements for LED tube lamps.

LED lighting technology is rapidly developing to replace traditional incandescent and fluorescent lighting. LED tube lamps are mercury-free in comparison with fluorescent tube lamps that need to be filled with inert gas and mercury. Thus, it is not surprising that LED tube lamps are becoming a highly desired illumination option among different available lighting systems used in homes and workplaces, which used to be dominated by traditional lighting options such as compact fluorescent light bulbs (CFLs) and fluorescent tube lamps. Benefits of LED tube lamps include improved durability and longevity and far less energy consumption. Therefore, when taking into account all factors, they would typically be considered as a cost effective lighting option.

Typical LED tube lamps have a lamp tube, a circuit board disposed inside the lamp tube with light sources being mounted on the circuit board, and end caps accompanying a power supply provided at two ends of the lamp tube with the electricity from the power supply transmitting to the light sources through the circuit board. However, existing LED tube lamps have certain drawbacks. For example, the typical circuit board is rigid and allows the entire lamp tube to maintain a straight tube configuration when the lamp tube is partially ruptured or broken, and this gives the user a false impression that the LED tube lamp remains usable and is likely to cause the user to be electrically shocked upon handling or installation of the LED tube lamp.

Conventional circuit design of LED tube lamps typically doesn't provide suitable solutions for complying with relevant certification standards. For example, since there are usually no electronic components in a fluorescent lamp, it's fairly easy for a fluorescent lamp to be certified under EMI (electromagnetic interference) standards and safety standards for lighting equipment as provided by Underwriters Laboratories (UL). However, there are a considerable number of electronic components in an LED tube lamp, and therefore consideration of the impacts caused by the layout (structure) of the electronic components is important, resulting in difficulties in complying with such standards.

Further, the driving of an LED uses a DC driving signal, but the driving signal for a fluorescent lamp is a low-frequency, low-voltage AC signal as provided by an AC power line, a high-frequency, high-voltage AC signal provided by a ballast, or even a DC signal provided by a battery for emergency lighting applications. Since the voltages and frequency spectrums of these types of signals differ significantly, simply performing a rectification to produce the required DC driving signal in an LED tube lamp may not achieve the LED tube lamp's compatibility with traditional driving systems of a fluorescent lamp.

Currently, LED tube lamps used to replace traditional fluorescent lighting devices can be primarily categorized into two types. One is for ballast-compatible LED tube lamps, e.g., T-LED lamp, which directly replaces fluorescent tube lamps without changing any circuit on the lighting device; and the other one is for ballast by-pass LED tube lamps, which omit traditional ballast on their circuit and directly connect the commercial electricity to the LED tube lamp. The latter LED tube lamp is suitable for the new surroundings in fixtures with new driving circuits and LED tube lamps. The ballast-compatible LED tube lamp is also known as “Type-A” LED tube lamp, and the ballast by-pass LED tube lamp provided with a lamp driving circuit is also known as a “Type-B” LED tube lamp. In the prior art, when a Type-B LED tube lamp has an architecture with dual-end power supply and one end cap thereof is inserted into a lamp socket but the other is not, since the lamp socket corresponding to the Type-B LED tube lamp is configured to directly receive the commercial electricity without passing through a ballast, an electric shock situation could take place for the user touching the metal or conductive part of the end cap which has not been inserted into the lamp socket. In addition, due to the frequency of the voltage provided from the ballast being much higher than the voltage directly provided from the commercial electricity/AC mains, the skin effect occurs when the leakage current is generated in the Type-B LED tube lamp, and thus the human body would not be harmed by the leakage current.

Therefore, since the Type-B LED tube lamp has higher risk of electric shock/hazard, compared to the Type-A, the Type B-LED tube lamp is requested to have extremely low leakage current for meeting the strict requirements in the safety certification standard (e.g., UL, CE, GS).

Due to the above technical issues, even many well-known international luminaries and LED lamps manufacturers also strand at the bottleneck on development of the ballast by-pass/Type-B LED tuba lamps having dual-end power supply structure. Taking GE lighting corporation for the example, according to the marketing material titled “Considering LED tubes” published on Jul. 8, 2014, and the marketing material titled “Dollars&Sense: Type-B LED Tubes” published on Oct. 21, 2016, GE lighting corporation asserts, over and over again, that the drawback of the risk of electric shock that occurs in the Type-B LED tube lamp cannot be overcome, and thus GE lighting corporation would not perform further product commercialization and sales consideration.

In the prior art, a solution of disposing a mechanical structure on the end cap for preventing electric shock is proposed. In this electric shock protection design, the connection between the external power and the internal circuit of the tube lamp can be cut off or established by the mechanical component's interaction/shifting when a user installs the tube lamp, so as to achieve the electric shock protection.

It's specially noted that the present disclosure may actually include one or more inventions claimed currently or not yet claimed, and for avoiding confusion due to unnecessarily distinguishing between those possible inventions at the stage of preparing the specification, the possible plurality of inventions herein may be collectively referred to as “the (present) invention” herein.

Various embodiments are summarized in this section, and may be described with respect to the “present invention,” which terminology is used to describe certain presently disclosed embodiments, whether claimed or not, and is not necessarily an exhaustive description of all possible embodiments, but rather is merely a summary of certain embodiments. Certain of the embodiments described below as various aspects of the “present invention” can be combined in different manners to form an LED tube lamp or a portion thereof.

The present disclosure provides a novel LED tube lamp, and aspects thereof.

According to certain embodiments, an LED tube lamp including an LED module and a power supply module is provided. The LED module is configured to emit light in response to a driving current. The power supply module is electrically connected to the LED module to provide the driving current based on an external driving signal. The power supply module includes a rectifying circuit, a filtering circuit, a driving circuit, a flicker suppression circuit, and an installation detection circuit. The flicker suppression circuit is electrically connected to the LED module, and configured to control a conduction state of a current path passing through the LED module. The installation detection circuit is electrically connected to the flicker suppression circuit, and configured to detect whether a foreign external impedance is electrically connected to the LED tube lamp. When the foreign external impedance is detected, the installation detection circuit disables the flicker suppression circuit to restrict current from flowing through the current path. When the foreign external impedance is not detected, the installation detection circuit enables the flicker suppression circuit to smooth the driving current by controlling the conduction state based on the external driving signal.

According to certain embodiments, an LED tube lamp including an LED module and a power supply module is provided. The LED module is configured to emit light in response to a driving current. The power supply module is electrically connected to the LED module to provide the driving current based on an external driving signal. The power supply module includes: an installation detection circuit, configured to detect whether a foreign external impedance is electrically connected to the LED tube lamp, wherein the installation detection circuit comprises a detection controller configured to issue a control signal and a current limiting circuit configured to affect magnitude of current on the power supply module in response to the control signal; and a ballast detection circuit, electrically connected to the installation detection circuit, and configured to detect whether the external driving signal is provided from an electronic ballast, wherein when the foreign external impedance is detected, the detection controller issue the control signal to cause the current limiting circuit to limit the current to less than a safety value, and wherein when the external driving signal is provided from the electronic ballast, the ballast detection circuit maintains the installation state signal at a level capable of causing the current limiting circuit to not limit the current on the power supply module no matter whether the foreign external impedance is detected.

FIGS. 1A-1C are plane cross-sectional views schematically illustrating an LED tube lamp including an LED light strip that is a bendable circuit sheet with ends thereof passing across the transition region of the lamp tube of the LED tube lamp to be connected to a power supply according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating leads that are disposed between two end caps of an LED tube lamp according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIGS. 3A to 3D are block diagrams of exemplary power supply systems for LED tube lamps according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 4A is a block diagram of an exemplary power supply module in an LED lamp according to some embodiments.

FIG. 4B is a block diagram of an exemplary power supply module in LED lamp according to some exemplary embodiments.

FIG. 4C is a block diagram of an exemplary LED lamp according to some exemplary embodiments.

FIGS. 5A-5D are schematic circuit diagrams of exemplary rectifying circuits according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIGS. 6A-6E are block diagrams of exemplary filtering circuits according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 7A is a block diagram of a driving circuit according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIGS. 7B-7E are schematic diagrams of exemplary driving circuits according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIGS. 8A-8D are signal waveform diagrams of exemplary driving circuits according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 9A is a block diagram of an exemplary power supply module of an LED tube lamp according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 9B is a block diagram of an exemplary auxiliary power module according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 9C is a block diagram of an exemplary power supply module in an LED tube lamp according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIGS. 9D-9E are block diagrams of exemplary auxiliary power modules according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIGS. 9F-9G are schematic structures of an auxiliary power module disposed in an LED tube lamp according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIGS. 9H-9J are block diagrams of LED lighting systems according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIGS. 9K-9L are schematic circuit diagrams of auxiliary power modules according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIGS. 9M-9N are charge-discharge waveforms of auxiliary power modules according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIGS. 10A-10C are block diagrams of LED lighting systems according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 11 is a block diagram of an exemplary power supply module in an LED tube lamp according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 12A is a block diagram of an installation detection module according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIGS. 12B-12F are schematic circuit diagrams of an installation detection module according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 13A is a block diagram of an installation detection module according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIGS. 13B-13E are schematic circuit diagrams of an installation detection module according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 14A is a block diagram of an installation detection module according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIGS. 14B-14E are schematic circuit diagrams of an installation detection module according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 15A is a block diagram of an installation detection module according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIGS. 15B-15F are schematic circuit diagrams of an installation detection module according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 16A a block diagram of an installation detection module according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIGS. 16B-16D are schematic circuit diagrams of an installation detection module according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 17A is a block diagram of an installation detection module according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIGS. 17B-17C are schematic circuit diagram of an installation detection modules according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 18A is a block diagram of an installation detection module according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIGS. 18B-18D are schematic circuit diagrams of an installation detection module according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 19 is a block diagram of an exemplary power supply module in an LED tube lamp according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 20A is a block diagram of an installation detection module according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 20B is a schematic circuit diagram of an installation detection module according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 21 is a block diagram of an exemplary power supply module in an LED tube lamp according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 22A is a block diagram of an installation detection module according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIGS. 22B-22D are schematic circuit diagrams of an installation detection module according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIGS. 22E and 22F are signal waveform diagram of an installation detection module according to some embodiments;

FIGS. 22G and 22H are schematic circuit diagrams of an installation detection module according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 22I is a schematic circuit diagram of a power supply module having the functions of constant-current conversion, electric-shock detection, and dimming control according to some embodiments;

FIG. 23A is a block diagram of an installation detection module according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 23B is a schematic circuit diagram of an installation detection module according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 24A is a block diagram of an installation detection module for an LED tube lamp according to some embodiments;

FIG. 24B is a schematic circuit diagram illustrating a control circuit of an installation detection module according to some embodiments;

FIG. 25A is a block diagram of an installation detection module for an LED tube lamp according to some embodiments;

FIGS. 25B and 25C are schematic circuit diagrams of a bias adjustment circuit according to some embodiments;

FIG. 26A is a block diagram of an installation detection module according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 26B is schematic diagram of a driving circuit with an electric shock detection function according some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 27A is a block diagram of an installation detection module according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 27B is a schematic circuit diagram of a driving circuit with an electric shock detection function and a detection triggering circuit thereof according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 27C is an internal block diagram of an integrated controller of a driving circuit with an electric shock detection function according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 27D is a schematic circuit diagram of a driving circuit with an electric shock detection function and a detection triggering circuit thereof according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 28 is a block diagram of an exemplary power supply module in an LED tube lamp according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 29A is a block diagram of an installation detection module according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIGS. 29B and 29C are schematic circuit diagrams of an installation detection module according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 30 is a block diagram of an installation detection module according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIGS. 31A and 31B are a schematic circuit diagrams of bias circuits of an installation detection module according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 32 is a block diagram of a detection pulse generating module according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIGS. 33A and 33B are schematic circuit diagrams of detection pulse generating modules according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 34 is a circuit diagram of a ballast detection module according to some embodiments;

FIGS. 35A-35D are schematic signal waveform diagrams of detection pulse generating modules according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 36 is a block diagram of an exemplary power supply module in an LED tube lamp according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIGS. 37A-37G are schematic signal waveform diagrams of power supply modules according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 38A is a block diagram of a power supply module according to some embodiments;

FIG. 38B is a block diagram of a misuse warning module according to some embodiments;

FIG. 39 is a block diagram of a power supply module according to some embodiments;

FIG. 40A is a flowchart of a relamping detection method according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 40B is a flowchart of an emergency detection method according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 40C is a flowchart of a power off detection method according to some exemplary embodiments;

FIG. 40D is flowchart of steps of a method to control a misuse warning module according to some embodiments;

FIG. 40E is flowchart of steps of a method to control an installation detection module according to some embodiments;

FIG. 41A is a block diagram of an overvoltage protection circuit according to some embodiments;

FIG. 41B is a schematic diagram of an overvoltage protection circuit according to some embodiments; and

FIGS. 41C-41E are schematic diagrams of a part of an overvoltage protection circuit according to some embodiments.

The present disclosure provides a novel LED tube lamp. The present disclosure will now be described in the following embodiments with reference to the drawings. The following descriptions of various embodiments of this invention are presented herein for purpose of illustration and giving examples only. It is not intended to be exhaustive or to be limited to the precise form disclosed. These example embodiments are just that—examples—and many implementations and variations are possible that do not require the details provided herein. It should also be emphasized that the disclosure provides details of alternative examples, but such listing of alternatives is not exhaustive. Furthermore, any consistency of detail between various examples should not be interpreted as requiring such detail—it is impracticable to list every possible variation for every feature described herein. The language of the claims should be referenced in determining the requirements of the invention.

In the drawings, the size and relative sizes of components may be exaggerated for clarity. Like numbers refer to like elements throughout.

The terminology used herein is for the purpose of describing particular embodiments only and is not intended to be limiting of the invention. As used herein, the singular forms “a”, “an” and “the” are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. As used herein, the term “and/or” includes any and all combinations of one or more of the associated listed items and may be abbreviated as “/”.

It will be understood that, although the terms first, second, third etc. may be used herein to describe various elements, components, regions, layers, or steps, these elements, components, regions, layers, and/or steps should not be limited by these terms. Unless the context indicates otherwise, these terms are only used to distinguish one element, component, region, layer, or step from another element, component, region, or step, for example as a naming convention. Thus, a first element, component, region, layer, or step discussed below in one section of the specification could be termed a second element, component, region, layer, or step in another section of the specification or in the claims without departing from the teachings of the present invention. In addition, in certain cases, even if a term is not described using “first,” “second,” etc., in the specification, it may still be referred to as “first” or “second” in a claim in order to distinguish different claimed elements from each other.

It will be further understood that the terms “comprises” and/or “comprising,” or “includes” and/or “including” when used in this specification, specify the presence of stated features, regions, integers, steps, operations, elements, and/or components, but do not preclude the presence or addition of one or more other features, regions, integers, steps, operations, elements, components, and/or groups thereof.

It will be understood that when an element is referred to as being “connected” or “coupled” to or “on” another element, it can be directly connected or coupled to or on the other element or intervening elements may be present. In contrast, when an element is referred to as being “directly connected” or “directly coupled” to another element, there are no intervening elements present. Other words used to describe the relationship between elements should be interpreted in a like fashion (e.g., “between” versus “directly between,” “adjacent” versus “directly adjacent,” etc.). However, the term “contact,” as used herein refers to direct connection (i.e., touching) unless the context indicates otherwise.

Embodiments described herein will be described referring to plane views and/or cross-sectional views by way of ideal schematic views. Accordingly, the exemplary views may be modified depending on manufacturing technologies and/or tolerances. Therefore, the disclosed embodiments are not limited to those shown in the views, but include modifications in configuration formed on the basis of manufacturing processes. Therefore, regions exemplified in figures may have schematic properties, and shapes of regions shown in figures may exemplify specific shapes of regions of elements to which aspects of the invention are not limited.

Spatially relative terms, such as “beneath,” “below,” “lower,” “above,” “upper” and the like, may be used herein for ease of description to describe one element's or feature's relationship to another element(s) or feature(s) as illustrated in the figures. It will be understood that the spatially relative terms are intended to encompass different orientations of the device in use or operation in addition to the orientation depicted in the figures. For example, if the device in the figures is turned over, elements described as “below” or “beneath” other elements or features would then be oriented “above” the other elements or features. Thus, the term “below” can encompass both an orientation of above and below. The device may be otherwise oriented (rotated 90 degrees or at other orientations) and the spatially relative descriptors used herein interpreted accordingly.

Terms such as “same,” “equal,” “planar,” or “coplanar,” as used herein when referring to orientation, layout, location, shapes, sizes, amounts, or other measures do not necessarily mean an exactly identical orientation, layout, location, shape, size, amount, or other measure, but are intended to encompass nearly identical orientation, layout, location, shapes, sizes, amounts, or other measures within acceptable variations that may occur, for example, due to manufacturing processes. The term “substantially” may be used herein to emphasize this meaning, unless the context or other statements indicate otherwise. For example, items described as “substantially the same,” “substantially equal,” or “substantially planar,” may be exactly the same, equal, or planar, or may be the same, equal, or planar within acceptable variations that may occur, for example, due to manufacturing processes.

Terms such as “about” or “approximately” may reflect sizes, orientations, or layouts that vary only in a small relative manner, and/or in a way that does not significantly alter the operation, functionality, or structure of certain elements. For example, a range from “about 0.1 to about 1” may encompass a range such as a 0%-5% deviation around 0.1 and a 0% to 5% deviation around 1, especially if such deviation maintains the same effect as the listed range.

Terms such as “transistor”, used herein may include, for example, a field-effect transistor (FET) of any appropriate type such as N-type metal-oxide-semiconductor field-effect transistor (MOSFET), P-type MOSFET, GaN FET, SiC FET, bipolar junction transistor (BJT), Darlington BJT, heterojunction bipolar transistor (HBT), etc.

Unless otherwise defined, all terms (including technical and scientific terms) used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art to which this disclosure belongs. It will be further understood that terms, such as those defined in commonly used dictionaries, should be interpreted as having a meaning that is consistent with their meaning in the context of the relevant art and/or the present application, and will not be interpreted in an idealized or overly formal sense unless expressly so defined herein.

As used herein, items described as being “electrically connected” are configured such that an electrical signal can be passed from one item to the other. Therefore, a passive electrically conductive component (e.g., a wire, pad, internal electrical line, etc.) physically connected to a passive electrically insulative component (e.g., a prepreg layer of a printed circuit board, an electrically insulative adhesive connecting two devices, an electrically insulative underfill or mold layer, etc.) is not electrically connected to that component. Moreover, items that are “directly electrically connected,” to each other are electrically connected through one or more passive elements, such as, for example, wires, pads, internal electrical lines, etc. As such, directly electrically connected components do not include components electrically connected through active elements, such as transistors or diodes, or through capacitors. Directly electrically connected elements may be directly physically connected and directly electrically connected.

Components described as thermally connected or in thermal communication are arranged such that heat will follow a path between the components to allow the heat to transfer from the first component to the second component. Simply because two components are part of the same device or board does not make them thermally connected. In general, components which are heat-conductive and directly connected to other heat-conductive or heat-generating components (or connected to those components through intermediate heat-conductive components or in such close proximity as to permit a substantial transfer of heat) will be described as thermally connected to those components, or in thermal communication with those components. On the contrary, two components with heat-insulative materials therebetween, which materials significantly prevent heat transfer between the two components, or only allow for incidental heat transfer, are not described as thermally connected or in thermal communication with each other. The terms “heat-conductive” or “thermally-conductive” do not apply to any material that provides incidental heat conduction, but are intended to refer to materials that are typically known as good heat conductors or known to have utility for transferring heat, or components having similar heat conducting properties as those materials.

Embodiments may be described, and illustrated in the drawings, in terms of functional blocks, units and/or modules. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that these blocks, units and/or modules are physically implemented by electronic (or optical) circuits such as logic circuits, discrete components, analog circuits, hard-wired circuits, memory elements, wiring connections, and the like, which may be formed using semiconductor-based fabrication techniques or other manufacturing technologies. In the case of the blocks, units and/or modules being implemented by microprocessors or similar, they may be programmed using software (e.g., microcode) to perform various functions discussed herein and may optionally be driven by firmware and/or software. Alternatively, each block, unit and/or module may be implemented by dedicated hardware, or as a combination of dedicated hardware to perform some functions and a processor (e.g., one or more programmed microprocessors and associated circuitry) to perform other functions. Also, each block, unit and/or module of the embodiments may be physically separated into two or more interacting and discrete blocks, units and/or modules. Further, the blocks, units and/or modules of the various embodiments may be physically combined into more complex blocks, units and/or modules.

If any terms in this application conflict with terms used in any application(s) from which this application claims priority, or terms incorporated by reference into this application or the application(s) from which this application claims priority, a construction based on the terms as used or defined in this application should be applied.

It should be noted that, the following description of various embodiments of the present disclosure is described herein in order to clearly illustrate the inventive features of the present disclosure. However, it is not intended that various embodiments can only be implemented alone. Rather, it is contemplated that various of the different embodiments can be and are intended to be used together in a final product, and can be combined in various ways to achieve various final products. Thus, people having ordinary skill in the art may combine the possible embodiments together or replace the components/modules between the different embodiments according to design requirements. The embodiments taught herein are not limited to the form described in the following examples, any possible replacement and arrangement between the various embodiments are included.

FIG. 1A is a plane cross-sectional view schematically illustrating an LED tube lamp including an LED light strip and a power supply module according to some exemplary embodiments. Referring to FIG. 1A , an LED tube lamp may include an LED light strip 2 and a power supply 5 , in which the power supply 5 can be a modularized element, which means the power supply 5 can be integrated into a single power supply circuit or can be integrated into several separated power supply circuits. For example, in an embodiment, the power supply 5 can be a single unit (i.e., all components of the power supply 5 are disposed on a single body/carrier) disposed in one of the end caps at one end of the lamp tube. In another embodiment, the power supply 5 can be two separate units (i.e., the components of the power supply 5 are divided into two parts) disposed in different end caps at respective ends of the lamp tube.

In the embodiment of FIG. 1A , the power supply 5 is illustrated as being integrated into one module for example (hereinafter referred to as a power supply module 5 ) and is disposed in the end cap parallel to the axial direction cyd of the lamp tube. More specifically, the axial direction cyd of the lamp tube, which refers to the direction pointed to by the axis of the lamp tube, is perpendicular to the end wall of the end caps. Disposing the power supply module 5 parallel to the axial direction cyd means the circuit board, with the electronic components of the power supply module, is parallel to the axial direction cyd. Therefore, the normal direction of the circuit board is perpendicular to the axial direction cyd. In certain embodiments, the power supply module 5 can be arranged in a position where the axial direction cyd passes, in a position above the axial plane/axial direction cyd, or in a position below the axial plane/axial direction cyd (relative to the figure). The invention is not limited thereto.

FIG. 1B is another plane cross-sectional view schematically illustrating an LED tube lamp including an LED light strip and a power supply module according to some exemplary embodiments. Referring to FIG. 1B , the difference between the embodiments of FIGS. 1A and 1B is that the power supply module 5 illustrated in FIG. 1B is disposed in the end cap perpendicular to the axial direction cyd of the lamp tube. For example, the power supply module 5 is disposed parallel to the end wall of the end caps. Although the FIG. 1B shows that the electronic components are disposed on the side facing the interior of the lamp tube, the invention is not limited thereto. In certain embodiments, the electronic component can be disposed on the side facing the end wall of the corresponding end cap. Under these configurations, since at least one opening can be formed in the end wall of the end caps, the heat dissipation effect of the electronic components can be improved through the opening.

In addition, due to the power supply module 5 being vertically disposed in the end caps, the space within the end caps can be increased so that the power supply module 5 can be further divided into a plurality of separated circuit boards as shown in FIG. 1C . FIG. 1C is still another plane cross-sectional view schematically illustrating an LED tube lamp including an LED light strip and a power supply module according to some exemplary embodiments. The difference between the embodiments of FIGS. 1B and 1C is that the power supply 5 is formed by two power supply modules 5 a and 5 b . The power supply modules 5 a and 5 b are disposed in the end cap perpendicular to the axial direction cyd and are arranged, toward to the end wall of the end cap, along the axial direction cyd. Specifically, power supply modules 5 a and 5 b are respectively provided with each having an independent circuit board. The circuit boards are connected to each other through one or more electrical connection means, so that the overall power supply circuit topology is similar to the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 1A or FIG. 1B . According to the configuration of FIG. 1C , the space within the end caps can be more effectively utilized, such that the circuit layout space can be increased. In some certain embodiments, the electronic components generating more heat (e.g., the capacitor and the inductor) can be disposed on the power supply module 5 b , which is close to the end wall, so as to enhance the heat dissipation effect of the electronic components through the opening on the end cap.

In certain embodiments, the circuit boards of the power supply modules 5 a and 5 b can be designed as a disk shape structure (not shown). The disk-shaped circuit boards are disposed in the same end cap along the same axis. For example, the maximum outer diameter of the circuit boards may be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the end cap and the normal direction of the disk plane is substantially parallel to the radial direction of the end cap, so that the disk-shaped circuit boards can be disposed into the space of the end cap. In certain embodiments, at least a DC-to-DC converter circuit and a conversion control IC (i.e., lighting control circuit) are disposed on the disk-shaped circuit board of the power supply module 5 a , and at least a fuse, a EMI module, a rectifying circuit and an installation detection module are disposed on the disk-shaped circuit board of the power supply module 5 b . The disk-shaped circuit board of the power supply module 5 b is disposed close to the side wall of the end cap (in relation to the power supply module 5 a and other components of the LED tube lamp) and electrically connected to the conduction pins on the end cap. The disk-shaped circuit boards of the power supply modules 5 a and 5 b are electrically connected to each other. The disk-shaped circuit board of the power supply module 5 a is electrically connected to the LED light strip 2 .

In certain embodiments, in order to vertically dispose the power supply modules 5 a and 5 b in the cylindrical end caps and maximize the layout area, the circuit boards of the power supply modules 5 a and 5 b can adopt an octagon structure. But other shapes can be used.

For the connection means between the power supply modules 5 a and 5 b , the separate power supply modules 5 a and 5 b can be connected to each other, for example, through a male plug and a female plug or through bonding a lead. If the lead is utilized to connect the power supply modules 5 a and 5 b , the outer layer of the lead can be wrapped with an insulating sleeve to serve as electrical insulation protection. In addition, the power supply modules 5 a and 5 b can also be connected through rivets or solder paste, or bound together by wires.

Referring to FIGS. 1A to 1C , an LED tube lamp may include an LED light strip 2 . In certain embodiments, the LED light strip 2 may be formed from a bendable circuit sheet, for example that may be flexible. As described further below, the bendable circuit sheet is also described as a bendable circuit board. The LED light strip 2 , and for example the bendable circuit sheet, may also be a flexible strip, such as a flexible or non-rigid tape or a ribbon. The bendable circuit sheet may have ends thereof passing across a transition region of the lamp tube of the LED tube lamp to be connected to a power supply 5 . In some embodiments, the ends of the bendable circuit sheet may be connected to a power supply in an end cap of the LED tube lamp. For example, the ends may be connected in a manner such that a portion of the bendable circuit sheet is bent away from the lamp tube and passes through the transition region where a lamp tube narrows, and such that the bendable circuit sheet vertically overlaps part of a power supply within an end cap of the LED tube lamp.

A power supply as described herein may include a circuit that converts or generates power based on a received voltage, in order to supply power to operate an LED module of the LED tube lamp. A power supply, as described in connection with power supply 5 , may be otherwise referred to as a power conversion module or circuit or a power supply module. A power conversion module or circuit, or power supply module, may supply or provide power from external signal(s), such as from an AC power line or from a ballast, to an LED module. For example, a power supply 5 may refer to a circuit that converts ac line voltage to dc voltage and supplies power to the LED or LED module. The power supply 5 may include one or more power components mounted thereon for converting and/or generating power.

FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating leads that are disposed between two end caps of an LED tube lamp according to some exemplary embodiments.

Referring to FIG. 2 , in some embodiments, the LED tube lamp includes a lamp tube (not shown in FIG. 2 ), end caps (not shown in FIG. 2 ), a light strip 2 , short circuit boards 253 (also referred to as right end short circuit board 253 and left end short circuit board 253 ) respectively provided at two ends of the lamp tube, and an inductive element 526 . Each of the lamp tube's two ends may have at least one conductive pin or external connection terminal for receiving the external driving signal. The end caps are disposed respectively at the two ends of the lamp tube, and (at least partial electronic components of) the short circuit boards 253 shown as located respectively at the left and right ends of the lamp tube in FIG. 2 may be disposed respectively in the end caps. The short circuit boards may be, for example, a rigid circuit board such as depicted in and described in connection with FIG. 1 and the various other rigid circuit boards described herein. For example, these circuit boards may include mounted thereon one or more power supply components for generating and/or converting power to be used to light the LED light sources on the light strip 2 . The light strip 2 is disposed in the lamp tube and includes an LED module, which includes an LED unit 632 .

For an LED tube lamp, such as an 8 ft. 42 W LED tube lamp, to receive a dual-end power supply between two ends of the LED tube lamp, two (partial) power supply circuits (each having a power rating of e.g. 21 W, 17.5 W, or 12.5 W) are typically disposed respectively in the two end caps of the lamp tube, and a lead (typically referred to as lead Line, Neutral and Ground) disposed between two end caps of the lamp tube (e.g., between two conductive pins or external connection terminals at respective end caps of the lamp tube), connected to the power supply circuits disposed on the opposite sides of the light strip and as an input signal line may be needed. The lead Line (also known as the “live wire”) and/or the lead Neutral (also known as the “neutral wire”) may be disposed along the light strip that may include, e.g., a bendable circuit sheet or flexible circuit board, for receiving and transmitting an external driving signal from the power supply. This lead Line is distinct from two leads typically referred to as LED+ and LED− that are respectively connected to a positive electrode and a negative electrode of an LED unit in the lamp tube. This lead Line is also distinct from a lead Ground (also known as the “earth wire”) which is disposed between respective ground terminals of the LED tube lamp. Because the lead Line is typically disposed along the light strip, and because parasitic capacitance(s) (e.g., about 200 pF) may be caused between the lead Line and the lead LED+ due to their close proximity to each other, some high frequency signals (not the intended frequency range of signal for supplying power to the LED module) passing through the lead LED+ will be reflected to the lead Line through the parasitic capacitance(s) and then can be detected there as undesirable EMI effects. The unfavorable EMI effects may lower or degrade the quality of power transmission in the LED tube lamp.

Again referring to FIG. 2 , in some embodiments, the right and left short circuit boards 253 are electrically connected to the light strip 2 . In some embodiments, the electrical connection (such as through soldering or bond pad(s)) between the short circuit boards 253 and the light strip 2 may comprise a first terminal (denoted by “L”), a second terminal (denoted by “+” or “LED+”), a third terminal (denoted by “−” or “LED−”), and a fourth terminal (denoted by “GND” or “ground”). The light strip 2 includes the first through fourth terminals at a first end of the light strip 2 adjacent to the right end short circuit board 253 near one end cap of the lamp tube and includes the first through fourth terminals at a second end, opposite to the first end, of the light strip 2 adjacent to the left end short circuit board 253 near the other end cap of the lamp tube. The right end short circuit board 253 also includes the first through fourth terminals to respectively connect to the first through fourth terminals of the light strip 2 at the first end of the light strip 2 . The left end short circuit board 253 also includes the first through fourth terminals to respectively connect to the first through fourth terminals of the light strip 2 at the second end of the light strip 2 . For example, the first terminal L is utilized to connect a lead (typically referred to as Line or Neutral) for connecting both of the at least one pin of each of the two ends of the lamp tube; the second terminal LED+ is utilized to connect each of the short circuit boards 253 to the positive electrode of the LED unit 632 of the LED module included in the light strip 2 . The third terminal LED− is utilized to connect each of the short circuit boards 253 to the negative electrode of the LED unit 632 of the LED module included in the light strip 2 . The fourth terminal GND is utilized to connect to a reference potential. Preferably and typically, the reference potential is defined as the electrical potential of ground. Therefore, the fourth terminal is utilized for a grounding purpose of the power supply module of the LED tube lamp.

To address the undesirable EMI effects mentioned above caused by parasitic capacitance(s) between the lead Line and the lead LED+, inductive element 526 disposed in the lead Ground serves to reduce or prevent the EMI effects by blocking the forming of a complete circuit between the lead LED+ and the Ground lead for the high frequency signals mentioned above to pass through, since at these high frequencies inductive element 526 behaves like an open circuit. When the complete circuit is prevented or blocked by inductive element 526 , the high frequency signals will be prevented on the lead LED+ and therefore will not be reflected to the lead Line, thus preventing the undesirable EMI effects. In some embodiments, the inductive element 526 is connected between two of the fourth terminals respectively of the right end and left end short circuit boards 253 at the two ends of the lamp tube. In some embodiments, the inductive element 526 may comprise an inductor such as a choke inductor or a dual-inline-package inductor capable of achieving a function of eliminating or reducing the above-mentioned EMI effects of the lead (“Line”) disposed along the light strip 2 between two of the first terminals (“L”) respectively at two ends of the lamp tube. Therefore, this function can improve signal transmission (which may include transmissions through leads “L”, “LED+”, and “LED−”) of the power supply in the LED tube lamp, and thus the qualities of the LED tube lamp. Therefore, the LED tube lamp comprising the inductive element 526 may effectively reduce EMI effects of the lead “L” or “Line”. Moreover, such an LED tube lamp or an LED lighting fixture may further comprise an installation detection circuit or module, which is described below with reference to FIGS. 10A and 10B , for detecting whether or not the LED tube lamp is properly installed in a lamp socket or whether an external impedance is electrically connected to the LED tube lamp.

FIG. 3A is a block diagram of a system including an LED tube lamp including a power supply module according to certain embodiments. Referring to FIG. 3A , an alternating current (AC) power supply 508 is used to supply an AC supply signal, and may be an AC power line with a voltage rating, for example, in 100-277V and a frequency rating, for example, of 50 Hz or 60 Hz. An LED tube lamp 500 receives the AC supply signal as an external driving signal and is thus driven to emit light. In the present embodiment, the LED tube lamp 500 is in a driving environment in which it is power-supplied at its one end cap having two conductive pins 501 and 502 (which can be referred to the external connection terminals), which are used to receive the AC supply signal.

In an alternative to the application of the single-end power supply mentioned above, the LED tube lamp may be power-supplied at its both end caps respectively having two conductive pins, which are coupled to the lamp driving circuit to concurrently receive the AC supply signal. Under the structure where the LED tube lamp having two end caps and each end cap has two conductive pins, the LED tube lamp can be designed for receiving the AC supply signal by one pin in each end cap, or by two pins in each end cap.

An example of a circuit configuration of the power supply module receiving the AC supply signal by one pin in each end cap can be seen in FIGS. 3B and 3C (referred to as a “dual-end-single-pin configuration” hereinafter), which illustrates a block diagram of an exemplary power supply module for an LED tube lamp according to some exemplary embodiments. Referring to FIG. 4B , each end cap of the LED tube lamp 500 could have only one conductive pin for receiving the AC supply signal. For example, it is not required to have two conductive pins used in each end cap for the purpose of passing electricity through the both ends of the LED tube lamp. Compared to FIG. 3A , the conductive pins 501 and 502 in FIG. 3B are correspondingly configured at both end caps of the LED tube lamp 500 , and the AC power supply 508 is the same as those mentioned above. Referring to FIG. 3C , the conductive pins 501 and 502 are configured similar to those in FIG. 3B . The difference between the embodiments of FIGS. 3B and 3C is that the LED tube lamp 500 shown in FIG. 3C further has two conductive pins 503 and 504 on each end cap. The conductive pins 503 and 504 are capable of receiving the power supply signal or other signals for the operational needs of the LED tube lamp, relevant embodiments will be described below.

The circuit configuration of the power supply module receiving the AC supply signal by two pins in each end cap can be referred to FIG. 3D (referred to “dual-end-dual-pin configuration” hereinafter), which illustrates a block diagram of an exemplary power supply module for an LED tube lamp according to some exemplary embodiments. Compared to FIG. 3A and FIG. 3B , the present embodiment further includes pins 503 and 504 , in which one end cap of the lamp tube has the pins 501 and 503 , and the other end cap of the lamp tube has the pins 502 and 504 . Under the dual-end-dual-pin configuration, both pins on the same end cap can be internally connected to each other, for example, the pin 501 is connected to the pin 503 on the left end cap, and/or the pin 502 is connected to the pin 504 on the right end cap. Therefore, the pins 501 and 503 can be used for connecting to the live wire of the AC power source 508 , and the pins 502 and 504 can be used for connecting to the neutral wire of the AC power source 508 . Thus, the power supply module within the tube lamp may perform the rectification and filtering to the received signal. When the AC supply signal is provided to two pins on each end cap, the pins on the same side may receive the AC supply signal from one of the live wire and the neutral wire.

FIG. 4A is a block diagram of an exemplary power supply module in an LED lamp according to some embodiments. Referring to FIG. 5A , the power supply module 5 is coupled to an LED module 50 in the LED tube lamp 500 and includes a rectifying circuit 510 (also referred to as first rectifying circuit 510 ), a filtering circuit 520 , and a driving circuit 530 . The rectifying circuit 510 is coupled to a first pin 501 and a second pin 502 at one end, for receiving and then rectifying an external driving signal in order to output or produce a rectified signal at a first rectifying output terminal 511 and a second rectifying output terminal 512 . The external driving signal in this embodiment may be an AC power signal provided by an AC power supply 508 under any of the power-supply configurations of FIGS. 3A-3D , or even be a DC signal compatible with or suitable for normal operations of the LED tube lamp 500 . The filtering circuit 520 is coupled to the rectifying circuit 510 for performing filtering of the rectified signal. Specifically, the filtering circuit 520 is coupled to the first rectifying output terminal 511 and second rectifying output terminal 512 in order to receive and then filter the rectified signal, and then outputs or produces a filtered signal at a first filtering output terminal 521 and a second filtering output terminal 522 . The driving circuit 530 is coupled to the LED module 50 and the filtering circuit 520 , in order to receive the filtered signal and then produce a driving signal for driving the LED module 50 to emit light. The driving circuit 530 includes e.g. a DC-to-DC converter circuit for converting the received filtered signal into the driving signal, which is output at a first driving output terminal 531 and a second driving output terminal 532 . In FIG. 5A , the driving circuit 530 is coupled to the first filtering output terminal 521 and second filtering output terminal 522 in order to receive the filtered signal and then drive LEDs (not illustrated) in the LED tube lamp 500 to emit light. The operation(s) of embodiments of the driving circuit 530 is further described in more detail below. The LED module 50 is coupled to the first driving output terminal 531 and second driving output terminal 532 in order to receive the driving signal to emit light, for which the electrical current flowing on or through the LED module 50 is preferably stable at a set or defined current value. In some embodiments, an LED module 50 being driven to emit light can refer to lumens of the LED module reaching at least fifty percent of the lumen output indicated by the manufacturer, also described as nominal lumens (e.g., at least fifty percent of the lumens expected to be output under full power operating condition). Details of these operations are described below according to some certain embodiments.

FIG. 4B is a block diagram of an exemplary power supply module in LED lamp according to some exemplary embodiments. Referring to FIG. 4B , the power supply module of the LED lamp includes a first rectifying circuit 510 , a filtering circuit 520 , a driving circuit 530 , and another rectifying circuit 540 (also referred to as second rectifying circuit 540 ). The power supply module 5 of FIG. 4B can be utilized in the single-end power supply configuration illustrated in FIG. 4A or the dual-end power supply configuration illustrated in FIGS. 3B to 3D . The first rectifying circuit 510 is coupled to the pins 501 and 502 to receive and then rectify an external driving signal transmitted by the pins 501 and 502 ; the second rectifying circuit 540 is coupled to the pins 503 and 504 to receive and then rectify an external driving signal transmitted by pins 503 and 504 . The first rectifying circuit 510 and the second rectifying circuit 540 of the power supply module collectively output a rectified signal at two rectifying circuit output terminals 511 and 512 . The filtering circuit 520 is coupled to the rectifying circuit output terminals 511 and 512 to receive and then filter the rectified signal, so as to output a filtered signal at two filtering output terminals. The driving circuit 530 is coupled to the first filtering output terminal 521 and second filtering output terminal 522 in order to receive the filtered signal and then drive LEDs (not illustrated) in the LED tube lamp 500 to emit light.

FIG. 4C is a block diagram of an exemplary LED lamp according to some exemplary embodiments. Referring to FIG. 4C , the power supply module of LED tube lamp includes a rectifying circuit 510 , a filtering circuit 520 and a driving circuit 530 , which can also be utilized in the single-end power supply configuration illustrated in FIG. 3A or the dual-end power supply configuration illustrated in FIGS. 3B to 3D . The difference between the embodiments illustrated in FIG. 4C and FIG. 4B is that the rectifying circuit 510 has three input terminals to be coupled to the pins 501 to 503 , respectively. The rectifying circuit 510 rectifies the signals received from the pins 501 to 503 , in which the pin 504 can be set to the floating state or connected to the pin 503 . Therefore, the second rectifying circuit 540 can be omitted in the present embodiment. The rest of circuitry operates substantially the same as the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 4B , so that the detailed description is not repeated herein.

Although there are two rectifying output terminals 511 and 512 and two filtering output terminals 521 and 522 in the embodiments of these FIGS., in practice the number of ports or terminals for coupling between the rectifying circuit 510 , the filtering circuit 520 , the driving circuit 530 and the LED module 50 may be one or more depending on the needs of signal transmission between the circuits or devices.

In addition, the power supply module of the LED lamp described in FIG. 4A , and embodiments of a power supply module of an LED lamp described below, may each be used in the LED tube lamp 500 in FIGS. 4A and 4B , and may instead be used in any other type of LED lighting structure having two conductive pins used to conduct power, such as LED light bulbs, personal area lights (PAL), plug-in LED lamps with different types of bases (such as types of PL-S, PL-D, PL-T, PL-L, etc.), etc. Further, the implementation for LED light bulbs may provide better effects on protecting from electric shock as combining this invention and the structures disclosed in PCT patent application WO2016045631.

FIG. 5A is a schematic circuit diagram of a rectifying circuit according to an embodiment. Referring to FIG. 5A , a rectifying circuit 610 , i.e. a bridge rectifier, includes four rectifying diodes 611 , 612 , 613 , and 614 , configured to full-wave rectify a received signal. The diode 611 has an anode connected to the output terminal 512 , and a cathode connected to the pin 502 . The diode 612 has an anode connected to the output terminal 512 , and a cathode connected to the pin 501 . The diode 613 has an anode connected to the pin 502 , and a cathode connected to the output terminal 511 . The diode 614 has an anode connected to the pin 501 , and a cathode connected to the output terminal 511 .

When the pins 501 and 502 receive an AC supply signal, the rectifying circuit 610 operates as follows. During the connected AC supply signal's positive half cycle, the AC supply signal is input through the pin 501 , the diode 614 , and the output terminal 511 in sequence, and later output through the output terminal 512 , the diode 611 , and the pin 502 in sequence. During the connected AC supply signal's negative half cycle, the AC supply signal is input through the pin 502 , the diode 613 , and the output terminal 511 in sequence, and later output through the output terminal 512 , the diode 612 , and the pin 501 in sequence. Therefore, during the connected AC supply signal's full cycle, the positive pole of the rectified signal produced by the rectifying circuit 610 keeps at the output terminal 511 , and the negative pole of the rectified signal remains at the output terminal 512 . Accordingly, the rectified signal produced or output by the rectifying circuit 610 is a full-wave rectified signal.

When the pins 501 and 502 are coupled to a DC power supply to receive a DC signal, the rectifying circuit 610 operates as follows. When the pin 501 is coupled to the positive end of the DC power supply and the pin 502 to the negative end of the DC power supply, the DC signal is input through the pin 501 , the diode 614 , and the output terminal 511 in sequence, and later output through the output terminal 512 , the diode 611 , and the pin 502 in sequence. When the pin 501 is coupled to the negative end of the DC power supply and the pin 502 to the positive end of the DC power supply, the DC signal is input through the pin 502 , the diode 613 , and the output terminal 511 in sequence, and later output through the output terminal 512 , the diode 612 , and the pin 501 in sequence. Therefore, no matter what the electrical polarity of the DC signal is between the pins 501 and 502 , the positive pole of the rectified signal produced by the rectifying circuit 610 keeps at the output terminal 511 , and the negative pole of the rectified signal remains at the output terminal 512 .

Therefore, the rectifying circuit 610 in this embodiment can output or produce a proper rectified signal regardless of whether the received input signal is an AC or DC signal.

FIG. 5B is a schematic diagram of a rectifying circuit according to an embodiment. Referring to FIG. 5B , a rectifying circuit 710 includes two rectifying diodes 711 and 712 , configured to half-wave rectify a received signal. The rectifying diode 711 has an anode connected to the pin 502 , and a cathode connected to the rectifying output terminal 511 . The rectifying diode 712 has an anode connected to the rectifying output terminal 511 , and a cathode connected to the pin 501 . The rectifying output terminal 512 can be omitted or connect to ground according to the practical application. Detailed operations of the rectifying circuit 710 are described below.

During the connected AC supply signal's positive half cycle, the signal level of the AC supply signal input through the pin 501 is greater than the signal level of the AC supply signal input through the pin 502 . At that time, both the rectifying diodes 711 and 712 are cut off since being reverse biased, and thus the rectifying circuit 710 stops outputting the rectified signal. During the connected AC supply signal's negative half cycle, the signal level of the AC supply signal input through the pin 501 is less than the signal level of the AC supply signal input through the pin 502 . At that time, both the rectifying diodes 711 and 712 are conducting since they are forward biased, and thus the AC supply signal is input through the pin 502 , the rectifying diode 711 , and the rectifying output terminal 511 in sequence, and later output through the rectifying output terminal 512 or another circuit or ground of the LED tube lamp. Accordingly, the rectified signal produced or output by the rectifying circuit 710 is a half-wave rectified signal.

It should be noted that, when the pins 501 and 502 shown in FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B are respectively changed to the pins 503 and 504 , the rectifying circuit 610 and 710 can be considered as the rectifying circuit 540 illustrated in FIG. 4B . More specifically, in an exemplary embodiment, when the full-wave rectifying circuit 610 shown in FIG. 5A is applied to the dual-end tube lamp shown in FIG. 4B , the configuration of the rectifying circuits 510 and 540 is shown in FIG. 5C . FIG. 5C is a schematic diagram of a rectifying circuit according to an embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 5C , the rectifying circuit 640 has the same configuration as the rectifying circuit 610 , which is the bridge rectifying circuit. The rectifying circuit 610 includes four rectifying diodes 611 to 614 , which has the same configuration as the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 5A . The rectifying circuit 640 includes four rectifying diodes 641 to 644 and is configured to perform full-wave rectification on the received signal. The rectifying diode 641 has an anode coupled to the rectifying output terminal 512 , and a cathode coupled to the pin 504 . The rectifying diode 642 has an anode coupled to the rectifying output terminal 512 , and a cathode coupled to the pin 503 . The rectifying diode 643 has an anode coupled to the pin 502 , and a cathode coupled to the rectifying output terminal 511 . The rectifying diode 644 has an anode coupled to the pin 503 , and a cathode coupled to the rectifying output terminal 511 .

In the present embodiment, the rectifying circuits 610 and 640 are configured to correspond to each other, in which the difference between the rectifying circuits 610 and 640 is that the input terminal of the rectifying circuit 610 (which can be used as the rectifying circuit 510 shown in FIG. 4B ) is coupled to the pins 501 and 502 , but the input terminal of the rectifying circuit 640 (which can be used as the rectifying circuit 540 shown in FIG. 4B ) is coupled to the pins 503 and 504 . Therefore, the present embodiment applies a structure including two full-wave rectifying circuits for implementing the dual-end-dual-pin circuit configuration.

In some embodiments, in the rectifying circuit illustrated in the example of FIG. 5C , although the circuit configuration is disposed as the dual-end-dual-pin configuration, the external driving signal is not limited to be provided through both pins on each end cap. Under the configuration shown in FIG. 5C , no matter whether the AC supply signal is provided through both pins on single end cap or through signal pin on each end cap, the rectifying circuit shown in FIG. 5C may correctly rectify the received signal and generate the rectified signal for lighting the LED tube lamp. Detailed operations are described below.

When the AC supply signal is provided through both pins on single end cap, the AC supply signal can be applied to the pins 501 and 502 , or to the pins 503 and 504 . When the AC supply signal is applied to the pins 501 and 502 , the rectifying circuit 610 performs full-wave rectification on the AC supply signal based on the operation illustrated in the embodiment of FIG. 5A , and the rectifying circuit 640 does not operate. On the contrary, when the external driving signal is applied to the pins 503 and 504 , the rectifying circuit 640 performs full-wave rectification on the AC supply signal based on the operation illustrated in the embodiment of FIG. 5A , and the rectifying circuit 610 does not operate.

When the AC supply signal is provided through a single pin on each end cap, the AC supply signal can be applied to the pins 501 and 504 , or to the pins 502 and 503 . For example, the dual pins on each end cap can be arranged based on standard socket configuration so that the AC supply signal will be applied to either pins 501 and 504 or pins 502 and 503 , but not pins 501 and 503 or pins 502 and 504 (e.g., based on the physical positioning of the pins on each end cap).

When the AC supply signal is applied to the pins 501 and 504 , during the AC supply signal's positive half cycle (e.g., the voltage at pin 501 is higher than the voltage at pin 504 ), the AC supply signal is input through the pin 501 , the diode 614 , and the output terminal 511 in sequence, and later output through the output terminal 512 , the diode 641 , and the pin 504 in sequence. In this manner, output terminal 511 remains at a higher voltage than output terminal 512 . During the AC supply signal's negative half cycle (e.g., the voltage at pin 504 is higher than the voltage at pin 501 ), the AC supply signal is input through the pin 504 , the diode 643 , and the output terminal 511 in sequence, and later output through the output terminal 512 , the diode 612 , and the pin 501 in sequence. In this manner, output terminal 511 still remains at a higher voltage than output terminal 512 . Therefore, during the AC supply signal's full cycle, the positive pole of the rectified signal remains at the output terminal 511 , and the negative pole of the rectified signal remains at the output terminal 512 . Accordingly, the diodes 612 and 614 of the rectifying circuit 610 and the diodes 641 and 643 of the rectifying circuit 640 are configured to perform the full-wave rectification on the AC supply signal and thus the rectified signal produced or output by the diodes 612 , 614 , 641 , and 643 is a full-wave rectified signal.

On the other hand, when the AC supply signal is applied to the pins 502 and 503 , during the AC supply signal's positive half cycle (e.g., the voltage at pin 502 is higher than the voltage at pin 503 ), the AC supply signal is input through the pin 502 , the diode 613 , and the output terminal 511 in sequence, and later output through the output terminal 512 , the diode 642 , and the pin 503 . During the AC supply signal's negative half cycle (e.g., the voltage at pin 503 is higher than the voltage at pin 502 ), the AC supply signal is input through the pin 503 , the diode 644 , and the output terminal 511 in sequence, and later output through the output terminal 512 , the diode 611 , and the pin 502 in sequence. Therefore, during the AC supply signal's full cycle, the positive pole of the rectified signal remains at the output terminal 511 , and the negative pole of the rectified signal remains at the output terminal 512 . Accordingly, the diodes 611 and 613 of the rectifying circuit 610 and the diodes 642 and 644 of the rectifying circuit 640 are configured to perform the full-wave rectification on the AC supply signal and thus the rectified signal produced or output by the diodes 611 , 613 , 642 , and 644 is a full-wave rectified signal.

When the AC supply signal is provided through two pins on each end cap, the operation in each of the rectifying circuits 610 and 640 can be referred to the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 5A , and it will not be repeated herein. The rectified signal produced by the rectifying circuits 610 and 640 is output to the back-end circuit after superposing on the output terminals 511 and 512 .

In an exemplary embodiment, the rectifying circuit 510 illustrated in FIG. 4C can be implemented by the configuration illustrated in FIG. 5D . FIG. 5D is a schematic diagram of a rectifying circuit according to an embodiment. Referring to FIG. 5D , the rectifying circuit 910 includes diodes 911 to 914 , which are configured as the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 5A . In the present embodiment, the rectifying circuit 910 further includes rectifying diodes 915 and 916 . The diode 915 has an anode coupled to the rectifying output terminal 512 , and a cathode coupled to the pin 503 . The diode 916 has an anode coupled to the pin 503 , and a cathode coupled to the rectifying output terminal 511 . The pin 504 is set to the float state in the present embodiment.

Specifically, the rectifying circuit 910 can be regarded as a rectifying circuit including three sets of bridge arms, in which each of the bridge arms provides an input signal receiving terminal. For example, the diodes 911 and 913 constitute a first bridge arm for receiving the signal on the pin 502 ; the diodes 912 and 914 constitute a second bridge arm for receiving the signal on the pin 501 ; and the diodes 915 and 916 constitute a third bridge arm for receiving the signal on the pin 503 . According to the rectifying circuit 910 illustrated in FIG. 5D , the full-wave rectification can be performed as long as the live wire and the neutral wire are respectively received by two of the bridge arms. Accordingly, under the configuration illustrated in FIG. 5D , no matter what kind of power supply configuration, such as the AC supply signal being provided to both pins on single end cap, a single pin on each end cap, or both pins on each end cap, the rectifying circuit 910 is compatible for producing the rectified signal, correctly. Detailed operations of the present embodiment are described below.

When the AC supply signal is provided through both pins on single end cap, the AC supply signal can be applied to the pins 501 and 502 . The diodes 911 to 914 perform full-wave rectification on the AC supply signal based on the operation illustrated in the embodiment of FIG. 5A , and the diodes 915 and 916 do not operate.

When the AC supply signal is provided through single pin on each end cap, the AC supply signal can be applied to the pins 501 and 503 , or to the pins 502 and 503 . When the AC supply signal is applied to the pins 501 and 503 , during the AC supply signal's positive half cycle (e.g., when the signal on pin 501 has a greater voltage than the signal on pin 503 ), the AC supply signal is input through the pin 501 , the diode 914 , and the output terminal 511 in sequence, and later output through the output terminal 512 , the diode 915 , and the pin 503 in sequence. During the AC supply signal's negative half cycle (e.g., when the signal on pin 503 has a greater voltage than the signal on pin 501 ), the AC supply signal is input through the pin 503 , the diode 916 , and the output terminal 511 in sequence, and later output through the output terminal 512 , the diode 912 , and the pin 501 in sequence. Therefore, during the AC supply signal's full cycle, the positive pole of the rectified signal remains at the output terminal 511 , and the negative pole of the rectified signal remains at the output terminal 512 . Accordingly, the diodes 912 , 914 , 915 , and 916 of the rectifying circuit 910 are configured to perform the full-wave rectification on the AC supply signal and thus the rectified signal produced or output by the diodes 912 , 914 , 915 , and 916 is a full-wave rectified signal.

On the other hand, when the AC supply signal is applied to the pins 502 and 503 , during the AC supply signal's positive half cycle (e.g., when the signal on pin 502 has a greater voltage than the signal on pin 503 ), the AC supply signal is input through the pin 502 , the diode 913 , and the output terminal 511 in sequence, and later output through the output terminal 512 , the diode 915 , and the pin 503 . During the AC supply signal's negative half cycle (e.g., when the signal on pin 503 has a greater voltage than the signal on pin 502 ), the AC supply signal is input through the pin 503 , the diode 916 , and the output terminal 511 in sequence, and later output through the output terminal 512 , the diode 911 , and the pin 502 in sequence. Therefore, during the AC supply signal's full cycle, the positive pole of the rectified signal remains at the output terminal 511 , and the negative pole of the rectified signal remains at the output terminal 512 . Accordingly, the diodes 911 , 913 , 915 , and 916 of the rectifying circuit 910 are configured to perform the full-wave rectification on the AC supply signal and thus the rectified signal produced or output by the diodes 911 , 913 , 915 , and 916 is a full-wave rectified signal.

When the AC supply signal is provided through two pins on each end cap, the operation of the diodes 911 to 914 can be referred to the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 5A , and it will not be repeated herein. Also, if the signal polarity of the pin 503 is the same as the pin 501 , the operation of the diodes 915 and 916 is similar to that of the diodes 912 and 914 (i.e., the first bridge arm). On the other hand, if the signal polarity of the pin 503 is the same as that of the pin 502 , the operation of the diodes 915 and 916 is similar with the diodes 912 and 914 (i.e., the second bridge arm).

According to the embodiments mentioned above, the rectifying circuits illustrated in FIGS. 5C and 5D are compatible for receiving the AC supply signal through both pins on single end cap, through single pin on each end cap, and through both pins on each end cap, such that the compatibility of the LED tube lamp's application is improved. In this manner, an LED tube lamp can include a rectifying circuit that is arranged to rectify an AC supply signal in all of the following situations: when the LED tube lamp is connected (e.g., coupled to a socket) to receive the AC supply signal through both of two pins on a single end cap; when the LED tube lamp is connected (e.g., coupled to a socket) to receive the AC supply signal through both of two pins on each end cap; and when the LED tube lamp is connected (e.g., coupled to a socket) to receive the AC supply signal through a single pin on each end cap. In addition, based on the aspect of the actual circuit layout scenario, the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 5D requires only three power pads for connecting the corresponding pins, so that the process yield can be significantly enhanced since the manufacture process of the three pads configuration is easier than the four power pads configuration.

FIG. 6A is a block diagram of the filtering circuit according to an embodiment. A rectifying circuit 510 is shown in FIG. 6A for illustrating its connection with other components, without intending a filtering circuit 520 to include the rectifying circuit 510 . Referring to FIG. 6A , the filtering circuit 520 includes a filtering unit 523 coupled to two rectifying output terminals 511 and 512 to receive and to filter out ripples of a rectified signal from the rectifying circuit 510 . Accordingly, the waveform of a filtered signal is smoother than that of the rectified signal. The filtering circuit 520 may further include another filtering unit 524 coupled between a rectifying circuit and a pin correspondingly, for example, between the rectifying circuit 510 and the pin 501 , the rectifying circuit 510 and the pin 502 , the rectifying circuit 540 and the pin 503 , and/or the rectifying circuit 540 and the pin 504 . The filtering unit 524 is used to filter a specific frequency, for example, to filter out a specific frequency of an external driving signal. In this embodiment, the filtering unit 524 is coupled between the rectifying circuit 510 and the pin 501 . The filtering circuit 520 may further include another filtering unit 525 coupled between one of the pins 501 and 502 and one of the diodes of the rectifying circuit 510 , or between one of the pins 503 and 504 and one of the diodes of the rectifying circuit 540 to reduce or filter out electromagnetic interference (EMI). In this embodiment, the filtering unit 525 is coupled between the pin 501 and one of diodes (not shown in FIG. 6A ) of the rectifying circuit 510 . Since the filtering units 524 and 525 may be present or omitted depending on actual circumstances of their uses, they are depicted by a dotted line in FIG. 6A .

FIG. 6B is a schematic diagram of the filtering unit according to an embodiment. Referring to FIG. 6B , a filtering unit 623 includes a capacitor 625 having an end coupled to the output terminal 511 and a filtering output terminal 521 and the other end thereof coupled to the output terminal 512 and a filtering output terminal 522 , and is configured to low-pass filter a rectified signal from the output terminals 511 and 512 , so as to filter out high-frequency components of the rectified signal and thereby output a filtered signal at the filtering output terminals 521 and 522 .

FIG. 6C is a schematic diagram of the filtering unit according to an embodiment. Referring to FIG. 6C , a filtering unit 723 includes a pi filter circuit including a capacitor 725 , an inductor 726 , and a capacitor 727 . As is well known, a pi-type filter looks like the symbol π in its shape or structure. The capacitor 725 has an end connected to the output terminal 511 and coupled to the filtering output terminal 521 through the inductor 726 , and has another end connected to the output terminal 512 and the filtering output terminal 522 . The inductor 726 is coupled between output terminal 511 and the filtering output terminal 521 . The capacitor 727 has an end connected to the filtering output terminal 521 and coupled to the output terminal 511 through the inductor 726 , and has another end connected to the output terminal 512 and the filtering output terminal 522 .

As seen between the output terminals 511 and 512 and the filtering output terminals 521 and 522 , the filtering unit 723 compared to the filtering unit 623 in FIG. 6B additionally has an inductor 726 and a capacitor 727 , which perform the function of low-pass filtering like the capacitor 725 does. Therefore, the filtering unit 723 in this embodiment compared to the filtering unit 623 in FIG. 6B has a better ability to filter out high-frequency components to output a filtered signal with a smoother waveform.

The inductance values of the inductor 726 in the embodiments mentioned above are chosen in the range of, for example in some embodiments, about 10 nH to 10 mH. And the capacitance values of the capacitors 625 , 725 , and 727 in the embodiments stated above are chosen in the range of, for example in some embodiments, about 100 pF to 1 uF.

FIG. 6D is a circuit diagram of the filtering circuit according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. Referring to FIG. 6D , the embodiment of FIG. 6D is similar to that of FIG. 6A , with a main difference that the filtering circuit in FIG. 6D includes a negative voltage clipping unit 528 . The negative voltage clipping unit 528 is coupled to a filtering unit 523 , and is configured to clip, limit, or prevent a negative voltage (or other effects) that might result from possible resonances of the filtering unit 523 , in order to prevent damage due to the negative voltage to a controller or integrated circuit in a later-stage driving circuit. Specifically, the filtering unit 523 typically comprises a circuit formed by a resistor, a capacitor, an inductor, or any combination thereof, wherein due to characteristics of capacitance and inductance the filtering unit 523 exhibits pure resistive qualities at or close to a specific frequency at the resonance point. At the resonance point a signal received by the filtering unit 523 will be amplified and output, so a phenomenon of signal fluctuations will be observed at the output terminal of the filtering unit 523 . When the magnitude of the signal fluctuation is excessive to cause the level of the negative amplitude of the output of the filtering unit 523 to be lower than a ground level, a negative voltage might occur at the filtering output terminals 521 and 522 , which negative voltage will be applied to a later-stage circuit, imposing risks of damage to the later-stage circuit.

In this embodiment of FIG. 6D , the negative voltage clipping unit 528 may be configured to conduct an energy-releasing loop when the negative voltage occurs, to cause a reverse current resulting from the negative voltage to be released through the energy-releasing loop and back to the power line, thereby preventing the reverse current from flowing to a later-stage circuit. FIG. 6E is a circuit diagram of a filtering unit 723 and a negative voltage clipping unit according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. Referring to FIG. 6E , in this embodiment the negative voltage clipping unit is implemented by a diode 728 , although the present invention is not limited thereto. When resonance of the filtering unit 723 does not occur, the first filtering output terminal 521 has a voltage level higher than that at the second filtering output terminal 522 , so that the diode 728 is cut off to prevent a current to flow through. On the other hand, when resonance of the filtering unit 723 occurs to cause the negative voltage, the second filtering output terminal 522 has a voltage level higher than that at the first filtering output terminal 521 , causing the diode 728 to conduct due to the forward bias voltage across it, which conduction then releases a reverse current due to the negative voltage back to the first filtering output terminal 521 .

FIG. 7A is a block diagram of the driving circuit according to an embodiment. Referring to FIG. 7A , the driving circuit 530 includes a controller 533 , and a conversion circuit 534 for power conversion based on a current source, for driving an LED module to emit light. The conversion circuit 534 includes a switching circuit 535 (also known as a power switch) and an energy storage circuit 536 . And the conversion circuit 534 is coupled to first and second filtering output terminals 521 and 522 in order to receive and then convert a filtered signal, under the control by the controller 533 , into a driving signal at first and second driving output terminals 531 and 532 for driving the LED module. Under the control by the controller 533 , the driving signal output by the conversion circuit 534 comprises a steady current, making the LED module emit steady light.

It should be noted that, the connection embodiments of the LED module 50 described above is not limited to being utilized in a tube lamp. The connection embodiments can be applied to any kind of LED lamp directly powered by the mains electricity/commercial electricity (i.e., the AC power without passing a ballast), such as an LED bulb, an LED filament lamp, an integrated LED lamp, etc. The invention is not limited to these specific examples.

The operation of the driving circuit 1530 is further described based on the signal waveform illustrated in FIGS. 8A to 8D . FIGS. 8A to 8D are signal waveform diagrams of exemplary driving circuits according to some exemplary embodiments, in which FIGS. 8A and 8B illustrate the signal waveform and the control condition when the driving circuit 530 is operated in a Continuous-Conduction Mode (CCM) and FIGS. 8C and 8D illustrate the signal waveform and the control condition when the driving circuit 530 is operated in a Discontinuous-Conduction Mode (DCM). In signal waveform diagrams, the horizontal axis represents time (represent by a symbol “t”), and the vertical axis represents a voltage or current value (depending on the type of the signal).

The controller 533 can be, for example, a constant current controller which can generate a lighting control signal Slc and adjust the duty cycle of the lighting control signal Slc based on a current detection signal Sdet, so that the switch circuit 535 is turned on or off in response to the lighting control signal Slc. The energy storage circuit 536 is repeatedly charged and discharged according to the on/off state of the switch circuit 535 , so that the driving current ILED received by the LED module 50 can be stably maintained at a predetermined current value Ipred. In some embodiments, the lighting control signal Slc may have fixed signal period Tlc and signal amplitude, and the pulse-on period (also known as the pulse width) of each signal period Tlc, such as Ton 1 , Ton 2 and Ton 3 , can be adjusted according to the control requirement. In the present embodiment, the duty cycle of the lighting control signal Slc represents a ratio of the pulse-on period and the signal period Tlc. For example, when the pulse-on period Ton 1 is 40% of the signal period Tlc, the duty cycle of the lighting control signal Slc under the first signal period Tlc is 0.4.

In addition, the signal level of the current detection signal may represent the magnitude of the current flowing through the LED module 50 , or represent the magnitude of the current flowing through the switching circuit 535 ; the present invention is not limited thereto.

Referring to FIGS. 7A and 8A , FIG. 8A illustrates the signal waveform variation of the driving circuit 530 during a plurality of signal periods Tlc when the driving current ILED is smaller than the predetermined current value Ipred. Specifically, under the first signal period Tlc, the switching circuit 535 is turned on during the pulse-on period Ton 1 in response to the high level voltage of the lighting control signal Slc. In the meantime, the conversion circuit 534 provides the driving current ILED to the LED module 50 according to an input power received from the first and the second filtering output terminals 521 and 522 , and further charges the energy storage circuit 536 via the turned-on switch circuit 535 , so that the current IL flowing through the energy storage circuit 536 gradually increases. In this manner, during the pulse-on period Ton 1 , the energy storage circuit 536 is charged in response to the input power received from the first and the second filtering output terminals 521 and 522 .

After the pulse-on period Ton 1 , the switch circuit 535 is turned off in response to the low level voltage of the lighting control signal Slc. During a cut-off period of the switch circuit 535 , the input power output from the first and the second filtering output terminals 521 and 522 would not be provided to the LED module 50 , and the driving current ILED is dominated by the energy storage circuit 536 (i.e., the driving current ILED is generated by the energy storage circuit 536 by discharging). Due to the energy storage circuit 536 discharging during the cut-off period, the current IL is gradually decreased. Therefore, even when the lighting control signal Slc is at the low level (i.e., the disable period of the lighting control signal Slc), the driving circuit 530 continuously supply power to the LED module 50 by discharging the energy storage circuit 536 . In this embodiment, no matter whether the switch circuit 535 is turned on or off, the driving circuit 530 continuously provides a stable driving current ILED to the LED module 50 , and the current value of the driving current ILED is I 1 during the first signal period Tlc.

Under the first signal period Tlc, the controller 533 determines the current value I 1 of the driving current ILED is smaller than the predetermined current value Ipred, so that the pulse-on period of the lighting control signal Slc is adjusted to Ton 2 when entering the second signal period Tlc. The length of the pulse-on period Ton 2 equals to the length of the pulse-on period Ton 1 plus a unit period t 1 .

Under the second signal period Tlc, the operation of the switch circuit 535 and the energy storage circuit 536 are similar to the operation under the first signal period Tlc. The difference of the operation between the first and the second signal periods Tlc is the energy storage circuit 536 has relatively longer charging time and shorter discharging time since the pulse-on period Ton 2 is longer than pulse-on period Ton 1 . Therefore, the average current value of the driving current ILED under the second signal period Tlc is increased to a current value I 2 closer to the predetermined current value Ipred.

Similarly, since the current value I 2 of the driving current ILED is still smaller than the predetermined current value Ipred, the controller 533 further adjusts, under the third signal period Tlc, the pulse-on period of the lighting control signal Slc to Ton 3 , in which the length of the pulse-on period Ton 3 equals to the length of the pulse-on period Ton 2 plus the unit period t 1 . Under the third signal period Ton 3 , the operation of the switch circuit 535 and the energy storage circuit 536 are similar to the operation under the first and the second signal periods Tlc. Due to the pulse-on period Ton 3 being further increased in comparison with the pulse-on period Ton 1 and Ton 2 , the current value of the driving current ILED is increased to I 3 , and substantially reaches the predetermined current value Ipred. Since the current value I 3 of the driving current ILED has reached the predetermined current value Ipred, the controller 533 maintains the same duty cycle after the third signal period Tlc, so that the driving current ILED can be substantially maintained at the predetermined current value Ipred.

It's noted that although single-stage DC-to-DC converter circuits are taken as examples of the driving circuit 530 herein, the invention disclosed herein is not limited to using the disclosed single-stage DC-to-DC converter circuits. For example, the driving circuit 530 may instead comprise a two-stage driving circuit composed of a power factor correction circuit along with a DC-to-DC converter. Therefore, any suitable power conversion circuit structure that can be used for driving LED light sources may be applied with the invention.

In addition, the embodiments of the power conversion operation described above illustrate the inventive features of the present disclosure and these operations are not limited for use in a tube lamp. The embodiments of the power conversion operation can be applied to any kind of LED lamp directly powered by the mains electricity/commercial electricity (i.e., the AC power without passing a ballast), such as, for example an LED bulb, an LED filament lamp, and an integrated LED lamp. The embodiments taught herein are not limited to these specific examples and are not limited to the form described in the above examples, any possible replacement and arrangement between the various embodiments are included.

FIG. 7B is a schematic diagram of the driving circuit according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. Referring to FIG. 7B , a driving circuit 630 in this embodiment comprises a buck DC-to-DC converter circuit having a controller 633 and a conversion circuit. The conversion circuit includes an inductor 636 , a diode 634 for “freewheeling” of current, a capacitor 637 , and a switch 635 . The driving circuit 630 is coupled to the filtering output terminals 521 and 522 to receive and then convert a filtered signal into a lamp driving signal for driving an LED module connected between the driving output terminals 531 and 532 .

In this embodiment, the switch 635 includes a metal-oxide-semiconductor field-effect transistor (MOSFET) and has a first terminal coupled to the anode of freewheeling diode 634 , a second terminal coupled to the filtering output terminal 522 , and a control terminal coupled to the controller 633 used for controlling current conduction or cutoff between the first and second terminals of switch 635 . The driving output terminal 531 is connected to the filtering output terminal 521 , and the driving output terminal 532 is connected to an end of the inductor 636 , which has another end connected to the first terminal of switch 635 . The capacitor 637 is coupled between the driving output terminals 531 and 532 to stabilize the voltage between the driving output terminals 531 and 532 . The freewheeling diode 634 has a cathode connected to the driving output terminal 531 .

Next, a description follows as to an exemplary operation of the driving circuit 630 .

The controller 633 is configured for determining when to turn the switch 635 on (in a conducting state) or off (in a cutoff state) according to a current detection signal S 535 and/or a current detection signal S 531 . For example, in some embodiments, the controller 633 is configured to control the duty cycle of switch 635 being on and switch 635 being off in order to adjust the size or magnitude of the lamp driving signal. The current detection signal S 535 represents the magnitude of current through the switch 635 . The current detection signal S 531 represents the magnitude of current through the LED module coupled between the driving output terminals 531 and 532 . The controller 633 may control the duty cycle of the switch 635 being on and off, based on, for example, a magnitude of a current detected based on current detection signal S 531 or S 535 . As such, when the magnitude is above a threshold, the switch may be off (cutoff state) for more time, and when magnitude goes below the threshold, the switch may be on (conducting state) for more time. According to any of current detection signal S 535 or current detection signal S 531 , the controller 633 can obtain information on the magnitude of power converted by the conversion circuit. When the switch 635 is switched on, a current of a filtered signal is input through the filtering output terminal 521 , and then flows through the capacitor 637 , the driving output terminal 531 , the LED module, the inductor 636 , and the switch 635 , and then flows out from the filtering output terminal 522 . During this flowing of current, the capacitor 637 and the inductor 636 are performing storing of energy. On the other hand, when the switch 635 is switched off, the capacitor 637 and the inductor 636 perform releasing of stored energy by a current flowing from the freewheeling diode 634 to the driving output terminal 531 to make the LED module continuing to emit light.

In some embodiments, the capacitor 637 is an optional element, so it can be omitted and is thus depicted in a dotted line in FIG. 7B . In some application environments, the natural characteristic of an inductor to oppose instantaneous change in electric current passing through the inductor may be used to achieve the effect of stabilizing the current through the LED module, thus omitting the capacitor 637 .

As described above, because the driving circuit 630 is configured for determining when to turn a switch 635 on (in a conducting state) or off (in a cutoff state) according to a current detection signal S 535 and/or a current detection signal S 531 , the driving circuit 630 can maintain a stable current flow through the LED module. Therefore, the color temperature will not change with the current for some LED modules, such as white, red, blue, or green LED modules. For example, an LED can retain the same color temperature under different illumination conditions. In some embodiments, because the inductor 636 playing the role of the energy-storing circuit releases the stored power when the switch 635 cuts off, the voltage/current flowing through the LED module remains above a predetermined voltage/current level so that the LED module may continue to emit light maintaining the same color temperature. In this way, when the switch 635 conducts again, the voltage/current flowing through the LED module does not need to be adjusted to go from a minimum value to a maximum value. Accordingly, problems of flickering in the LED module can be avoided, the entire illumination can be improved, the lowest conducting period can be smaller, and the driving frequency can be higher.

FIG. 7C is a schematic diagram of the driving circuit according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. Referring to FIG. 7C , a driving circuit 730 in this embodiment comprises a boost DC-to-DC converter circuit having a controller 733 and a converter circuit. The converter circuit includes an inductor 736 , a diode 734 for “freewheeling” of current, a capacitor 737 , and a switch 735 . The driving circuit 730 is configured to receive and then convert a filtered signal from the filtering output terminals 521 and 522 into a lamp driving signal for driving an LED module coupled between the driving output terminals 531 and 532 .

The inductor 736 has an end connected to the filtering output terminal 521 , and another end connected to the anode of freewheeling diode 734 and a first terminal of the switch 735 , which has a second terminal connected to the filtering output terminal 522 and the driving output terminal 532 . The freewheeling diode 734 has a cathode connected to the driving output terminal 531 . And the capacitor 737 is coupled between the driving output terminals 531 and 532 .

The controller 733 is coupled to a control terminal of switch 735 , and is configured for determining when to turn the switch 735 on (in a conducting state) or off (in a cutoff state), according to a current detection signal S 535 and/or a current detection signal S 531 . When the switch 735 is switched on, a current of a filtered signal is input through the filtering output terminal 521 , and then flows through the inductor 736 and the switch 735 , and then flows out from the filtering output terminal 522 . During this flowing of current, the current through the inductor 736 increases with time, with the inductor 736 being in a state of storing energy, while the capacitor 737 enters a state of releasing energy, making the LED module continuing to emit light. On the other hand, when the switch 735 is switched off, the inductor 736 enters a state of releasing energy as the current through the inductor 736 decreases with time. In this state, the current through the inductor 736 then flows through the freewheeling diode 734 , the capacitor 737 , and the LED module, while the capacitor 737 enters a state of storing energy.

In some embodiments, the capacitor 737 is an optional element, so it can be omitted and is thus depicted as a dotted line in FIG. 7C . When the capacitor 737 is omitted and the switch 735 is switched on, the current of inductor 736 does not flow through the LED module, making the LED module not emit light; but when the switch 735 is switched off, the current of inductor 736 flows through the freewheeling diode 734 to reach the LED module, making the LED module emit light. Therefore, by controlling the time that the LED module emits light, and the magnitude of current through the LED module, the average luminance of the LED module can be stabilized to be above a defined value, thus also achieving the effect of emitting a steady light. It should be noted that, according to some embodiments that utilize the non-isolating driving circuit for performing power conversion, which means there is no transformer in the driving circuit, the switch 735 is capable of being controlled by detecting the magnitude of the current flowing through the switch 735 (e.g., the current detection signal S 535 ). In some embodiments where the isolating driving circuit is utilized for performing power conversion, due to the LED module and the controller being isolated by a transformer, the magnitude of the current flowing through the switch 735 cannot be used as a reference for controlling the switch 735 .

For detecting magnitude of current flowing through the switch 735 , a detection resistor (not shown) may be disposed between the switch 735 and the second filtering output terminal 522 , according to some embodiments of the present disclosure. When the switch 735 is conducting, current flowing through the detection resistor will cause a voltage difference across two terminals of the detection resistor, so using or sending current detection signal S 535 to control the controller 733 can be based on the voltage across the detection resistor, namely the voltage difference between the two terminals of the detection resistor. However, at the instant that the LED tube lamp is powered up or is struck by lightning, for example, a relatively large current (as high as 10 A or above) is likely to occur on a circuit loop on the switch 735 that may damage the detection resistor and the controller 733 . Therefore, in some embodiments, the driving circuit 730 may further include a clamping component, which is connected to the detection resistor. The clamping component performs a clamping operation on the circuit loop of the detection resistor when a current flowing through the detection resistor or the voltage difference across the detection resistor exceeds a threshold value, so as to limit a current to flow through the detection resistor. In some embodiments, the clamping component may comprise for example a plurality of diodes connected in series and the diode series are connected in parallel with the detection resistor. In such a configuration, when a large current occurs on a circuit loop on the switch 735 , the diode series in parallel with the detection resistor will quickly conduct current, so as to limit a voltage across the detection resistor to a specific voltage level. For example, if the diode series comprises 5 diodes, since the forward bias voltage of a diode is about 0.7 V, the diode series can clamp the voltage across the detection resistor to be about 3.5 V.

As described above, because the controller 733 included in the driving circuit 730 is coupled to the control terminal of switch 735 , and is configured for determining when to turn a switch 735 on (in a conducting state) or off (in a cutoff state), according to a current detection signal S 535 and/or a current detection signal S 531 , the driving circuit 730 can maintain a stable current flow through the LED module. Therefore, the color temperature may not change with the current for some LED modules, such as white, red, blue, or green LED modules. For example, an LED can retain the same color temperature under different illumination conditions. In some embodiments, because the inductor 736 acting as the energy-storing circuit releases the stored power when the switch 735 cuts off, the voltage/current flowing through the LED module remains above a predetermined voltage/current level so that the LED module may continue to emit light maintaining the same color temperature. In this way, when the switch 735 conducts again, the voltage/current flowing through the LED module does not need to be adjusted to go from a minimum value to a maximum value. Accordingly, the problem of flickering in the LED module can be avoided, the entire illumination can be improved, the lowest conducting period can be smaller, and the driving frequency can be higher.

FIG. 7D is a schematic diagram of the driving circuit according to an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure. Referring to FIG. 7D , a driving circuit 830 in this embodiment comprises a buck DC-to-DC converter circuit having a controller 833 and a conversion circuit. The conversion circuit includes an inductor 836 , a diode 834 for “freewheeling” of current, a capacitor 837 , and a switch 835 . The driving circuit 830 is coupled to the filtering output terminals 521 and 522 to receive and then convert a filtered signal into a lamp driving signal for driving an LED module connected between the driving output terminals 531 and 532 .

The switch 835 has a first terminal coupled to the filtering output terminal 521 , a second terminal coupled to the cathode of freewheeling diode 834 , and a control terminal coupled to the controller 833 to receive a control signal from the controller 833 for controlling current conduction or cutoff between the first and second terminals of the switch 835 . The anode of freewheeling diode 834 is connected to the filtering output terminal 522 and the driving output terminal 532 . The inductor 836 has an end connected to the second terminal of switch 835 , and another end connected to the driving output terminal 531 . The capacitor 837 is coupled between the driving output terminals 531 and 532 to stabilize the voltage between the driving output terminals 531 and 532 .

The controller 833 is configured for controlling when to turn the switch 835 on (in a conducting state) or off (in a cutoff state) according to a current detection signal S 535 and/or a current detection signal S 531 . When the switch 835 is switched on, a current of a filtered signal is input through the filtering output terminal 521 , and then flows through the switch 835 , the inductor 836 , and the driving output terminals 531 and 532 , and then flows out from the filtering output terminal 522 . During this flowing of current, the current through the inductor 836 and the voltage of the capacitor 837 both increase with time, so the inductor 836 and the capacitor 837 are in a state of storing energy. On the other hand, when the switch 835 is switched off, the inductor 836 is in a state of releasing energy and thus the current through it decreases with time. In this case, the current through the inductor 836 circulates through the driving output terminals 531 and 532 , the freewheeling diode 834 , and back to the inductor 836 .

In some embodiments the capacitor 837 is an optional element, so it can be omitted and is thus depicted as a dotted line in FIG. 7D . When the capacitor 837 is omitted, no matter whether the switch 835 is turned on or off, the current through the inductor 836 will flow through the driving output terminals 531 and 532 to drive the LED module to continue emitting light. It should be noted that, according to some embodiments that utilize the non-isolating driving circuit for performing power conversion, which means there is no transformer in the driving circuit, the switch 835 is capable of being controlled by detecting the magnitude of the current flowing through the switch 835 (e.g., the current detection signal S 535 ). In some embodiments where the isolating driving circuit is utilized for performing power conversion, due to the LED module and the controller being isolated by a transformer, the magnitude of the current flowing through the switch 835 cannot be used as a reference for controlling the switch 835 .

As described above, because the controller 833 included in the driving circuit 830 is configured for controlling when to turn a switch 835 on (in a conducting state) or off (in a cutoff state) according to a current detection signal S 535 and/or a current detection signal S 531 , the driving circuit 830 can maintain a stable current flow through the LED module. Therefore, the color temperature may not change with the current for some LED modules, such as white, red, blue, or green LED modules. For example, an LED can retain the same color temperature under different illumination conditions. In some embodiments, because the inductor 836 acting as the energy-storing circuit releases the stored power when the switch 835 cuts off, the voltage/current flowing through the LED module remains above a predetermined voltage/current level so that the LED module may continue to emit light maintaining the same color temperature. In this way, when the switch 835 conducts again, the voltage/current flowing through the LED module does not need to be adjusted to go from a minimum value to a maximum value. Accordingly, the problem of flickering in the LED module can be avoided, the entire illumination can be improved, the lowest conducting period can be smaller, and the driving frequency can be higher.

FIG. 7E is a schematic diagram of the driving circuit according to an exemplary embodiment of the present disclosure. Referring to FIG. 7E , a driving circuit 930 in this embodiment comprises a buck DC-to-DC converter circuit having a controller 933 and a conversion circuit. The conversion circuit includes an inductor 936 , a diode 934 for “freewheeling” of current, a capacitor 937 , and a switch 935 . The driving circuit 930 is coupled to the filtering output terminals 521 and 522 to receive and then convert a filtered signal into a lamp driving signal for driving an LED module connected between the driving output terminals 531 and 532 .

The inductor 936 has an end connected to the filtering output terminal 521 and the driving output terminal 532 , and another end connected to a first end of the switch 935 . The switch 935 has a second end connected to the filtering output terminal 522 , and a control terminal connected to controller 933 to receive a control signal from controller 933 for controlling current conduction or cutoff of the switch 935 . The freewheeling diode 934 has an anode coupled to a node connecting the inductor 936 and the switch 935 , and a cathode coupled to the driving output terminal 531 . The capacitor 937 is coupled to the driving output terminals 531 and 532 to stabilize the driving of the LED module coupled between the driving output terminals 531 and 532 .

The controller 933 is configured for controlling when to turn the switch 935 on (in a conducting state) or off (in a cutoff state) according to a current detection signal S 531 and/or a current detection signal S 535 . When the switch 935 is turned on, a current is input through the filtering output terminal 521 , and then flows through the inductor 936 and the switch 935 , and then flows out from the filtering output terminal 522 . During this flowing of current, the current through the inductor 936 increases with time, so the inductor 936 is in a state of storing energy; but the voltage of the capacitor 937 decreases with time, so the capacitor 937 is in a state of releasing energy to keep the LED module continuing to emit light. On the other hand, when the switch 935 is turned off, the inductor 936 is in a state of releasing energy and its current decreases with time. In this case, the current through the inductor 936 circulates through the freewheeling diode 934 , the driving output terminals 531 and 532 , and back to the inductor 936 . During this circulation, the capacitor 937 is in a state of storing energy and its voltage increases with time.

In some embodiments the capacitor 937 is an optional element, so it can be omitted and is thus depicted as a dotted line in FIG. 7E . When the capacitor 937 is omitted and the switch 935 is turned on, the current through the inductor 936 doesn't flow through the driving output terminals 531 and 532 , thereby making the LED module not emit light. On the other hand, when the switch 935 is turned off, the current through the inductor 936 flows through the freewheeling diode 934 and then the LED module to make the LED module emit light. Therefore, by controlling the time that the LED module emits light, and the magnitude of current through the LED module, the average luminance of the LED module can be stabilized to be above a defined value, thus also achieving the effect of emitting a steady light. It should be noted that, according to some embodiments that utilize the non-isolating driving circuit for performing power conversion, which means there is no transformer in the driving circuit, the switch 935 is capable of being controlled by detecting the magnitude of the current flowing through the switch 935 (e.g., the current detection signal S 535 ). In some embodiments where the isolating driving circuit is utilized for performing power conversion, due to the LED module and the controller being isolated by a transformer, the magnitude of the current flowing through the switch 935 cannot be used as a reference for controlling the switch 935 .

As described above, because the controller 933 included in the driving circuit 930 is configured for controlling when to turn a switch 935 on (in a conducting state) or off (in a cutoff state) according to a current detection signal S 535 and/or a current detection signal S 531 , the driving circuit 930 can maintain a stable current flow through the LED module. Therefore, the color temperature may not change with the current for some LED modules, such as white, red, blue, or green LED modules. For example, an LED can retain the same color temperature under different illumination conditions. In some embodiments, because the inductor 936 acting as the energy-storing circuit releases the stored power when the switch 935 cuts off, the voltage/current flowing through the LED module remains above a predetermined voltage/current level so that the LED module may continue to emit light maintaining the same color temperature. In this way, when the switch 935 conducts again, the voltage/current flowing through the LED module does not need to be adjusted to go from a minimum value to a maximum value. Accordingly, the problem of flickering in the LED module can be avoided, the entire illumination can be improved, the lowest conducting period can be smaller, and the driving frequency can be higher.

FIG. 9A is a block diagram of a power supply module in an LED tube lamp according to an exemplary embodiment. Referring to FIG. 9A , the power supply module 5 of FIG. 9A includes a rectifying circuit 510 , a filtering circuit 520 , a driving circuit 530 , and an auxiliary power module 760 , according to one embodiment. The auxiliary power module 760 of FIG. 9A is connected between the pins 501 and 502 to receive the external driving signal and perform a charge-discharge operation based on the external driving signal, according to some embodiments.

In some embodiments, the operation of the auxiliary power module 760 can be compared to an Off-line uninterruptible power supply (Off-line UPS). Normally, when an AC power source (e.g., the mains electricity, the commercial electricity or the power grid) supplies the external driving signal to the LED tube lamp, the external driving signal is supplied to the rectifying circuit 510 while charging the auxiliary power module 760 . Once the AC power source is unstable or abnormal, the auxiliary power module 760 takes the place of the AC power source to supply power to the rectifying circuit 510 until the AC power source recovers normal power supply. As such, the auxiliary power module 760 can operate in a backup manner by the auxiliary power module 760 interceding on behalf of the power supply process when the AC power source is unstable or abnormal. Herein, the power supplied by the auxiliary power module 760 can be an AC power or a DC power.

In some embodiments, the current path between the AC power source and the rectifying circuit 510 is cut off when the AC power source is unstable or abnormal. For example, the unstable AC power source may originate from at least one of the voltage variation, the current variation, and the frequency variation of the external driving signal exceeding a threshold. The abnormal AC power source may be caused by at least one of the voltage, the current, and the frequency of the external driving signal being lower or higher than a normal operation range.

The auxiliary power module 760 includes an energy storage unit and a voltage detection circuit, according to some embodiments. The voltage detection circuit detects the external driving signal, and determines whether the energy storage unit provides the auxiliary power to the input terminal of the rectifying circuit 510 according to the detection result. When the external driving signal stops providing or the AC signal level of the external driving signal is insufficient, the energy storage unit of the auxiliary power module 760 provides the auxiliary power, such that the LED module 50 continues to emit light based on the auxiliary power provided by the auxiliary power module 760 . In some embodiments, the energy storage unit for providing auxiliary power can be implemented by an energy storage assembly such as a battery or a supercapacitor. However, the energy storage assembly of the auxiliary power module 760 are not limited to the above exemplary embodiments and other energy storage assemblies are contemplated.

FIG. 9B illustrates an exemplary configuration of the auxiliary power module 760 operating in an Off-line UPS mode according to some embodiments of the present disclosure. Referring to FIG. 9B , the auxiliary power module 760 includes a charging unit 761 and an auxiliary power supply unit 762 . The charging unit 761 has an input terminal coupled to an external AC power supply 508 and an output terminal coupled to an input terminal of the auxiliary power supply unit 762 . The auxiliary power module 760 further includes a switching unit 763 , having terminals connected to the external AC power source 508 , an output terminal of the auxiliary power supply unit 762 , and an input terminal of the rectifying circuit 510 , respectively, according to some embodiments. In operation, depending on the state of power supply by the external AC power source 508 , the switching unit 763 is configured to selectively conduct a circuit loop passing through the external AC power supply 508 and the rectifying circuit 510 , or conduct a circuit loop passing through the auxiliary power module 760 and the rectifying circuit 510 . The auxiliary power supply unit 762 has the input terminal coupled to the output terminal of the charging unit 761 and an output terminal coupled to a power loop between the external AC power supply 508 and the rectifying circuit 510 , via the switching unit 763 , according to one embodiment. Specifically, when the external AC power supply 508 operates normally, the power, supplied by the external AC power supply 508 , will be provided to the input terminal of the rectifying circuit 510 as an external driving signal Sed via the switching unit 763 , namely, the switching unit 763 is switched to a state that connects the external AC power supply 508 to the rectifying circuit 510 . Meanwhile, the charging unit 761 charges the auxiliary power supply unit 762 based on the power supplied by the external AC power supply 508 , but the auxiliary power supply unit 762 does not output power to the rectifying circuit 510 because the external driving signal Sed is correctly transmitted on the power loop. When the external AC power supply 508 is unstable or abnormal, the auxiliary power supply unit 762 starts to supply an auxiliary power, serving as the external driving signal Sed, to the rectifying circuit 510 via the switching unit 763 , namely, the switching unit 763 is switched to a state that connects the output terminal of the auxiliary power supply unit 762 to the rectifying circuit 510 .

FIG. 9C is a block diagram of a power supply module in an LED tube lamp according to an exemplary embodiment. Referring to FIG. 9C , the power supply module 5 of the present embodiment includes a rectifying circuit 510 , a filtering circuit 520 , a driving circuit 530 and an auxiliary power module 860 of FIG. 9C . Compared to the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 9A , the input terminals Pi 1 and Pi 2 of the auxiliary power module 860 are configured to receive an external driving signal and perform a charge-discharge operation based on the external driving signal, and then supply an auxiliary power, generated from the output terminals Po 1 and Po 2 , to the rectifying circuit 510 . From the perspective of the structure of the LED tube lamp, the input terminals Pi 1 and Pi 2 or the output terminals Po 1 and Po 2 of the auxiliary power module 860 are connected to the pins of the LED tube lamp (e.g., 501 and 502 in FIG. 9A ). If the pins 501 and 502 of the LED tube lamp are connected to the input terminals Pi 1 and Pi 2 of the auxiliary power module 860 , it means the auxiliary power module 860 is disposed inside the LED tube lamp and receives the external driving signal through the pins 501 and 502 . On the other hand, if the pins 501 and 502 of the LED tube lamp are connected to the output terminals Po 1 and Po 2 of the auxiliary power module 860 , it means the auxiliary power module 860 is disposed outside the LED tube lamp and outputs the auxiliary power to the rectifying circuit through the pins 501 and 502 . The detail structure of the auxiliary power module will be further described in the following embodiments.

In some embodiments, the operation of the auxiliary power module 860 can be similar to an On-line uninterruptible power supply (On-line UPS). Under the On-line UPS operation, the external AC power source would not directly supply power to the rectifying circuit 510 , but supplies power through the auxiliary power module 860 . Therefore, the external AC power source can be isolated from the LED tube lamp, and the auxiliary power module 860 intervenes the whole power supply process, so that the power supplied to the rectifying circuit 510 is not affected by the unstable or abnormal AC power source.

FIG. 9D illustrates an exemplary configuration of the auxiliary power module 860 operating in an On-line UPS mode according to some embodiments of the present invention. Referring to FIG. 9D , the auxiliary power module 860 includes a charging unit 861 and an auxiliary power supply unit 862 . The charging unit 861 has an input terminal coupled to an external AC power supply 508 and an output terminal coupled to a first input terminal of the auxiliary power supply unit 862 . The auxiliary power supply unit 862 further has a second input terminal coupled to the external AC power supply 508 and an output terminal coupled to the rectifying circuit 510 . Specifically, when the external AC power supply 508 operates normally, the auxiliary power supply unit 862 performs the power conversion based on the power supplied by the external AC power source 508 , and accordingly provides an external driving signal Sed to the rectifying circuit 510 . In the meantime, the charging unit 861 charges an energy storage unit of the auxiliary power supply unit 862 . When the external AC power source is unstable or abnormal, the auxiliary power supply unit 862 performs the power conversion based on the power stored in the energy storage unit, and accordingly provides the external driving signal Sed to the rectifying circuit 510 . It should be noted that the power conversion described herein could be rectification, filtering, boost-conversion, buck-conversion or a reasonable combination of above operations. The present invention is not limited thereto.

In some embodiments, the operation of the auxiliary power module 860 can be similar to a Line-Interactive UPS. The basic operation of the auxiliary power module 860 under a Line-Interactive UPS mode is similar to the auxiliary power module 760 under the Off-line UPS mode, the difference between the Line-Interactive UPS mode and the Off-line UPS mode is the auxiliary 860 has a boost and buck compensation circuit and can monitor the power supply condition of the external AC power source at any time. Therefore, the auxiliary power module 860 can correct the power output to the power supply module of the LED tube lamp when the external AC power source is not ideal (e.g., the external driving signal is unstable but the variation does not exceed the threshold value), so as to reduce the frequency of using the battery for power supply.

FIG. 9E illustrates an exemplary configuration of the auxiliary power module 860 operating in the Line-Interactive mode according to some embodiments of the present invention. Referring to FIG. 9E , the auxiliary power module 860 includes a charging unit 861 , an auxiliary power supply unit 862 and a switching unit 863 . The charging unit 861 has an input terminal coupled to an external AC power supply 508 . The switching unit 863 is coupled between an output terminal of the auxiliary power supply unit 862 and an input terminal of the rectifying circuit 510 , in which the switching unit 863 may selectively conduct a current on a path between the external AC power supply 508 and the rectifying circuit 510 or on a path between the auxiliary power supply unit 862 and the rectifying circuit 510 according to the power supply condition of the external AC power supply 508 . In detail, when the external AC power source is normal, the switching unit 863 is switched to conduct a current on the path between the external AC power supply 508 and the rectifying circuit 510 and cut off the path between the auxiliary power supply unit 862 and the rectifying circuit 510 . Thus, when the external AC power source is normal, the external AC power supply 508 provides power, regarded as the external driving signal Sed, to the input terminal of the rectifying circuit 510 via the switching unit 863 . In the meantime, the charging unit 861 charges the auxiliary power unit 862 based on the external AC power supply 508 . When the external AC power source is unstable or abnormal, the switching unit 863 is switched to conduct a current on the path between the auxiliary power supply unit 862 and the rectifying circuit 510 and cut off the path between the AC power supply 508 and the rectifying circuit 510 . The auxiliary power supply unit 862 starts to supply power, regarded as the external driving signal Sed, to the rectifying circuit 510 .

In the embodiments of the auxiliary power module, the auxiliary power provided by the auxiliary power supply unit 762 / 862 can be in either AC or DC. When the auxiliary power is provided in AC, the auxiliary power supply unit 762 / 862 includes, for example, an energy storage unit and a DC-to-AC converter. When the auxiliary power is provided in DC, the auxiliary power supply unit 762 / 862 includes, for example, an energy storage unit and a DC-to-DC converter, or simply includes an energy storage unit; the present invention is not limited thereto and other energy storage units are contemplated. In some embodiments, the energy storage unit can be a set of batteries. In some embodiments, the DC-to-DC converter can be a boost converter, a buck converter or a buck-boost converter. The energy storage unit may be e.g. a battery module composed of a number of batteries. The DC-to-DC converter may be e.g. of the type of buck, boost, or buck-boost converter. And the auxiliary power module 760 / 860 further includes a voltage detection circuit, not shown in FIGS. 9A to 9E . The voltage detection circuit is configured to detect an operating state of the external AC power supply 508 and generate a signal, according to the detection result, to control the switching unit 763 / 863 or the auxiliary power supply unit 862 , in order to determine whether the LED tube lamp operates in a normal lighting mode (i.e., supplied by the external AC power supply 508 ) or in an emergency lighting mode (i.e., supplied by the auxiliary power module 760 / 860 ). In such embodiments, the switching unit 763 / 863 may be implemented by a three-terminal switch or two complementary switches having a complementary relation. When using the complementary switches, one of the complementary switches may be serially connected on the power loop of the external AC power supply 508 and the other one of the complementary switches may be serially connected on the power loop of the auxiliary power module 760 / 860 , wherein the two complementary switches are controlled in a way that when one switch is conducting the other switch is cut off.

In an exemplary embodiment, the switching unit 763 / 863 is implemented by a relay. The relay operates similar to a two-mode switch. In function, when the LED tube lamp is operating in a normal lighting mode (i.e., electricity provided from the external AC power supply 508 is normally input to the LED tube lamp as an external driving signal), the relay is pulled in so that the power supply module of the LED tube lamp is not electrically connected to the auxiliary power module 760 / 860 . On the other hand, when the AC power line is abnormal and fails to provide power as the external AC power supply 508 , magnetic force in the relay disappears so that the relay is released to a default position, causing the power supply module of the LED tube lamp to be electrically connected to the auxiliary power module 760 / 860 through the relay, thus using the auxiliary power module 760 / 860 as a power source.

According to some embodiments, from the perspective of the entire lighting system, when used in the normal lighting occasion, the auxiliary power module 760 / 860 is not active to provide power, and the LED module 50 is supplied by the AC power line, which also may charge the battery module of the auxiliary power module 760 / 860 . On the other hand, when used in the emergency lighting occasion, voltage of the battery module is increased by the boost-type DC-to-DC converter to a level required by the LED module 50 to operate in order to emit light. In some embodiments, the voltage level after the boosting is usually or commonly about 4 to 10 times that of the battery module before the boosting, and is in some embodiments 4 to 6 times that of the battery module before the boosting. In this embodiment, the voltage level required by the LED module 50 to operate is be in the range 40 to 80 V, and is preferably in the range 55 to 75 V. In one disclosed embodiment herein, 60 V is chosen as the voltage level, but the voltage level may be other values in other embodiments.

In one embodiment, the battery module includes or is implemented by a single cylindrical battery or cell packaged in a metallic shell to reduce the risk of leakage of electrolyte from the battery. In one embodiment, the battery can be modularized as a packaged battery module including for example two battery cells connected in series, in which a plurality of the battery module can be electrically connected in sequence (e.g., in series or in parallel) and disposed inside the lamp fixture so as to reduce the complexity of maintenance. For instance, when one or part of the battery modules are damaged or bad, each damaged battery module can be easily replaced without the need to replace all of the plurality of battery modules. In some embodiments of the present disclosure, the battery module may be designed to have a cylindrical shape whose internal diameter is slightly longer than the outer diameter of each of its battery cells, for the battery module to accommodate its battery cells in sequence and to form a positive electrode and a negative electrode at two terminals of the battery module. In some embodiments, the voltage of the battery modules electrically connected in series may be designed to be lower than e.g. 36V. In some embodiments, the battery module is designed to have a cuboid shape whose width is slightly longer than the outer diameter of each of its battery cells, for its battery cells to be securely engaged in the battery module, wherein the battery module may be designed to have a snap-fit structure or other structure for easily plugging-in and pulling-out of its battery cells. However, it is understood by those skilled in the art that in some other embodiments the battery module may have other shapes besides cuboid, such as rectangular.

In one embodiment, the charging unit 761 / 861 is e.g. a battery management system (BMS), which is used to manage the battery module, mainly for intelligent management and maintenance of the battery module in order to prevent over-charging and over-discharging of the battery cells of the battery module. The BMS prolongs the usage lifetime of the battery cells, and to monitor states of the battery cells.

The BMS may be designed to have a port capable of connecting an external module or circuit, for reading or accessing information/data related to the battery cells through the port during periodical examinations of the battery module. If an abnormal condition of the battery module is detected, the abnormal battery module can be replaced.

In other embodiments, the number of battery cells that a battery module can hold may be more than 2, such as 3, 4, 10, 20, 30, or another number, and the battery cells in a battery module may be designed to be connected in series, or some of which are connected in series and some of which are connected in parallel, depending on actual application occasions. In some embodiments where lithium battery cells are used, the rated voltage of a single lithium battery cell is about 3.7V. In some embodiments the number of battery cells of a battery module can be reduced to keep the voltage of the battery unit to be below about 36V.

The relay used in these embodiments is e.g. a magnetic relay mainly including an iron core, coil(s), an armature, and contacts or a reed. The operations principle of the relay may be: when power is applied to two ends of the coil, a current is passed through the coil to produce electromagnetic force, activating the armature to overcome a force provided by a spring and be attracted to the iron core. The movement of the armature brings one of the contacts to connect to a fixed normally-open contact of the contacts. During a power outage or when the current is switched off, the electromagnetic force disappears and so the armature is returned by a reaction force provided by the spring to its relaxed position, bringing the moving contact to connect to a fixed normally-closed contact of the contacts. By these different movements of switching, current conduction and cutoff through the relay can be achieved. A normally-open contact and a normally-closed contact of a relay may be defined such that a fixed contact which is in an open state when the coil of the relay is de-energized is called a normally-open contact, and a fixed contact which is in a closed state when the coil of the relay is de-energized is called a normally-closed contact.

In an exemplary embodiment, the brightness of the LED module supplied by the external driving signal is different from the brightness of the LED module supplied by the auxiliary power module. Therefore, a user may find the external power is abnormal when observing that the brightness of LED module changed, and thus the user can eliminate the problem as soon as possible. In this manner, the operation of the auxiliary power module 760 can be considered as an indication of whether the external driving signal is normally provided, wherein when the external driving signal becomes abnormal, the auxiliary power module 760 provides the auxiliary power having the output power different from that of the normal external driving signal. For example, in some embodiments, the luminance of the LED module is 1600 to 2000 lm when being lighted up by the external driving signal; and the luminance of the LED module is 200 to 250 lm when being lighted up by the auxiliary power. From the perspective of the auxiliary power module 760 , in order to let the luminance of the LED module reach 200-250 lm, the output power of the auxiliary power module 760 is, for example, 1 watt to 5 watts, but the present invention is not limited thereto. In addition, the electrical capacity of the energy storage unit in the auxiliary power module 760 may be, for example, 1.5 to 7.5 Wh (watt-hour) or above, so that the LED module can be lighted up for 90 minutes under 200-250 lm based on the auxiliary power. However, the present invention is not limited thereto.

FIG. 9F illustrates a schematic structure of an auxiliary power module disposed in an LED tube lamp according to an exemplary embodiment. In one embodiment, in addition, or as an alternative, the auxiliary power module 760 / 860 is disposed in the lamp tube 1 . In another embodiment, the auxiliary power module 760 / 860 is disposed in the end cap 3 . In order to make the description more clear, the auxiliary power module 760 is chosen as a representative of the auxiliary power modules 760 and 860 in the following paragraph, and only 760 is indicated in the figures. When the auxiliary power module 760 is disposed in an end cap 3 , in some embodiments the auxiliary power module 760 connects to the corresponding pins 501 and 502 via internal wiring of the end cap 3 , so as to receive the external driving signal provided to the pins 501 and 502 . Compared to the structure of disposing the auxiliary power module into the lamp tube 1 , the auxiliary power module 760 can be disposed far apart from the LED module since the auxiliary power module 760 is disposed in the end cap 3 which is connected to the respective end of the lamp tube 1 . Therefore, the operation and illumination of the LED module won't be affected by heat generated by the charging or discharging of the auxiliary power module 760 . In some embodiments, the auxiliary power module 760 and the power supply module of the LED tube lamp are disposed in the same end cap, and in other embodiments the auxiliary power module 760 and the power supply module are disposed in different end caps on the respective ends of the lamp tube. In those embodiments where the auxiliary power module 760 and the power supply module of the LED tube lamp are respectively disposed in the different end caps, each module may have more area for circuit layout.

Referring to FIG. 9G , the auxiliary power module 760 is disposed in a lamp socket 1 _LH of the LED tube lamp, according to one embodiment. In one embodiment, the lamp socket 1 _LH includes a base 101 _LH and a connecting socket 102 _LH. The base 101 _LH has power line disposed inside and is adapted to lock/attach to a fixed object such as a wall or a ceiling. The connecting socket 102 _LH has slot corresponding to the pin (e.g., the pins 501 and 502 ) on the LED tube lamp, in which the slot is electrically connected to the corresponding power line. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 9G , the connecting socket 102 _LH and the base 101 _LH are formed of one piece. In another embodiment, the connecting socket 102 _LH is removably disposed on the base 101 _LH. It is understood by those skilled in the art that the particular lamp socket 1 _LH arrangement is not limited one of these embodiments but that other arrangements are also contemplated.

In some embodiments when the LED tube lamp is installed in the lamp socket 1 _LH, the pins on both end caps 3 are respectively inserted into the slot of the corresponding connecting socket 102 _LH, and thus the power line can be connected to the LED tube lamp for providing the external driving signal to the corresponding pins of the LED tube lamp. Taking the configuration of the left end cap 3 as an example, when the pins 501 and 502 are inserted into the slots of the connecting socket 102 _LH, the auxiliary power module 760 is electrically connected to the pins 501 and 502 via the slots, so as to implement the connection configuration shown in FIG. 9A .

Compared to the embodiment of disposing the auxiliary power module 760 in the end cap 3 , the connecting socket 102 _LH and the auxiliary power module 760 can be integrated as a module since the connecting socket can be designed as a removable configuration in an exemplary embodiment. Under such configuration, when the auxiliary power module 760 has a fault or the service life of the energy storage unit in the auxiliary power module 760 has run out, a new auxiliary power module can be replaced for use by replacing the modularized connecting socket 102 _LH, instead of replacing the entire LED tube lamp. Thus, in addition to reducing the thermal effect of the auxiliary power module, the modularized design of the auxiliary power module has the added advantage of making the replacement of the auxiliary power module easier. Therefore, the durability as well as the cost savings of the LED tube lamp is evident since it is no longer necessary to replace the entire LED tube lamp when a problem occurs to the auxiliary power module. In addition, in some embodiments, the auxiliary power module 760 is disposed inside the base 101 _LH. In other embodiments, the auxiliary power module 760 is disposed outside the base 101 _LH. It is understood that the particularly arrangement of the auxiliary power module 760 with respect to the base 101 _LH is not limited to what is described in the present disclosure but that other arrangements are also contemplated.

In summary, the structural configuration of the auxiliary power module 760 can be divided into the following two types: (1) the auxiliary power module is integrated into the LED tube lamp; and (2) the auxiliary power module 760 is disposed independent from the LED tube lamp. Under the configuration of disposing the auxiliary power module 760 independent from the LED tube lamp, if the auxiliary power module 760 operates in the Off-line UPS mode, the auxiliary power module 760 and the external AC power source can provide power, through different pins or through sharing at least one pin, to the LED tube lamp. On the other hand, if the auxiliary power module 760 operates in the On-line UPS mode or the Line-Interactive mode, the external AC power source provides power through the auxiliary power module 760 rather than directly to the pins of the LED tube lamp. The detailed configuration of disposing the auxiliary power module independent from the LED tube lamp (hereinafter the independent auxiliary power module) is further described below.

It should be noted that the combination of the lamp and the lamp socket could be regarded as a light fixture, a lamp fixture, a light fitting or luminaries. For example, the lamp socket in the disclosure can be regarded as a part of the light fixture for securing, attaching or appending as to a house, apartment building, etc, and for holding and providing power to the lamps. In addition, the connecting sockets 102 _LH can be described as tombstone sockets of the light fixture.

FIG. 9H is a block diagram of an LED lighting system according to an exemplary embodiment. Referring to FIG. 9H , the LED lighting system includes an LED tube lamp 600 and an auxiliary power module 960 . The LED tube lamp 600 includes rectifying circuits 510 and 540 , a filtering circuit 520 , a driving circuit 530 and an LED module (not shown). The rectifying circuits 510 and 540 can be respectively implemented by the full-wave rectifier 610 illustrated in FIG. 5A or the half-wave rectifier 710 as shown in FIG. 5B , in which two input terminals of the rectifying circuit 510 are coupled to the pins 501 and 502 and two input terminals of the rectifying circuit 540 are coupled to the pins 503 and 504 .

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 9H , the LED tube lamp 600 is configured as a dual-end power supply structure for example. The external AC power supply 508 is coupled to the pins 501 and 502 on the respective end caps of the LED tube lamp 600 , and the auxiliary power module 960 is coupled to the pins 503 and 504 on the respective end caps of the LED tube lamp 600 .

In this embodiment, the external AC power supply 508 and the auxiliary power module 960 provide power to the LED tube lamp 600 through different pairs of the pins. Although the present embodiment is illustrated in dual-end power supply structure for example, the present invention is not limited thereto. In another embodiment, the external AC power supply 508 can provide power through the pins 501 and 503 on the end cap at one side of the lamp tube (i.e., the single-end power supply structure), and the auxiliary power module 960 can provide power through the pins 502 and 504 on the end cap at the other side of the lamp tube. Accordingly, no matter whether the LED tube lamp 600 is configured in the single-end or the dual-end power supply structure, the unused pins of the original LED tube lamp (e.g., 503 and 504 illustrated in FIG. 9H ) can be the interface for receiving the auxiliary power, so that the emergency lighting function can be integrated in the LED tube lamp 600 .

FIG. 9I is a block diagram of an LED lighting system according to another exemplary embodiment. Referring to FIG. 9I , the LED lighting system includes an LED tube lamp 700 and an auxiliary power module 1060 . The LED tube lamp 700 includes a rectifying circuit 510 , a filtering circuit 520 , a driving circuit 530 and an LED module (not shown). The rectifying circuit 510 can be implemented by the rectifying circuit 910 having three bridge arms as shown in FIG. 5D , in which the rectifying circuit 510 has a first signal input terminal P 1 coupled to the pin 501 , a second signal input terminal P 2 coupled to the pin 502 and the auxiliary power module 1060 and a third input terminal P 3 coupled to the auxiliary power module 1060 .

In the present embodiment, the LED tube lamp 700 is configured as a dual-end power supply structure for example. The external AC power supply 508 is coupled to the pins 501 and 502 on the respective end caps of the LED tube lamp 500 . The difference between the present embodiment shown in FIG. 9I and the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 9H is that besides being coupled to the pin 502 , the auxiliary power module 1060 further shares the pin 503 with the external AC power supply 508 . Under the configuration of FIG. 9I , the external AC power supply 508 provides power to the signal input terminals P 1 and P 3 of the rectifying circuit 510 through the pins 501 and 503 , and the auxiliary power module 1060 provides power to the signal input terminals P 2 and P 3 of the rectifying circuit 510 through the pins 502 and 503 . In detail, if the leads connected to the pins 501 and 503 are respectively configured as a live wire (denoted by “(L)”) and a neutral wire (denoted by “(N)”), the auxiliary power module 1060 shares the lead (N) with the external AC power supply 508 and has a lead for transmitting power as a live wire distinct from the external AC power supply 508 . In this manner, the signal input terminal P 3 is a common terminal between the external AC power supply 508 and the auxiliary power module 1060 .

In operation, when the external AC power source normally operates, the rectifying circuit 510 performs the full-wave rectification by the bridge arms corresponding to the signal input terminals P 1 and P 2 , so as to provide power to the LED module 50 based on the external AC power supply 508 . However, when the external AC power source is unstable or abnormal, the rectifying circuit 510 performs the full-wave rectification by the bridge arms corresponding to the signal input terminals P 2 and P 3 , so as to provide power to the LED module 50 based on the auxiliary power provided by the auxiliary power module 1060 .

In addition, since the LED tube lamp receives the auxiliary power provided by the auxiliary power module 1060 through sharing the pin 502 , an unused pin (e.g., pin 504 ) can be used as a signal input interface of other control functions. These other control functions can be a dimming function, a communication function or a sensing function, though the present invention is not limited thereto. The embodiment of integrating the dimming function through the unused pin 504 is further described below.

FIG. 9J is a block diagram of an LED lighting system according to still another exemplary embodiment. Referring to FIG. 9J , the LED lighting system includes an LED tube lamp 800 and an auxiliary power module 1060 . The LED tube lamp 800 includes a rectifying circuit 510 , a filtering circuit 520 , a driving circuit 530 and an LED module 50 . The configuration of the present embodiment is similar to the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 9I . The difference between the embodiments of FIGS. 9J and 9I is, as shown in FIG. 9J , the pin 504 of the LED tube lamp 800 is further coupled to a dimming control circuit 570 , in which the dimming control circuit 570 is coupled to the driving circuit 530 through the pin 504 , so that the driving circuit 530 can adjust the magnitude of the driving current, supplied to the LED module 50 , according to a dimming signal received from the dimming control circuit 570 . Therefore, the brightness and/or the color temperature of the LED module 50 can be varied according to the dimming signal.

For example, the dimming control circuit 570 can be implemented by a circuit including a variable impedance component (e.g., a variable resistor, a variable capacitor or a variable inductor) and a signal conversion circuit. The impedance of the variable impedance component can be tuned by a user, so that the dimming control circuit 570 generates the dimming signal having signal level corresponding to the impedance. After converting the signal formation (e.g., signal level, frequency or phase) of the dimming signal to conform the signal formation of the driving circuit 530 , the converted dimming signal is transmitted to the driving circuit 530 , so that the driving circuit 530 adjusts the magnitude of the driving current based on the converted dimming signal. In some embodiments, the brightness of the LED module 50 can be adjusted by tuning the frequency or the reference level of the lamp driving signal. In some embodiments, the color temperature of the LED module 50 can be adjusted by tuning the brightness of the red LED units.

It should be noted that, by utilizing the structural configurations as shown in FIGS. 9F and 9G , the auxiliary power module 960 / 1060 can obtain the similar benefits and advantages described in the embodiments of FIGS. 9F and 9G . In addition, although the dummy pins (i.e., the pins not used for receiving the external driving signal, such as the pins 503 and 504 illustrated in FIGS. 9H to 9J ) are used for receiving the auxiliary power and the dimming signal, the invention is not limited thereto. In some embodiments, the dummy pins can be used for other functions, such as for receiving a remote control signal or outputting a sensing signal, by correspondingly disposing circuits connected to the dummy pins for performing the functions. For example, the dummy pins in the LED tube lamp can be configured to a signal input/output interface for performing certain functions.

In applications of the above auxiliary power module, the circuit of the auxiliary power supply unit (such as 762 or 862 ) is designed to be under open-loop control, i.e. for example the auxiliary power supply unit generates the output voltage without referring to a feedback signal indicating a load state. In this case when the load is in an open-circuit condition, this will cause the output voltage of the auxiliary power module to keep increasing so as to damage the auxiliary power module. To address this issue, this disclosure presents several circuit (block) embodiments of the auxiliary power module having open-circuit protection, as shown in FIGS. 9K and 9L .

FIG. 9K is a circuit diagram of the auxiliary power module according to an embodiment. Referring to FIG. 9K , in this embodiment, the auxiliary power module 1160 includes a charging unit 1161 and an auxiliary power unit 1162 . The auxiliary power unit 1162 includes a transformer, a sampling module 1164 , a control module 1165 , and an energy storage unit 1163 for providing a supply voltage Vcc. In the auxiliary power module 1160 , also with reference to FIG. 9B , the transformer includes a primary winding L 1 and a secondary winding L 2 . A terminal of the secondary winding L 2 is electrically connected to switching unit 763 and therefore is electrically connected to an end of the LED tube lamp (or to input terminal(s) of rectifying circuit 510 ), and the other terminal of the secondary winding L 2 is electrically connected to the other end of the LED tube lamp. Sampling module 1164 includes an auxiliary winding L 3 , which is wound along with the secondary winding L 2 at the secondary side. Voltage of the secondary winding L 2 is sampled by the auxiliary winding L 3 . If the sampled voltage exceeds a set threshold value, the sampled voltage is fed back to the control module 1165 , and then the control module 1165 modulates switching frequency of a switch M 1 electrically connected to the primary winding L 1 based on the sampled voltage. This way of modulating the switching frequency of switch M 1 then controls output voltage at the secondary side, thereby realizing open-circuit protection.

Specifically, the transformer includes a primary side unit and a secondary side unit. The primary side unit includes an energy storage unit 1163 , a primary winding L 1 , and a switch M 1 . A positive electrode of the energy storage unit 1163 is electrically connected to a dotted terminal of the primary winding L 1 , and a negative electrode of the energy storage unit 1163 is electrically connected to a ground terminal. A non-dotted terminal of the primary winding L 1 is electrically connected to the drain terminal of the switch M 1 (such as a MOSFET). The gate terminal of the switch M 1 is electrically connected to control module 1165 , and the source terminal of switch M 1 is connected to a ground terminal. The secondary side unit includes secondary winding L 2 , a diode D 1 , and a capacitor C 1 . A non-dotted terminal of the secondary winding L 2 is electrically connected to the anode of diode D 1 , and a dotted terminal of secondary winding L 2 is electrically connected to an end of the capacitor C 1 . The cathode of the diode D 1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor C 1 . The two ends of the capacitor C 1 can be regarded as auxiliary power supply output terminals V 1 and V 2 (corresponding to two terminals of the auxiliary power module 960 in FIG. 9H , or two terminals of the auxiliary power module 1060 in FIGS. 9I and 9J ).

Sampling module 1164 includes an auxiliary winding L 3 , a diode D 2 , a capacitor C 2 , and a resistor R 1 . A non-dotted terminal of the auxiliary winding L 3 is electrically connected to the anode of diode D 2 , and a dotted terminal of auxiliary winding L 3 is electrically connected to a first common end connecting the capacitor C 2 and the resistor R 1 . The cathode of diode D 2 is electrically connected to another common end (marked with “A” in FIG. 9K ) connecting the capacitor C 2 and the resistor R 1 . And the capacitor C 2 and the resistor R 1 are electrically connected to control module 1165 through the node A.

The control module 1165 includes a controller 1166 , a diode D 3 , capacitors C 3 , C 4 and C 5 , and resistors R 2 , R 3 , and R 4 . The ground pin GT of the controller 1166 is grounded to the ground terminal GND. The output pin OUT of the controller 1166 is electrically connected to the gate terminal of switch M 1 . The trigger pin TRIG of the controller 1166 is electrically connected to an end (marked with “B”) of the resistor R 2 . The discharge pin DIS of the controller 1166 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor R 2 . The reset pin RST of the controller 1166 is electrically connected to an end of the capacitor C 3 , which has the other end connected to the ground terminal GND. The constant voltage pin CV of the controller 1166 is electrically connected to an end of the capacitor C 4 , which has the other end connected to the ground terminal GND. The discharge terminal DIS of the controller 1166 is coupled to an end of the capacitor C 5 through the resistor R 2 , which capacitor C 5 has the other end connected to the ground terminal GND. The power supply pin VC of the controller 1166 receives supply voltage Vcc and is electrically connected to an end of the resistor R 3 , which has the other end electrically connected to the node B. The anode of the diode D 3 is electrically connected to the node A, the cathode of diode D 3 is electrically connected to an end of the resistor R 4 , which has the other end electrically connected to the node B.

What follows here is a description of operations of the circuit embodiment in FIG. 9K . When the auxiliary power module 1160 is in a normal state, the output voltage between output terminals V 1 and V 2 of the auxiliary power module 1160 is low and usually lower than a specific value, for example 100 V. In the present embodiment, the output voltage between the output terminals V 1 and V 2 is in the range 60 V to 80 V. At this time the voltage, relative to the ground terminal GND, sampled at the node A of the sampling module 1164 is low such that a small current is flowing through the resistor R 4 and can be ignored. When the auxiliary power module 1160 is in an abnormal state, the output voltage between the output terminals V 1 and V 2 of the auxiliary power module 1160 is relatively high, for example over 300 V, and then the voltage sampled at the node A of the sampling module 1164 is relatively high such that a relatively large current is flowing through the resistor R 4 . The relatively large current flowing through the resistor R 4 increases the discharge time of the capacitor C 5 , whose charge time is unchanged, and this amounts to adjusting the duty cycle of the switch M 1 to increase the cutoff time. With respect to the output side of the transformer, the adjusting of the duty cycle causes a smaller output energy, and thus the output voltage will not keep increasing, so as to achieve the purpose of open-circuit protection.

In this embodiment, the trigger terminal TRIG of the controller 1166 is electrically connected to the discharge terminal DIS of the controller 1166 through the resistor R 2 , and the discharge terminal DIS is triggered when the voltage at the node B is in the range (⅓)*Vcc to (⅔)*Vcc (the “*” denoting multiplication). When the auxiliary power module 1160 is in the normal state, i.e. its output voltage does not exceed a set threshold value, the voltage sampled at the node A may be lower than (⅓)*Vcc. When the auxiliary power module 1160 is in the abnormal state, the voltage sampled at the node A may reach or be higher than (½)*Vcc.

In this embodiment, during the normal state, the auxiliary power module 1160 supplies power normally when the discharge pin DIS of the controller 1166 is triggered. The waveforms of the voltages at the discharge pin DIS and the output pin OUT are shown in FIG. 9M . FIG. 9M shows charge-discharge waveform at the discharge pin DIS and the voltage waveform at the output terminal OUT along the time axis when auxiliary power module 1160 is in the normal state. As shown in FIG. 9M , when the discharge pin DIS is triggered, meaning the controller 1166 is in a discharge stage (to discharge the capacitor C 5 ), a low voltage is output at the output pin OUT. When the discharge pin DIS is not triggered, meaning the controller 1166 is in a charge stage (to charge the capacitor C 5 ), a high voltage is output at the output pin OUT. Accordingly, the high and low voltage levels output at the output pin OUT are respectively used to control current conduction and cutoff of the switch M 1 .

On the other hand, when the auxiliary power module 1160 is in the abnormal state, charge-discharge waveform at the discharge pin DIS and voltage waveform at the output pin OUT along the time axis are shown in FIG. 9N . It is clear from FIGS. 9M and 9 N that no matter whether the auxiliary power module 1160 is in the normal state or the abnormal state, the period for which the discharge pin DIS is not triggered, which amounts to the period for which the capacitor C 5 is charged, is the same for the two cases. And when auxiliary power module 1160 is in the abnormal state, since there is a current flowing from the node B to the discharge pin DIS, which results in the discharge time of the capacitor C 5 being extended, a smaller or relatively small output energy results at the output side of the transformer or the auxiliary power module 1160 and thus the output voltage does not keep increasing, so as to achieve the purpose of open-circuit protection.

In the present embodiment, an example that can be chosen as or to constitute the control module 1166 is a chip with regulation function by time, such as a 555 timer IC, for example to control the cutoff period of the switch M 1 . And the present embodiment can be implemented by using resistors and capacitors to achieve the prolonging of discharge time, without using a complicated control scheme. And the voltage range for the supply voltage Vcc in this embodiment is 4.5V to 16V.

By using circuit in the embodiment discussed above, open-circuit output voltage of the auxiliary power module 1160 can be limited to be below a specific value, such as 300V, which can be determined by choosing appropriate values for parameters in the circuit.

It should be noted that in the circuit of the above embodiment, each electrical element or component depicted in the relevant figures, such as a resistor, capacitor, diode, or MOSFET (as switch M 1 ), is intended to be a representative or equivalent of any plurality of such an element that may be actually used and connected according to relevant rules to implement this embodiment.

FIG. 9L is a circuit diagram of the auxiliary power module according to an embodiment. Referring to FIG. 9L , the auxiliary power module 1260 includes a charging unit 1261 and an auxiliary power unit 1262 . The auxiliary power unit 1262 includes a transformer, a sampling module 1264 , a control module 1265 , and an energy storage unit 1263 for providing a supply voltage Vcc. The difference between embodiments of FIG. 9L and FIG. 9K is that the sampling module 1264 in the embodiment of FIG. 9L is implemented by an optical coupler.

The transformer includes a primary winding L 1 and a secondary winding L 2 . Configuration of the primary winding L 1 with a switch M 1 is the same as that in the above described embodiment. A dotted terminal of the secondary winding L 2 is electrically connected to the anode of a diode D 1 , and a non-dotted terminal of the secondary winding L 2 is electrically connected to an end of a capacitor C 1 . The cathode of the diode D 1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor C 1 . And the two ends of the capacitor C 1 can be regarded as auxiliary power supply output terminals V 1 and V 2 .

The sampling module 1264 includes an optical coupler PD having at least one photodiode, whose anode is electrically connected to the cathode of the diode D 1 and an end of the capacitor C 1 and whose cathode is electrically connected to an end of a resistor R 4 . The other end of the resistor R 4 is electrically connected to an end of a clamping component Rcv, which has the other end electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor C 1 . A bipolar junction transistor in the optical coupler PD has a collector and an emitter electrically connected to two ends of a resistor R 3 respectively.

The control module 1265 includes a controller 1266 , capacitors C 3 , C 4 and C 5 , and resistors R 2 and R 3 . The power supply pin VC of the controller 1266 is electrically connected to the collector of the bipolar junction transistor in the optical coupler PD. The discharge pin DIS of the controller 1166 is electrically connected to an end of the resistor R 2 , which has the other end electrically connected to the collector of the bipolar junction transistor in the optical coupler PD. The sample pin THRS of the controller 1166 is electrically connected to the emitter of the bipolar junction transistor in the optical coupler PD and is connected to an end of the capacitor C 5 , which capacitor C 5 has the other end electrically connected to the ground terminal GND. The ground pin GT of the controller 1166 is grounded to the ground terminal GND. The reset pin RST of the controller 1166 is electrically connected to an end of the capacitor C 3 , which has the other end connected to the ground terminal GND. The constant voltage pin CV of the controller 1166 is electrically connected to an end of the capacitor C 4 , which has the other end connected to the ground terminal GND. The trigger pin TRIG of the controller 1166 is electrically connected to the sample pin THRS. And the output pin OUT of the controller 1166 is electrically connected to the gate terminal of the switch M 1 .

What follows here is a description of operations of the circuit embodiment in FIG. 9L . When the auxiliary power module 1260 is in a normal state, the output voltage between the output terminals V 1 and V 2 of the auxiliary power module 1260 is lower than a clamping voltage of the clamping component Rcv, so a current I 1 flowing through the resistor R 4 is small and can be ignored. And a current I 2 flowing through the collector and emitter of the bipolar junction transistor in the optical coupler PD is also small.

When the load is in an open-circuit condition, the output voltage between the output terminals V 1 and V 2 of the auxiliary power module 1260 increases and, when the output voltage exceeding a threshold voltage value of the clamping component Rcv, then conducts the clamping component Rcv, causing the current I 1 flowing through the resistor R 4 to increase. The increase of the current I 1 then lights up the photodiode of the optical coupler PD, which causes the current I 2 flowing through the collector and emitter of the bipolar junction transistor in the optical coupler PD to proportionally increase. The increase of the current I 2 then compensates for discharging of the capacitor C 5 through the resistor R 2 , prolonging the discharging time of the capacitor C 5 and thereby prolonging the cutoff time of the switch M 1 (i.e., reducing the duty cycle of the switch M 1 ). With respect to the output side of the transformer, this reducing or adjusting of the duty cycle causes a smaller output energy, and thus the output voltage will not keep increasing, so as to achieve the purpose of open-circuit protection.

In this embodiment of the auxiliary power module 1260 , the clamping component Rcv may be or comprise for example a varistor, a transient voltage suppressor diode (TVS diode), or a voltage regulation diode such as a Zener diode. The trigger threshold value of the clamping component Rcv may be in the range 100 to 400 V, and is preferably in the range 150 to 350 V. In some example embodiments herein, 300 V is chosen as the trigger threshold value.

In one embodiment of the auxiliary power module 1260 , the resistor R 4 operates mainly to limit current, and its resistance may be in the range 20 k to 1M ohm (the “M” denoting a million) and is preferably in the range 20 k to 500 k ohm. In some disclosed embodiments herein, 50 k ohm is chosen as the resistance of the resistor 6511 . And the resistor R 3 operates mainly to limit current, and its resistance may be in the range 1 k to 100 k ohm and is preferably in the range 5 k to 50 k ohm. In the disclosed embodiments herein, 6 k ohm is chosen as the resistance of the resistor R 3 . In this embodiment of the auxiliary power module 1260 , capacitance of the capacitor C 5 may be in the range 1 nF to 1000 nF and is preferably in the range 1 nF-to 100 nF. In some disclosed embodiments herein, 2.2 nF is chosen as the capacitance of the capacitor C 5 . Capacitance of the capacitor C 4 may be in the range 1 nF to 1 pF and is preferably in the range 5 nF to 50 nF. In some disclosed embodiments herein, 10 nF is chosen as the capacitance of the capacitor C 4 . And capacitance of the capacitor C 1 may be in the range 1 uF to 100 uF and is preferably in the range 1 uF to 10 uF. In some disclosed embodiments herein, 4.7 uF is chosen as the capacitance of the capacitor C 1 . The specific values for components described above in connection with FIG. 9L may be combined in one embodiment, or some of them may be used with other components having different values from the specific values described above.

In the embodiments of FIG. 9K and FIG. 9L , the energy storage unit 1163 of the auxiliary power module 1160 / 1260 may comprise for example a battery or a supercapacitor. In the above embodiments, DC power supply by the auxiliary power module 1160 / 1260 may be managed by a BMS so as to charge the capacitor C 5 when the LED tube lamp operates in a normal lighting mode. Or the capacitor C 5 may be charged when the LED tube lamp operates in a normal lighting mode, without the BMS. Through choosing appropriate values of parameters of components of the auxiliary power module 1160 / 1260 , a small current, for example not exceed 300 mA, can be used to charge the auxiliary power module 1160 / 1260 .

Advantages of using the auxiliary power module 1160 / 1260 embodiments of FIGS. 9K and 9L include that it has relatively simple circuit topology; a specialized integrated circuit chip is not needed to implement it; relatively few components are used to implement the open-circuit protection and thus the reliability of the auxiliary power module can be improved. The topology of the auxiliary power module 1160 / 1260 can be implemented by an isolation circuit structure so as to reduce the risks of current leakage.

In summary, the principle of using the auxiliary power module 1160 / 1260 embodiments of FIGS. 9K and 9L is to sample an output voltage (or current) as by using the sampling module 1164 ; and if the voltage/current sample exceeds a predefined threshold value, to prolong the cutoff period of the switch M 1 by prolonging time of discharge through the discharge terminal DIS/THRS of the controller 1166 , thereby modulating the duty cycle of the switch M 1 . The operating voltage at the discharge terminal DIS/THRS of the controller 1166 is in the range between (⅓)*Vcc and (⅔)*Vcc, each charge time of the capacitor C 5 is about the same, but its discharge time is prolonged. Therefore this adjusting of the duty cycle causes a smaller output energy, and thus the output voltage will not keep increasing, so as to achieve the purpose of open-circuit protection.

FIG. 9M shows a time diagram including corresponding waveforms of the voltage at the OUT terminal and the voltage at the DIS/THRS terminal of the control module 1165 , when the auxiliary power module is working in the normal state. FIG. 9N shows a time diagram including corresponding waveforms of the voltage at the OUT terminal and the voltage at the DIS/THRS terminal of the control module 1165 , when the auxiliary power module is in an abnormal state (as when the load is open-circuited). The voltage at the OUT terminal is initially at a high level while the DIS/THRS terminal is not triggered (so the capacitor C 5 is being charged). When the DIS/THRS terminal is triggered (so the capacitor C 5 is discharging), the voltage at the OUT terminal falls to be at a low level. The waveform or signal of the voltage at the OUT terminal is thus used to control current conduction and cutoff of the switch M 1 .

FIG. 10A is a block diagram of exemplary LED lighting systems according to an exemplary embodiment. Referring to FIG. 10A , compared to the LED tube lamps 500 , 600 , 700 and 800 described above in different embodiments, a power supply module 5 of the LED tube lamp 900 includes a rectifying circuit 510 , a filtering circuit 520 , a driving circuit 530 , and further includes an electric-shock detection module 2000 which includes a detection control circuit 2100 (which can be referred to a detection controller) and a current-limiting circuit 2200 .

In the present embodiment, the detection control circuit 2100 is configured to perform an installation state detection/impedance detection in the LED tube lamp 900 , thereby to generate a corresponding control signal according to a detection result, in which the detection result indicates whether the LED tube lamp 900 is correctly/properly installed in a lamp socket or whether a foreign external impedance (e.g., human body resistor) contacts the LED tube lamp 900 . The current-limiting circuit 2200 is configured to limit or determine whether to limit current flowing or to flow through the LED tube lamp 900 according to the control signal corresponding to the detection result. When the current-limiting circuit 2200 receives the control signal indicating that the LED tube lamp 900 is correctly/properly installed in a lamp socket or a foreign external impedance contacts or connects to the LED tube lamp, the current-limiting circuit 2200 allows the power supply module 5 providing electricity to the LED module 50 normally (i.e., the current-limiting circuit 2200 allows the current to normally flow through the power loop of the LED tube lamp 900 ). When the current-limiting circuit 2200 receives the control signal indicating that the LED tube lamp 900 is incorrectly/improperly installed in a lamp socket or a foreign external impedance contacts or connects to the LED tube lamp 900 , the current-limiting circuit 2200 limits a current to flow through the LED tube lamp 900 to being under a safety threshold to avoid electric shock hazards. The safety threshold is for example 5 MIU as a root-mean-square (rms) value or 7.07 MIU as a peak value.

The power loop in the LED tube lamp 900 may refer to a path or a route for transmitting current from the power supply module 5 to the LED module 50 . The installation state detection or the impedance detection may refer to a circuit operation for obtaining information on an installation state of or equivalent impedance in the LED tube lamp 900 by detecting electrical characteristics (such as voltage or current). Further, in some embodiments, the detection control circuit 2100 performs detection of electrical characteristics by controlling current continuity on the power loop or forming an additional detection path, which may reduce the risk of electric shock during performing detection. Detailed descriptions of specific circuit embodiments explaining how a detection control circuit performs detection of electrical characteristics are presented below with reference to FIGS. 11-37F .

FIG. 10B is a block diagram of exemplary LED lighting systems according to another exemplary embodiment. Referring to FIG. 10B , compared to the embodiment of FIG. 10A , an electric-shock detection module 2000 of FIG. 10B is disposed external to the LED tube lamp 1000 and on a power supply path from an external AC power supply (e.g., AC grid) 508 , and is for example disposed in a lamp socket or fixture. When external connection pins of the LED tube lamp 1000 are electrically connected to the external AC power supply 508 , the electric-shock detection module 2000 is serially connected to a power loop in the LED tubal lamp 1000 through the corresponding pin(s), thereby the shock detection module 2000 can perform installation state detection/impedance detection in such ways as described above in FIG. 10A to determine whether the LED tube lamp 1000 is correctly/properly installed in a lamp socket or whether a user is exposed to risk of electric shock on the LED tube lamp 1000 . In this embodiment of FIG. 10B , the configuration of the electric-shock detection module 2000 is similar to that in the embodiment of FIG. 10A , so it is not repeated herein.

In another embodiment, the structures of the power supply module in embodiments of FIG. 10A and FIG. 10B can be integrated. For example, a plurality of the electric-shock detection modules 2000 may be disposed in a lighting system of an LED tube lamp, wherein at least one of the electric-shock detection modules 2000 may be disposed on an internal power loop of the LED tube lamp, and at least another one of the electric-shock detection modules 2000 may be disposed to be external to the LED tube lamp, and for example disposed in the lamp socket. This external electric-shock detection module 2000 can be electrically connected to an internal power loop of the LED tube lamp through pins on an end cap of the LED tube lamp, to improve effects of protection from accidental electric shock.

FIG. 10C is a block diagram of an LED tube lamp lighting system according to some embodiments. Referring to FIG. 10C , compared to the embodiments of FIGS. 10A and 10B , an LED tube lamp 1600 in this embodiment of FIG. 10C is for example a Type-C LED tube lamp as having a power module 5 disposed external to the LED tube lamp 1600 . An electric-shock detection module 2000 is disposed within the LED tube lamp 1600 and includes a detection control circuit 2100 and a current-limiting circuit 2200 . In this embodiment of FIG. 10C , the current-limiting circuit 2200 may be disposed on a power supply path and is controlled by the detection control circuit 2100 . Specific operations and details of the electric-shock detection module 2000 are similar to those in other analogous embodiments described herein, and thus are not described in detail again. It's worth noting that in applications of this embodiment, due to the functions of the electric-shock detection module 2000 , there is substantially no risk of occurrence of electric-shock hazards even if a non-isolation type of power conversion circuit is chosen as the external power module 5 . In contrast to an external power module designed for supplying a traditional LED tube lamp typically requiring an isolation type of power conversion circuit, the design of an external power module in embodiments of the present invention is not limited to using an isolation type of power conversion circuit, and so the design choice thereof is more diversified.

It should be noted that the described shock detection module 2000 in either FIG. 10A or FIG. 10B is configured to be used in or with a power supply module of an LED tube lamp, which can be implemented, partially or entirely, by a discrete circuit or an integrated circuit, to which the present invention is not limited. In addition, the designation “shock detection module” herein for the module 2000 in FIGS. 13A and 13B serves to be representative but not to limit the scope of the module 2000 or the claimed invention. The scope of the “shock detection module” 2000 as described herein and as may be reflected in the claims encompasses any arrangement of a circuit or module comprising electrical components with their operations, functional/structural configurations, and connections consistent with or according to the relevant descriptions herein thereof. In practice and this disclosure, according to different ways of description, the shock detection module 2000 may be alternatively referred to as, but its different formulations are not limited to, a detection circuit, an installation detection module/circuit, a shock protection module/circuit, a shock protection detection module/circuit, an impedance detection module/circuit, or directly expressed as a circuitry for such a purpose. In addition, FIGS. 10A and 10B are diagrams merely to illustrate exemplary connection relationships between an LED tube lamp 900 / 1000 and an external power supply 508 , but they are not to limit an external driving signal from the external power supply 508 to only being applied in a single-ended power-supply configuration at one end of the LED tube lamp 900 / 1000 .

Explanatory descriptions of different schematic circuit and functional block embodiments under the embodiment configuration of FIG. 10A where a shock detection module 2000 is disposed inside the LED tube lamp 900 are presented below.

Referring to FIG. 11 , a block diagram of an LED tube lamp including a power supply module according to some exemplary embodiments is illustrated. Compared to the LED lamp shown in FIG. 4A , the LED tube lamp 1100 of FIG. 11 includes a rectifying circuit 510 , a filtering circuit 520 , and a driving circuit 530 , and further includes an electric-shock detection module 3000 (also known as an electric shock protection module). In these embodiments, the LED tube lamp 1100 is configured to, for example, directly receive the external driving signal provided by the external AC power supply 508 , wherein the external driving signal is input through the signal line (marked as “L”) and the neutral line (marked as “N”) to the two pins 501 and 502 on the two ends of the LED tube lamp 1100 . In practical applications, the LED tube lamp 500 may further comprise two additional pins 503 and 504 , also on its two ends as shown in FIG. 11 . Under the structure of the LED tube lamp 1100 having the four pins 501 - 504 , depending on design needs the two pins (such as the pins 501 and 503 , or the pins 502 and 504 ) on an end cap disposed on one end of the LED tube lamp 1100 may be electrically connected or mutually electrically independent, but the invention is not limited to any of the two different cases.

The electric-shock detection module 3000 is disposed inside the LED tube lamp 1100 and includes a detection control circuit 3100 and a current-limiting circuit 3200 . The electric-shock detection module 3000 may be and is hereinafter referred to as an installation detection module 3000 . The current-limiting circuit 3200 is coupled to the rectifying circuit 510 via an installation detection terminal TE 1 and is coupled to the filtering circuit 520 via an installation detection terminal TE 2 . So the current-limiting circuit 3200 is serially coupled to a power loop of the LED tube lamp 1100 . Under a detection mode, the detection control circuit 3100 detects the signal passing through the installation detection terminals TE 1 and TE 2 (i.e., the signal passing through the power loop) and determines whether to cut off an LED driving signal (e.g., an external driving signal) passing through the LED tube lamp based on the detected result. The installation detection module 3000 includes circuitry configured to perform the steps of detecting the signal passing through the installation detection terminals TE 1 and TE 2 and determining whether to cut off an LED driving signal, and thus may be referred to as an installation detection circuit, or more generally as a detection circuit or cut-off circuit. When the LED tube lamp 1100 is not yet installed in a lamp socket or holder, or in some cases if it is not installed properly or is only partly installed (e.g., one side is connected to a lamp socket, but not the other side yet), the detection control circuit 3100 detects a smaller current compared to a predetermined current (or current value) and determines the signal is passing through a high impedance through the installation detection terminals TE 1 and TE 2 . In this case, in certain embodiments, the current-limiting circuit 3200 is in a cut-off state to make the LED tube lamp 1100 stop working or limit the current flowing through the power loop to less than 5 MIU, which can be referred to 5 mA at a certain frequency and is the requirement, defined in the safety certification standard such as UL, of the LED tube lamp. In this manner, when the installation detection circuit 2520 is in the cut-off state, the LED module is not capable of emitting light because the current flowing through the power loop is limited. The unit of “MIU” is defined by American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C101-1992.

Otherwise, the installation detection module 2520 determines that the LED tube lamp has already been installed in the lamp socket or holder (e.g., when the detection control circuit 3100 detects a current equal to or greater than a predetermined current, and the current-limiting circuit 3200 determines the signal is passing through a low impedance through the installation detection terminals TE 1 and TE 2 ) and maintains conducting state/current limiting state to make the LED tube lamp 1100 working normally. In this manner, when the current-limiting circuit 3200 is in the conducting state, the LED module is capable of emitting light because the current flowing through the power loop is not limited.

For example, in some embodiments, when a current passing through the installation detection terminals TE 1 and TE 2 is greater than or equal to a specific, defined installation current (or a current value), which may indicate that the current supplied to the driving circuit 530 is greater than or equal to a specific, defined operating current, the current-limiting circuit 3200 is conducting to make the LED tube lamp 1100 operate in a conducting state. For example, a current greater than or equal to the specific current value may indicate that the LED tube lamp 1100 has correctly been installed in the lamp socket or holder. When the current passing through the installation detection terminals TE 1 and TE 2 is smaller than the specific, defined installation current (or the current value), which may indicate that the current supplied to the driving circuit 530 is less than a specific, defined operating current, the current-limiting circuit 3200 cuts off current to make the LED tube lamp 1100 enter in a non-conducting state based on determining that the LED tube lamp 1100 has been not installed in, or does not properly connect to, the lamp socket or holder. The installation detection module 3000 determines conducting or cutting off based on the impedance detection to make the LED tube lamp operate in a conducting state or enter non-conducting state. The LED tube lamp operating in a conducting state may refer to the LED tube lamp including a sufficient current passing through the LED module to cause the LED light sources to emit light. The LED tube lamp operating in a cut-off state may refer to the LED tube lamp including an insufficient current or no current passing through the LED module so that the LED light sources do not emit light. Accordingly, the occurrence of electric shock caused by touching the conductive part of the LED tube lamp which is incorrectly installed in the lamp socket or holder can be efficiently avoided.

More precisely, when an external AC power supply is applied to the LED tube lamp 500 , the current flows from the pin on one end cap (e.g., left end cap) to the pin on the other end cap (e.g., right end cap) and passes through the leads and the components serially connected to the first terminal of the LED module (e.g., the positive terminal), the LED module, the leads and the components serially connected to the second terminal of the LED module (e.g., the negative terminal) in sequence. The pins, the leads, the components, and the LED module that the current passes through form the power loop.

It should be noted that, the issue of electric shock is raised since the power loop is formed between the respective ends of the LED tube lamp under the dual-end power supply structure.

It is noted that the illustrated position of the installation detection module 2520 in FIG. 11 is merely an exemplary position determined according to a possible or illustrated position of the current-limiting circuit 3200 in the installation detection module 3000 , so figures illustrating the current-limiting circuit 3200 do not mean that the current-limiting circuit 3200 must be disposed in the same position as in FIG. 11 for connecting to other circuit(s) (such as the rectifying circuit 510 , the filtering circuit 520 , or the driving circuit 530 ). Further, it is merely an example embodiment to dispose the current-limiting circuit 3200 between the rectifying circuit 510 and the filtering circuit 520 . In some embodiments, the function of preventing electric shock can be implemented by disposing the current-limiting circuit 3200 at the position that is capable of controlling turn-on and cut-off state of the power loop. For example, the switch circuit may be disposed between the driving circuit ( 530 ) and the LED module ( 50 ), but the present invention is not limited thereto.

From circuit operation perspectives, a method performed by the detection control circuit 3100 and configured to determine, under a detection mode, whether the LED tube lamp 1100 is correctly/properly connected/installed to a lamp socket or whether there is any unintended external impedance being connected to the LED tube lamp is shown in FIG. 40A . The method includes the following steps: temporarily conducting a detection path for a period and then cutting it off (step S 101 ); sampling an electrical signal on the detection path during the conduction period (step S 102 ); determining whether the sample of electrical signal conforms with predefined signal characteristics (step S 103 ); if the determination result in step S 103 is positive, controlling the current-limiting circuit 3200 to operate in a first state (step S 104 ); and if the determination result in step S 103 is negative, controlling the current-limiting circuit 3200 to operate in a second state (step S 105 ) and then returning to the step S 101 .

In the method of FIG. 40A , the detection path may refer to the power loop in the LED tube lamp described above or an independent current path. And detailed description of some embodiments of the method is presented below with reference to FIGS. 12A to 18D . And detailed description of how the described detection control circuit 3100 sets parameters such as the conduction period, intervals between multiple conduction periods, and the time point to trigger conduction, of the detection path is also presented below of different embodiments.

In the step S 101 , conducting the detection path for a period may be implemented by means using pulse signal to control switching of a switch.

In the step S 102 , the sample of electrical signal is a signal that can represent or express impedance variation on the detection path, which signal may comprise a voltage signal, a current signal, a frequency signal, a phase signal, etc.

In the step S 103 , the operation of determining whether the sampled electrical signal conforms with predefined signal characteristics may comprise, for example, a relative relation of the sampled electrical signal to a predefined signal. In some embodiments, the sampled electrical signal that is determined to conform with the predefined signal characteristics may correspond to a determination or state that the LED tube lamp is correctly/properly connected to the lamp socket or there is no unintended external impedance being coupled to the LED tube lamp, and the sampled electrical signal that is determined to not conform with the predefined signal characteristics may correspond to a determination or state where the LED tube lamp is not correctly/properly connected to the lamp socket or there is a foreign external impedance (e.g., a human body impedance, simulated/test human body impedance, or other impedance connected to the lamp and which the lamp is not designed to connect to for proper lighting operations) being coupled to the LED tube lamp.

In the steps S 104 and S 105 , the first state and the second state are two distinct circuit-configuration states, and may be set according to the configured position and type of the current-limiting circuit 3200 . For example, in the case or embodiment where the current-limiting circuit 3200 is independent of the driving circuit and refers to a switching circuit or a current-limiting circuit that is connected on the power loop in series, the first state refers to a conducting state (or non-current-limiting state) while the second state refers to a cutoff state (or current-limiting state).

Detailed operations and example circuit structures for performing the above method in FIG. 40A are illustrated by descriptions below of different embodiments of installation detection modules.

Referring to FIG. 12A , a block diagram of an installation detection module according to some certain embodiments is illustrated. The installation detection module 3000 a includes a detection pulse generating module 3110 , a detection result latching circuit 3120 , a detection determining circuit 3130 and a current-limiting circuit 3200 a . The detection pulse generating module 3110 , detection result latching circuit 3120 , and detection determining circuit 3130 constitute a detection control circuit 3100 . Certain of these circuits or modules may be referred to as first, second, third, etc., circuits as a naming convention to differentiate them from each other. The detection determining circuit 3130 is coupled to and detects the signal between the installation detection terminals TE 1 (through a switch circuit coupling terminal 3201 and the current-limiting circuit 3200 a ) and TE 2 . The detection determining circuit 3130 is also coupled to the detection result latching circuit 3120 via a detection result terminal 3131 to transmit the detection result signal to the detection result latching circuit 3120 . The detection determining circuit 3130 may be configured to detect a current passing through terminals TE 1 and TE 2 (e.g., to detect whether the current is above or below a specific current value). The detection pulse generating module 3110 is coupled to the detection result latching circuit 3120 via a pulse signal output terminal 3111 , and generates a pulse signal to inform the detection result latching circuit 3120 of a time point for latching (storing) the detection result. For example, the detection pulse generating module 3110 may be a circuit configured to generate a signal that causes a latching circuit, such as the detection result latching circuit 3120 to enter and remain in a state that corresponds to one of a conducting state or a cut-off state for the LED tube lamp. The detection result latching circuit 3120 stores the detection result according to the detection result signal (or detection result signal and pulse signal), and transmits or provides the detection result to the current-limiting circuit 3200 a coupled to the detection result latching circuit 3120 via a detection result latching terminal 3121 . The current-limiting circuit 3200 a controls the state between conducting or cut off between the installation detection terminals TE 1 and TE 2 according to the detection result. In some embodiments, the current-limiting circuit 3200 a comprises a switching circuit, and in the following description is referred to as the switching circuit 3200 a.

In some embodiments, the installation detection module 3000 a further includes an emergency control module 3140 configured for determining whether an external driving signal is a DC signal provided by an auxiliary power supply module, in order for the detection result latching circuit 3120 to adjust its way of controlling the switching circuit 3200 a according to the determination result, so as to avoid misoperation by the installation detection module 3000 a when the LED tube lamp is used in an environment/application to be receiving auxiliary power input by an auxiliary power supply module. The structures and operations of other circuit(s)/module(s) in these embodiments with the emergency control module 3140 are similar to or correspond to those of the detection pulse generating module 3110 , detection result latching circuit 3120 , detection determining circuit 3130 , and the switching circuit 3200 a described above, and thus are not repeated herein.

Specifically, the emergency control module 3140 is connected to a detection result latching circuit 3120 through a path 3141 , and is configured to detect a bus voltage of the power supply module and determine whether the external driving signal being received by the LED tube lamp is a DC signal. If the emergency control module 3140 determines that the external driving signal is a DC signal, the emergency control module 3140 outputs a first state signal indicative of an emergency state to the detection result latching circuit 3120 ; or if the emergency control module 3140 determines that the external driving signal is not a DC signal, the emergency control module 3140 outputs a second state signal indicative of a non-emergency state to the detection result latching circuit 3120 . When the detection result latching circuit 3120 receives the first state signal, regardless of the output of the detection pulse generating module 3110 and the output of the detection determining circuit 3130 , the detection result latching circuit 3120 then maintains the switch circuit 3200 a in a conduction or on state, which can be referred to as in an emergency lighting mode. On the other hand, when the detection result latching circuit 3120 receives the second state signal, the detection result latching circuit 3120 then operates according to its ordinary mechanism to control the conduction and cutoff of the switch circuit 3200 a based on the pulse signal and the detection result signal. Such a term “bus voltage” mentioned herein may refer to an alternating voltage/signal provided to an LED tube lamp which has not been processed by a rectifying circuit (i.e., not yet rectified, such as the external driving signal) in the LED tube lamp, or may refer to a rectified voltage/signal after rectification in the LED tube lamp and based on such an external driving signal, but the present invention is not limited to any of these two cases.

Next, detailed operation mechanisms of an installation detection module including the emergency control module 3140 are further described with reference to FIG. 40B . FIG. 40B is a flow chart of steps of a control method of the installation detection module with the emergency control module 3140 according to an exemplary embodiment. Referring to both FIG. 12A and FIG. 40B , when a power supply module of the LED tube lamp receives an external driving signal, the emergency control module 3140 operates to detect voltage on the power line (step S 201 ) and then to judge whether the detected voltage on the power line is maintained above a first voltage level for a first period (step S 202 ), wherein the first period may be for example 75 ms, and the first voltage level may be any level in the range of between 100V and 140V, such as 110V or 120V. For example, in an embodiment of the step S 202 , the emergency control module 3140 judges whether the detected voltage on the power line is maintained above 110V or 120V for over 75 ms.

If the determination result by the emergency control module 3140 in step S 202 is positive, this means the received external driving signal is a DC signal, then the installation detection module 2520 enters into an emergency mode and causes the detection result latching circuit 3120 to direct the switch circuit 3200 a to operate in a first configuration state (step S 203 ), which is for example a conduction state. On the other hand, if the judgment by the emergency control module 3140 in step S 202 is negative, this means the received external driving signal is not a DC signal but is an AC signal, then the installation detection module 2520 enters into a detection mode, causing the detection result latching circuit 3120 to judge the installation state of the LED tube lamp by outputting pulse(s) or pulse signal(s) to the switch circuit 3200 a . For detailed descriptions of operations of the installation detection module 2520 that includes the emergency control module 3140 under the installation detection mode according to certain embodiments, refer to those of embodiments of FIG. 40A presented above.

On the other hand, under the emergency mode, in addition to maintaining the switch circuit 3200 a to operate in the first configuration, the emergency control module 3140 further determines whether a bus voltage (i.e., the voltage on the power line of the power supply module) rises to exceed a second voltage level (step S 204 ). When the emergency control module 3140 determines the bus voltage does not rise to exceed the second voltage level, which refers to the LED tube lamp remaining under the emergency mode, the switch circuit 3200 a continues to operate in the first configuration. When the emergency control module 3140 determines the bus voltage rises to exceed the second voltage level from the first voltage level, which refers to the external driving signal received by the power supply module changing into the AC signal from the DC signal (e.g., AC power line has been recovered), the emergency control module 3140 controls the installation detection module 3000 a to enter into the detection mode. In some embodiments, the second voltage level can be any voltage level higher than the first voltage level but less than 277V. For example, when the first voltage level is 110V, the second voltage level can be 120V. According to some embodiments of the step S 204 , the emergency control module 3140 determines whether the bus voltage has a rising edge exceeding 120V, and enters into the detection mode when the determination result is positive.

In some embodiments, the installation detection module 3000 a further includes a ballast detection module 3400 (illustrated in FIG. 12A ), which is configured for determining whether the external driving signal input to the LED tube lamp is an AC signal provided by an electronic ballast, so that the detection result latching circuit 3120 can adjust the way of controlling the switching circuit 3200 a according to the determination result. For example, in case a ballast-bypass type LED tube lamp is installed, by mistake, onto a lamp socket with a ballast, the LED tube lamp having the ballast detection module 3400 is capable of issuing a warning (such as a flashing) to the user of such a misuse occurrence. Therefore, the damage caused by an AC signal provided from a ballast, which is not designed to drive the ballast-bypass type LED tube lamp, can be prevented.

Specifically, the ballast detection module 3400 of FIG. 16A is coupled to the detection result latching circuit 3120 through a path 3151 , and is configured to detect the bus voltage in the power supply module of the LED tube lamp. In addition, the ballast detection module 3400 is configured to determine whether the external driving signal being input to the LED tube lamp is an AC signal provided by an electronic ballast or directly by a power grid (i.e., AC main), according to a detected signal feature of the power line voltage signal. Since an AC signal output by a ballast (especially an electronic ballast) has characteristics of having relatively high frequency and/or high voltage, but an AC signal output by the power grid typically has characteristics of having relatively low frequency (such as in the range of 50 Hz to 60 Hz) and/or low voltage (generally lower than 305V), the source of an external driving signal input to the LED tube lamp can be identified by detecting a signal feature, such as the frequency, amplitude, or phase, of the power line voltage signal input in a power supply module of the LED tube lamp.

For example, in some embodiments, the ballast detection module 3400 is configured to sample a signal at rectifying output terminal 511 / 512 and determine or detect the frequency of the sampled signal, which can be referred to as the frequency of the bus voltage. When the signal frequency detected by the ballast detection module 3400 is greater than a set value, this indicates that the currently input external driving signal is a relatively high frequency signal and is thus likely provided by a ballast, so the ballast detection module 3400 then issues a first indicating signal (indicative of the external driving signal being provided by a ballast) to the detection result latching circuit 3120 , which then controls the switching state of the switching circuit 3200 a according to the first indicating signal, so as to affect the continuity of current in the power loop of the LED tube lamp. On the other hand, when the signal frequency detected by the ballast detection module 3400 is smaller than or equal to the set value, this indicates that the currently input external driving signal is a relatively low frequency signal and is thus likely provided by an AC power grid, so the ballast detection module 3400 then issues a second indicating signal (indicative of the external driving signal being provided by an AC power grid) to the detection result latching circuit 3120 , which then controls to maintain the switching circuit 3200 a in a conducting state according to the second indicating signal, so as to cause the input driving signal to be stably provided to a later-stage LED module, thereby causing the LED module to have consistent, smooth, and/or even luminance.

When the input external driving signal detected by the ballast detection module 3400 is provided by a ballast, the LED module is configured to generate or emit a specific light pattern in response to variation in the continuity of a current flowing in the power loop, in order to further indicate to a user an occurrence of a misuse installation. In some embodiments, the specific light pattern may be referred to as a flashing of light of a constant frequency or variable frequency. For example, when receiving the first indicating signal the detection result latching circuit 3120 may be configured to periodically turn on and then turn off the switching circuit 3200 a , causing the magnitude of a driving current to be affected by the switching of the switching circuit 3200 a , in order to change luminance of the LED module accordingly to perform a flashing mode. A user can notice that the ballast-bypass LED tube lamp has been installed by mistake to a lamp socket of a ballast, when observing that the LED tube lamp is flashing in the flashing mode, and can thus immediately remove the LED tube lamp from the socket of a ballast to prevent damage or danger.

In some embodiments, the installation detection module 3000 a further includes a warning circuit 3160 (illustrated in FIG. 16A ), which is configured to issue a misuse warning in the form of e.g. sound or light, under the control of the detection result latching circuit 3120 , when there is a misuse condition or risk happening on the LED tube lamp, in order to remind or alert a user of the occurrence of misuse condition. In the illustrated embodiment of FIG. 16A , the warning circuit 3160 electrically connected to the detection result latching circuit 3120 through a path 3161 , in order to receive a signal issued by the detection result latching circuit 3120 . When receiving the first indicating signal, the detection result latching circuit 3120 issues a signal to enable the warning circuit 3160 to issue a misuse warning. In some embodiments, the warning circuit 3160 comprises or is embodied by a buzzer, in order to buzz to alert the user of the misuse situation when the ballast-bypass LED tube lamp is installed, by mistake, onto a lamp socket with a ballast.

In some embodiments, the installation detection module 3000 a turns the switching circuit 3200 a off to maintain the power loop in a cutoff state after issuing a misuse warning, and thereby avoiding the potential danger to a user due to not immediately removing the LED tube lamp from the incompatible lamp socket.

In some embodiments, the detection pulse generating module 3110 , detection determining circuit 3130 , detection result latching circuit 3120 , and the switching circuit 3200 a of the installation detection module 3000 a comprise or are implemented by, but are not limited to, circuit structures of FIGS. 12B-12F respectively, which FIGS. are circuit structure diagrams of respective circuits and module of an installation detection module 3000 a according to a first embodiment. Descriptions of the circuit embodiments of FIGS. 12B-12F are presented below.

Referring to FIG. 12B , a block diagram of a detection pulse generating module according to some certain embodiments is illustrated. A detection pulse generating module 3110 may be a circuit that includes multiple capacitors C 11 , C 12 , and C 13 , multiple resistors R 11 , R 12 , and R 13 , two buffers BF 1 and BF 2 , an inverter INV, a diode D 11 , and an OR gate OG 1 . The capacitor C 11 may be referred to as a first capacitor C 11 , the capacitor C 12 may be referred to as a second capacitor C 12 , and the capacitor C 13 may be referred to as a third capacitor C 13 . The resistor R 11 may be referred to as a first resistor R 11 , the resistor R 12 may be referred to as a second resistor R 12 , and the resistor R 13 may be referred to as a third resistor R 13 . The buffer BF 1 may be referred to as a first buffer BF 1 and the buffer BF 2 may be referred to as a second buffer BF 2 . The diode D 11 may be referred to as a first diode D 11 and the OR gate OG 1 may be referred to as a first OR gate OG 1 . With use or operation, the capacitor C 11 and the resistor R 11 connect in series between a driving voltage (e.g., a driving voltage source, which may be a node of a power supply), such as VCC usually defined as a high logic level voltage, and a reference voltage (or potential), such as ground potential in this embodiment. The connection node between the capacitor C 11 and the resistor R 11 is coupled to an input terminal of the buffer BF 1 . In this exemplary embodiment, the buffer BF 1 includes two inverters connected in series between an input terminal and an output terminal of the buffer BF 1 . The resistor R 12 is coupled between the driving voltage, e.g., VCC, and an input terminal of the inverter INV. The resistor R 13 is coupled between an input terminal of the buffer BF 2 and the reference voltage, e.g. ground potential in this embodiment. An anode of the diode D 11 is grounded and a cathode of the diode D 11 is coupled to the input terminal of the buffer BF 2 . First ends of the capacitors C 12 and C 13 are jointly coupled to an output terminal of the buffer BF 1 , and second, opposite ends of the capacitors C 12 and C 13 are respectively coupled to the input terminal of the inverter INV and the input terminal of the buffer BF 2 . In this exemplary embodiment, the buffer BF 2 includes two inverters connected in series between an input terminal and an output terminal of the buffer BF 2 . An output terminal of the inverter INV and an output terminal of the buffer BF 2 are coupled to two input terminals of the OR gate OG 1 . According to certain embodiments, the voltage (or potential) for “high logic level” and “low logic level” mentioned in this specification are all relative to another voltage (or potential) or a certain reference voltage (or potential) in circuits, and further may be described as “high logic level” and “low logic level.”

FIG. 37A is a signal waveform diagram of an exemplary power supply module according to an exemplary embodiment. The installation detection operation is described further in accordance with FIG. 37A , which shows an example when an end cap of an LED tube lamp is inserted into a lamp socket and the other end cap thereof is electrically coupled to a human body, or when both end caps of the LED tube lamp are inserted into the lamp socket (e.g., at the timepoint ts), the LED tube lamp is conductive with electricity. At this moment, the installation detection module (e.g., the installation detection module 2520 as illustrated in FIG. 11 ) enters a detection mode DTM. The voltage on the connection node of the capacitor C 11 and the resistor R 11 is high initially (equals to the driving voltage, VCC) and decreases with time to zero finally. The input terminal of the buffer BF 1 is coupled to the connection node of the capacitor C 11 and the resistor R 11 , so the buffer BF 1 outputs a high logic level signal at the beginning and changes to output a low logic level signal when the voltage on the connection node of the capacitor C 11 and the resistor R 11 decreases to a low logic trigger logic level. As a result, the buffer BF 1 is configured to produce an input pulse signal and then remain in a low logic level thereafter (stops outputting the input pulse signal.) The width for the input pulse signal may be described as equal to one (initial setting) time period, which is determined by the capacitance value of the capacitor C 11 and the resistance value of the resistor R 11 .

Next, the operations for the buffer BF 1 to produce the pulse signal with the initial setting time period will be described below. Since the voltage on a first end of the capacitor C 12 and on a first end of the resistor R 12 is equal to the driving voltage VCC, the voltage on the connection node of both of them is also a high logic level. The first end of the resistor R 13 is grounded and the first end of the capacitor C 13 receives the input pulse signal from the buffer BF 1 , so the connection node of the capacitor C 13 and the resistor R 13 has a high logic level voltage at the beginning but this voltage decreases with time to zero (in the meantime, the capacitor stores the voltage being equal to or approaching the driving voltage VCC.) Accordingly, initially the inverter INV outputs a low logic level signal and the buffer BF 2 outputs a high logic level signal, and hence the OR gate OG 1 outputs a high logic level signal (a first pulse signal DP 1 ) at the pulse signal output terminal 3111 . At this moment, the detection result latching circuit 3120 (as illustrated in FIG. 12A ) stores the detection result for the first time according to the detection result signal Sdr received from the detection determining circuit 3130 (as illustrated in FIG. 12A ) and the pulse signal generated at the pulse signal output terminal 3111 . During that initial pulse time period, as illustrated in FIG. 12A , the detection pulse generating module 3110 outputs a high logic level signal, which results in the detection result latching circuit 3120 outputting the result of that high logic level signal.

When the voltage on the connection node of the capacitor C 13 and the resistor R 13 decreases to the low logic trigger logic level, the buffer BF 2 changes to output a low logic level signal to make the OR gate OG 1 output a low logic level signal at the pulse signal output terminal 3111 (stops outputting the first pulse signal DP 1 .) The width of the first pulse signal DP 1 output from the OR gate OG 1 is determined by the capacitance value of the capacitor C 13 and the resistance value of the resistor R 13 .

The operation after the buffer BF 1 stops outputting the pulse signal is described as below. For example, the operation may be initially in an LED operating mode DRM. Since the capacitor C 13 stores the voltage being almost equal to the driving voltage VCC, and when the buffer BF 1 instantaneously changes its output from a high logic level signal to a low logic level signal, the voltage on the connection node of the capacitor C 13 and the resistor R 13 is below zero but will be pulled up to zero by the diode D 11 rapidly charging the capacitor C 13 . Therefore, the buffer BF 2 still outputs a low logic level signal.

In some embodiments, when the buffer BF 1 instantaneously changes its output from a high logic level signal to a low logic level signal, the voltage on the one end of the capacitor C 12 also changes from the driving voltage VCC to zero instantly. This makes the connection node of the capacitor C 12 and the resistor R 12 have a low logic level signal. At this moment, the output of the inverter INV changes to a high logic level signal to make the OR gate output a high logic level signal (a second pulse signal DP 2 ) at the pulse signal output terminal 3111 . The detection result latching circuit 3120 as illustrated in FIG. 12A stores the detection result for a second time according to the detection result signal Sdr received from the detection determining circuit 3130 (as illustrated in FIG. 12A ) and the pulse signal generated at the pulse signal output terminal 3111 . Next, the driving voltage VCC charges the capacitor C 12 through the resistor R 12 to make the voltage on the connection node of the capacitor C 12 and the resistor R 12 increase with time to the driving voltage VCC. When the voltage on the connection node of the capacitor C 12 and the resistor R 12 increases to reach a high logic trigger logic level, the inverter INV outputs a low logic level signal again to make the OR gate OG 1 stop outputting the second pulse signal DP 2 . The width of the second pulse signal DP 2 is determined by the capacitance value of the capacitor C 12 and the resistance value of the resistor R 12 .

As those mentioned above, in certain embodiments, the detection pulse generating module 3110 generates two high logic level pulse signals in the detection mode DTM, which are the first pulse signal DP 1 and the second pulse signal DP 2 . These pulse signals are output from the pulse signal output terminal 3111 . Moreover, there is an interval TIV with a defined time between the first and second pulse signals DP 2 (e.g., an opposite-logic signal, which may have a low logic level when the pulse signals have a high logic level). In embodiments using the circuits as shown in FIG. 12B to implement the detection pulse generating module 3110 , the defined time is determined by the capacitance value of the capacitor C 11 and the resistance value of the resistor R 11 . In other embodiments using digital circuits to implement the detection pulse generating module 3110 , adjustment of the set interval TIV can be implemented by setting the signal frequency or period or other adjustable parameter(s) of the digital circuit of each embodiment.

From the detection mode DTM entering the LED operating mode DRM, the detection pulse generating module 3110 does not produce the pulse signal any more, and keeps the pulse signal output terminal 3111 on a low logic level potential. As described herein, the LED operating mode DRM is the stage following the detection mode (e.g., following the time after the second pulse signal DP 2 ends). The LED operating mode DRM occurs when the LED tube lamp is at least partly connected to a power source, such as provided in a lamp socket. For example, the LED operating mode DRM may occur when part of the LED tube lamp, such as only one side of the LED tube lamp, is properly connected to one side of a lamp socket, and part of the LED tube lamp is either connected to a high impedance, such as a person, and/or is improperly connected to the other side of the lamp socket (e.g., is misaligned so that the metal contacts in the socket do not contact metal contacts in the LED tube lamp). The LED operating mode DRM may also occur when the entire LED tube lamp is properly connected to the lamp socket.

Referring to FIG. 12C , a detection determining circuit according to some certain embodiments is illustrated. An exemplary detection determining circuit 3130 includes a comparator CP 11 and a resistor R 14 . The comparator CP 11 may also be referred to as a first comparator CP 11 and the resistor R 14 may also be referred to as a fifth resistor R 14 . A negative input terminal of the comparator CP 11 receives a reference logic level signal (or a reference voltage) Vref, a positive input terminal thereof is grounded through the resistor R 14 and is also coupled to a switch circuit coupling terminal 3201 . Referring to FIGS. 12A and 12C , the signal flowing into the switch circuit 3200 a from the installation detection terminal TE 1 outputs to the switch circuit coupling terminal 3201 to the resistor R 14 . When the current of the signal passing through the resistor R 14 reaches a certain level (for example, bigger than or equal to a defined current for installation, (e.g. 2 A) and this makes the voltage on the resistor R 14 higher than the reference voltage Vref (referring to two end caps inserted into the lamp socket) the comparator CP 11 produces a high logic level detection result signal Sdr and outputs it to the detection result terminal 3131 . For example, when an LED tube lamp is correctly installed in a lamp socket, the comparator CP 11 outputs a high logic level detection result signal Sdr at the detection result terminal 3131 , whereas the comparator CP 11 generates a low logic level detection result signal Sdr and outputs it to the detection result terminal 3131 when a current passing through the resistor R 14 is insufficient to make the voltage on the resistor R 14 higher than the reference voltage Vref (referring to only one end cap inserted into the lamp socket.) Therefore, in some embodiments, when the LED tube lamp is incorrectly installed in the lamp socket or one end cap thereof is inserted into the lamp socket but the other one is grounded by an object such as a human body, the current will be too small to make the comparator CP 11 output a high logic level detection result signal Sdr to the detection result terminal 3131 .

Referring to FIG. 12D , a schematic detection result latching circuit according to some embodiments of the present invention is illustrated. A detection result latching circuit 3120 includes a D flip-flop DFF, a resistor R 15 , and an OR gate OG 2 . The D flip-flop DFF may also be referred to as a first D flip-flop DFF, the resistor R 15 may also be referred to as a fourth resistor R 15 , and the OR gate OG 2 may also be referred to as a second OR gate OG 2 . The D flip-flop DFF has a CLK input terminal coupled to a detection result terminal 3131 , and a D input terminal coupled to a driving voltage VCC. When the detection result terminal 3131 first outputs a low logic level detection result signal Sdr, the D flip-flop DFF initially outputs a low logic level signal at a Q output terminal thereof, but the D flip-flop DFF outputs a high logic level signal at the Q output terminal thereof when the detection result terminal 3131 outputs a high logic level detection result signal Sdr. The resistor R 15 is coupled between the Q output terminal of the D flip-flop DFF and a reference voltage, such as ground potential. When the OR gate OG 2 receives the first or second pulse signals DP 1 /DP 2 from the pulse signal output terminal 3111 or receives a high logic level signal from the Q output terminal of the D flip-flop DFF, the OR gate OG 2 outputs a high logic level detection result latching signal at a detection result latching terminal 3121 . The detection pulse generating module 3110 only in the detection mode DTM outputs the first and the second pulse signals DP 1 /DP 2 to make the OR gate OG 2 output the high logic level detection result latching signal, and thus the D flip-flop DFF decides the detection result latching signal to be the high logic level or the low logic level the rest of the time, e.g., including the LED operating mode DRM after the detection mode DTM. Accordingly, when the detection result terminal 3131 has no high logic level detection result signal Sdr, the D flip-flop DFF keeps a low logic level signal at the Q output terminal to make the detection result latching terminal 3121 also keep a low logic level detection result latching signal in the detection mode DTM. On the contrary, once the detection result terminal 3131 has a high logic level detection result signal Sdr, the D flip-flop DFF outputs and keeps a high logic level signal (e.g., based on VCC) at the Q output terminal. In this way, the detection result latching terminal 3121 keeps a high logic level detection result latching signal in the LED operating mode DRM as well.

Referring to FIG. 12E , a schematic switch circuit according to some embodiments is illustrated. A switch circuit 3200 a includes a transistor, such as a bipolar junction transistor (BJT) M 11 , as being a power transistor, which has the ability of dealing with high current/power and is suitable for the switch circuit. The BJT M 11 may also be referred to as a first transistor M 11 . The BJT M 11 has a collector coupled to an installation detection terminal TE 1 , a base coupled to a detection result latching terminal 3121 , and an emitter coupled to a switch circuit coupling terminal 3201 . When the detection pulse generating module 3110 produces the first and second pulse signals DP 1 /DP 2 , the BJT M 11 is in a transient conducting state. This allows the detection determining circuit 3130 to perform the detection for determining the detection result latching signal to be a high logic level or a low logic level. When the detection result latching circuit 3120 outputs a high logic level detection result latching signal at the detection result latching terminal 3121 , this means the LED tube lamp is correctly installed in the lamp socket, so that the BJT M 11 is in the conducting state to make the installation detection terminals TE 1 and TE 2 conducting (i.e., make the power loop conducting). In the meantime, the driving circuit (not shown) in the power supply module starts to operate in response to the voltage received from the power loop and generates the lighting control signal Slc for controlling the conducting state of the power switch (not shown), so that the driving current can be produced to light up the LED module. In contrast, when the detection result latching circuit 3120 outputs a low logic level detection result latching signal at the detection result latching terminal 3121 and the output from detection pulse generating module 3110 is a low logic level, the BJT M 11 is cut-off or in the blocking state to make the installation detection terminals TE 1 and TE 2 cut-off or blocking. In this case, the driving circuit of the power supply module would not be started, so that the lighting control signal Slc would not be generated.

FIG. 12F is a circuit diagram of a switching circuit according to some embodiments. Compared to the embodiment of FIG. 12E where a switching circuit 3200 a comprises a transistor M 11 , the switching circuit 3200 a of FIG. 12F comprises a transistor illustrated by a MOSFET M 12 , and further includes a pulse resetting auxiliary circuit 320 . In the embodiment of FIG. 12F , the pulse resetting auxiliary circuit 320 is electrically connected to a control terminal of the transistor M 12 and a detection result latching terminal 3121 of the detection result latching circuit 3120 . The pulse resetting auxiliary circuit 320 is configured to reset signal S M12 provided to the control terminal of the transistor M 12 under the detection mode, so as to cause a falling edge of the signal S M12 to match a signal at the detection result latching terminal 3121 under the detection mode which can be referred to the pulse signal at the pulse signal output terminal 3111 . Therefore, the pulse resetting auxiliary circuit 320 can increase the discharge speed of the signal S M12 under the detection mode, so that the signal S M12 can be pulled to a low level fast when the pulse signal is pulled to a low level, and thereby reducing the phase difference between the pulse signal and the signal S M12 and preventing misoperation of the transistor M 12 .

Specifically, when the LED tube lamp is operating in a detection mode, the detection result latching circuit 3120 is configured to output a pulse signal through a detection result latching terminal 3121 to control the transistor M 12 for periodically and intermittently conducting. Without regard to the speed of rising up and falling down of its voltage level, i.e. assuming that the slope of both the rising up and the falling down is close to being infinite, the signal S M12 is approximately a pulse signal too and may be substantially synchronous with the signal at the detection result latching terminal 3121 , with the two signals concurrently rising up and concurrently falling down. But in actual practice, the speed of charging (or rising up) and discharging (or falling down) of the signal S M12 may be significantly affected by relevant circuit design and chosen values of device parameters of the transistor M 12 . For example, if the transistor M 12 has greater chosen dimensions, parasitic capacitors between the control terminal and one of the other terminals of the transistor M 12 will be greater which prolongs its charging and discharging time. Thus, considering the speed of rising up and falling down of its voltage level, the signal S M12 might not be synchronous with the signal at the detection result latching terminal 3121 . To address this issue, in this embodiment of FIG. 12F , the pulse resetting auxiliary circuit 320 is configured to be enabled, when the detection result latching circuit 3120 outputs a low-level signal and the signal S M12 remains at a high voltage level, to further conduct an additional discharge path for improving the discharge speed and thus solving the asynchronous problem.

In some embodiments, the pulse resetting auxiliary circuit 320 may be realized by a circuit structure shown in FIG. 12F , wherein the pulse resetting auxiliary circuit 320 includes a transistor M 13 (illustrated by but not limited to a PNP BJT), and resistors R 16 and R 17 . The transistor M 13 has a control terminal electrically connected through the resistor R 16 to a detection result latching terminal 3121 , a first terminal electrically connected to the control terminal of the transistor M 12 , and a second terminal electrically connected through the resistor R 17 to a ground terminal GND. In some embodiments, the pulse resetting auxiliary circuit 320 may further include a diode D 12 and resistors R 18 and R 19 . The diode D 12 has an anode electrically connected to the detection result latching terminal 3121 , and has a cathode electrically connected to an end of the resistor R 18 , which has the other end electrically connected to the control terminal of the transistor M 12 and the first terminal of the transistor M 13 . And the resistor R 19 is electrically connected between the control terminal of the transistor M 12 and the ground terminal GND.

When the LED tube lamp is operating in a normal operation mode, the detection result latching circuit 3120 is configured to output a high-level signal through the detection result latching terminal 3121 , causing the signal S M12 at the control terminal of the transistor M 12 to have a high level to conduct the transistor M 12 . At this time, the transistor M 13 of the pulse resetting auxiliary circuit 320 remains at a cutoff state in response to the high-level signal at the detection result latching terminal 3121 , so the voltage level of the signal S M12 is not significantly affected by the pulse resetting auxiliary circuit 320 . In this case, the pulse resetting auxiliary circuit 320 is regarded as being disabled.

On the other hand, when the LED tube lamp is operating in a detection mode, if the signal S M12 is substantially synchronous with, or does not have substantial phase difference from, the signal at the detection result latching terminal 3121 , no matter whether the signal S M12 is having a high voltage level or low voltage level, the transistor M 13 is in a reverse-biased state between its control terminal and first terminal, causing the transistor M 13 to remain in a cutoff state. But if the signal S M12 is not synchronous with, or does have substantial phase difference from, the signal at the detection result latching terminal 3121 , especially when the signal S M12 lags in phase behind the signal at the detection result latching terminal 3121 , the signal S M12 has a high voltage level and the signal at the detection result latching terminal 3121 has a low voltage level, causing the transistor M 13 to be in a forward-biased state between its control terminal and first terminal. In this case, the pulse resetting auxiliary circuit 320 is regarded as being enabled and the transistor M 13 is caused to conduct, so that the signal S M12 can be discharged through a discharge path from the transistor M 13 to the resistor R 17 and then to the ground terminal GND. In this manner, the speed of falling down of the signal S M12 from a high level to a low level is further improved.

Since the external driving signal Sed is an AC signal and in order to avoid the detection error resulting from the logic level of the external driving signal being just around zero when the detection determining circuit 3130 detects, the detection pulse generating module 3110 generates the first and second pulse signals DP 1 /DP 2 to let the detection determining circuit 3130 perform two detections. So the issue of the logic level of the external driving signal being just around zero in a single detection can be avoided. In some cases, the time difference between the productions of the first and second pulse signals DP 1 /DP 2 is not multiple times of half one cycle T of the external driving signal Sed. For example, it does not correspond to the multiple phase differences of 180 degrees of the external driving signal Sed. In this way, when one of the first and second pulse signals DP 1 /DP 2 is generated and unfortunately the external driving signal Sed is around zero, it can be avoided that the external driving signal Sed is again around zero when the other pulse signal is generated.

The time difference between the productions of the first and second pulse signals DP 1 /DP 2 , for example, an interval TIV with a defined time between both of them can be represented as following:

TIV =( X+Y )( T/ 2),

where T represents the cycle of an external driving signal Sed, X is a natural number, 0<Y<1, with Y in some embodiments in the range of 0.05-0.95, and in some embodiments in the range of 0.15-0.85.

A person of ordinary skill in the relevant art of the present disclosure can understand according to the above descriptions of embodiments that the method of generating two pulses or pulse signals so as to perform installation detection is merely an exemplary embodiment of how the detection pulse generating module operates, and that in practice the detection pulse generating module may be configured to generate at least one or two pulse signals so as to perform installation detection, although the present invention is not limited to any of these different numbers.

Furthermore, in order to avoid the installation detection module entering the detection mode DTM from misjudgment resulting from the logic level of the driving voltage VCC being too small, the first pulse signal DP 1 can be set to be produced when the driving voltage VCC reaches or is higher than a defined logic level. For example, in some embodiments, the detection determining circuit 3130 works after the driving voltage VCC reaching a high enough logic level in order to prevent the installation detection module from misjudgment due to an insufficient logic level.

According to the examples mentioned above, when one end cap of an LED tube lamp is inserted into a lamp socket and the other one floats or electrically couples to a human body or other grounded object, the detection determining circuit outputs a low logic level detection result signal Sdr because of high impedance. The detection result latching circuit stores the low logic level detection result signal Sdr based on the pulse signal of the detection pulse generating module, making it as the low logic level detection result latching signal, and keeps the detection result in the LED operating mode DRM, without changing the logic value. In this way, the switch circuit keeps cutting-off or blocking instead of conducting continually. And further, the electric shock situation can be prevented and the requirement of safety standard can also be met. On the other hand, when two end caps of the LED tube lamp are correctly inserted into the lamp socket (e.g., at the timepoint td), the detection determining circuit outputs a high logic level detection result signal Sdr because the impedance of the circuit for the LED tube lamp itself is small. The detection result latching circuit stores the high logic level detection result signal Sdr based on the pulse signal of the detection pulse generating module, making it as the high logic level detection result latching signal, and keeps the detection result in the LED operating mode DRM. So the switch circuit keeps conducting to make the LED tube lamp work normally in the LED operating mode DRM.

In some embodiments, when one end cap of the LED tube lamp is inserted into the lamp socket and the other one floats or electrically couples to a human body, the detection determining circuit outputs a low logic level detection result signal Sdr to the detection result latching circuit, and then the detection pulse generating module outputs a low logic level signal to the detection result latching circuit to make the detection result latching circuit output a low logic level detection result latching signal to make the switch circuit cutting-off or blocking. As such, the switch circuit blocking makes the installation detection terminals, e.g. the first and second installation detection terminals, blocking. As a result, the LED tube lamp is in non-conducting or blocking state.

However, in some embodiments, when two end caps of the LED tube lamp are correctly inserted into the lamp socket, the detection determining circuit outputs a high logic level detection result signal Sdr to the detection result latching circuit to make the detection result latching circuit output a high logic level detection result latching signal to make the switch circuit conducting. As such, the switch circuit conducting makes the installation detection terminals, e.g. the first and second installation detection terminals, conducting. As a result, the LED tube lamp operates in a conducting state.

Thus, according to the operation of the installation detection module, a first circuit, upon connection of at least one end of the LED tube lamp to a lamp socket, generates and outputs two pulses, each having a pulse width, with a time period between the pulses. The first circuit may include various of the elements described above configured to output the pulses to a base of a transistor (e.g., a BJT transistor) that serves as a switch. The pulses occur during a detection mode DTM for detecting whether the LED tube lamp is properly connected to a lamp socket. The timing of the pulses may be controlled based on the timing of various parts of the first circuit changing from high to low logic levels, or vice versa.

The pulses can be timed such that, during that detection mode DTM time, if the LED tube lamp is properly connected to the lamp socket (e.g., both ends of the LED tube lamp are correctly connected to conductive terminals of the lamp socket), at least one of the pulse signals occurs when an AC current from an external driving signal is at a non-zero level. For example, the pulse signals can occur at intervals TIV that are different from half of the period of the AC supply signal. For example, respective start points or mid points of the pulse signals, or a time between an end of the first pulse signal DP 1 and a beginning of the second pulse signal DP 2 may be separated by an amount of time that is different from half of the period of the AC supply signal (e.g., it may be between 0.05 and 0.95 percent of a multiple of half of the period of the AC supply signal). During a pulse that occurs when the AC supply signal is at a non-zero level, a switch that receives the AC supply signal at the non-zero level may be turned on, causing a latch circuit to change states such that the switch remains permanently on so long as the LED tube lamp remains properly connected to the lamp socket. For example, the switch may be configured to turn on when each pulse is output from the first circuit. The latch circuit may be configured to change state only when the switch is on and the current output from the switch is above a threshold value, which may indicate a proper connection to a light socket. As a result, the LED tube lamp operates in a conducting state.

Accordingly, under the process of installing the LED tube lamp by a user, once the LED tube lamp is powered up (no matter whether the LED tube lamp is lighted up or not), the installation detection module of the LED tube lamp generates the pulse for detecting the installation state or the occurrence of electric shock before continuously conducting the power loop, so that the driving current is conducted through the power loop to drive the LED module after confirming the LED tube lamp is correctly installed or is not touched by the user. Therefore, the LED tube lamp would not be lighted up until the first pulse being generated, which means the power loop would not be conducted or the current on the power loop would be limited to less than 5 mA/MIU. In practical application, the period from the timepoint of the LED tube lamp being powered up to the timepoint of the first pulse being generated is substantially not less than 100 ms. For example, the LED tube lamp provided with the installation detection module of the present embodiment does not emit light until at least 100 ms after being installed and powered up. In some embodiments, since the installation detection module continuously generates the pulses before determining whether the installation state is correct or determining that the user does not touch the LED tube lamp, the LED tube lamp will be lighted up after at least the interval TIV (i.e., after the second pulse is generated) if the LED tube lamp is not lighted up after the first pulse is generated. In this example, if the LED tube lamp is not lighted up after 100 ms, the LED tube lamp does not emit light in at least 100+TIV ms as well. It should be noted that such an expression “the LED tube lamp is powered up” refers to the fact that an external power source (such as the AC power line) is applied to the LED tube lamp, with a power loop of the LED tube lamp being electrically connected to a ground level so as to produce a voltage difference on the power loop. That the powered-up LED tube lamp is properly/correctly installed means the external power source is applied to the LED tube lamp and the LED tube lamp is electrically connected to the ground level through a ground line of the lamp fixture. And that the powered-up LED tube lamp is improperly/incorrectly installed refers to that the external power source is applied to the LED tube lamp and the LED tube lamp is electrically connected to the ground level not only through a ground line of the lamp fixture but also through a human body or other object of impedance, which means that in the state of being improperly/incorrectly installed an unexpected object or body of impedance happens to be serially connected on a current path in the power loop.

It should be noted that, the LED tube lamp being powered up refers to the external driving signal being applied to at least one pin of the LED tube lamp and causing a current flowing through the LED tube lamp, in which the current can be the driving current or the leakage current.

On the other hand, if both pulses occur when an external driving signal at the LED tube lamp has a near-zero current level, or a current level below a particular threshold, then the state of the latch circuit is not changed, and so the switch is only on during the two pulses, but then remains permanently off after the pulses and after the detection mode is over. For example, the latch circuit can be configured to remain in its present state if the current output from the switch is below the threshold value. In this manner, the LED tube lamp remains in a non-conducting state, which prevents electric shock, even though part of the LED tube lamp is connected to an electrical power source.

It is worth noting that according to certain embodiments, the pulse width of the pulse signal generated by the detection pulse generating module is between 1 μs to 1 ms, and it is used to make the switch circuit conducting for a short period when the LED tube lamp conducts instantaneously. In an exemplary embodiment, the pulse width of the pulse signal is between 10 μs to 1 ms. In another exemplary embodiment, the pulse width of the pulse signal is between 10 μs to 30 μs. In another exemplary embodiment, the pulse width of the pulse signal DP 1 /DP 2 is in a broader range between 200 μs and 400 μs. In another exemplary embodiment, the pulse width of the pulse signal DP 1 /DP 2 is within a range of between plus and minus 15% of 20 μs, 35 μs, or 45 μs. And in another exemplary embodiment, the pulse width of the pulse signal DP 1 /DP 2 is within a range of between plus and minus 15% of 300 μs.

According to some embodiments, the pulse or pulse signal means a momentary occurrence of abrupt variation of a signal of voltage or current in a continual period of the signal, that is, in a short period of time the signal suddenly abruptly varies and then quickly returns to an initial value before variation. Thus the pulse signal may be a signal of voltage or current that varies or transitions from a low level to a high level and after a short time at the high level returns to the low level, or that varies or transitions from a high level to a low level and then returns to the high level, while the invention is not limited to any of these options. Such an expression “momentary occurrence of signal variation” corresponds to a period of time not sufficient for the LED tube lamp as a unit to change its state of operation and during which period the momentary signal variation is unlikely to cause an electric shock hazard on a touching human body. For example, when using the pulse signal DP 1 /DP 2 to cause conduction of the switch circuit 3200 / 3200 a , the duration of the conduction of the switch circuit 3200 / 3200 a is so short as not to light up the LED module, and is so short as to cause an effective current on the power loop to not exceed a rated current upper limit (5 MIU). And the “abrupt variation of a signal” refers to an extent of variation of the pulse or pulse signal sufficient to cause an electrical element receiving it to respond thereto and then change the element's operation state. For example, when the switch circuit 3200 / 3200 a receives the pulse signal DP 1 /DP 2 , the switch circuit 3200 / 3200 a conducts or is cut off in response to switching of the signal level of the pulse signal DP 1 /DP 2 .

In some embodiments, a pulse current is generated to pass through the detection determining circuit for detecting and determining. Since the pulse is for a short time and not for a long time, the electric shock situation will not occur. Furthermore, the detection result latching circuit also keeps the detection result during the LED operating mode DRM (e.g., the LED operating mode DRM being the period after the detection mode DTM and during which part of the LED tube lamp is still connected to a power source), and no longer changes the detection result stored previously complying with the circuit state changing. A situation resulting from changing the detection result can thus be avoided. In some embodiments, the installation detection module, such as the switch circuit, the detection pulse generating module, the detection result latching circuit, and the detection determining circuit, could be integrated into a chip and then embedded in circuits for saving the circuit cost and layout space.

In addition, although the detection pulse generating module 3110 generates two pulse signals DP 1 and DP 2 for example, the detection pulse generating module 3110 of the present invention is not limited thereto. The detection pulse generating module 3110 is a circuit capable of generating a single pulse or plural pulses (greater than two pulses).

For an embodiment of the detection pulse generating module 3110 generating only one pulse or pulse signal, a simple circuit configuration using an RC circuit in combination with active electrical element(s) (having internal power source) can be used to implement the generation/issuance of only one pulse. For example, in some embodiments, the detection pulse generating module 3110 merely includes the capacitor C 11 , resistor R 11 and buffer BF 1 . Under such configuration, the detection pulse generating module can only generate a single pulse signal DP 1 .

Under an embodiment of the detection pulse generating module 3110 generating a plurality of pulse signals, in some embodiments, the detection pulse generating module 3110 further includes a reset circuit (not shown). The reset circuit may reset the operation state of the circuits in the detection pulse generating module 3110 after the first pulse signal DP 1 and/or the second pulse signal DP 2 being generated, so that the detection pulse generating module 3110 can generate the first pulse signal DP 1 and/or the second pulse signal DP 2 again after a while. The generating of the plurality of pulse signals at intervals of a fixed period TIV may be for example generating a pulse signal every 20 ms to 2 s (that is, 20 ms≤TIV≤2 s). In one embodiment, the fixed period TIV is between 500 ms and 2 s. In another embodiment, the fixed period TIV is in a range of between plus and minus 15% of 75 ms. In still another embodiment, the fixed period TIV is in a range of between plus and minus 15% of 45 ms. In still another embodiment, the fixed period TIV is in a range of between plus and minus 15% of 30 ms. And the generating of the plurality of pulse signals at intervals of a random period TIV may be for example performed by choosing a random value in a range of between 0.5 s and 2 s as the random period TIV between every two consecutive generated pulse signals.

In particular, the time and frequency for the detection pulse generating module 3110 to generate a pulse signal to perform installation detection may be set or adjusted taking account of effects of a detection current under a detection stage on a normal human body touching or exposed to the detection current. In general, as long as the magnitude and duration of the detection current which is flowing through the human body conform to limiting requirements of relevant standards, the detection current flowing through the human body will not cause the human body to feel or experience an electric shock hazard and will not endanger the safety of the human body. The magnitude and the duration of the detection current should be in inverse relation so as to conform to limiting requirements of relevant standards to avoid the electric shock hazard. For example, under the requirement that the detection current flowing through the human body does not endanger the safety of the human body, the greater the magnitude of the detection current, the shorter the duration of the detection current flowing through the human body should be; inversely, if the magnitude of the detection current is very small, a rather long duration of the detection current flowing through the human body still would or could not endanger the safety of the human body. Therefore, in fact whether the detection current flowing through the human body endangers the safety of the human body or not is based on or determined by the amount of electric charge per unit time, or electric power, from the detection current and applied to or received by the human body, but not merely determined by the amount of electric charge received by the human body.

In some embodiments, the detection pulse generating module 3110 is configured to generate pulses or pulse signals for performing installation detection, only during a specific detection period, and outside the period to stop generating a pulse signal for installation detection, in order to prevent the detection current from causing electric shock on the touching human body. FIG. 37D is a signal waveform diagram of the detection current according to some embodiments, wherein the horizontal axis is the time axis (denoted by t) and the vertical axis represents value of the detection current (denoted by I). Referring to FIG. 37D , within a detection stage, the detection pulse generating module 3110 generates pulse signals for performing installation detection, during a specific detection period, to cause conduction of a detection path or a power loop in the LED tube lamp, wherein details of how the pulse width of each pulse and the interval between two consecutive pulses are set are referred to other described relevant embodiments elsewhere herein. Since the detection path or power loop is being conducted, a detection current signal Iin on the detection path or power loop, whose value may be obtained by measuring an input current to the power supply module of the LED tube lamp, includes a current pulse Idp generated corresponding to the time that each of the pulse signals is generated, and a detection determining circuit 3130 judges whether the LED tube lamp is correctly/properly installed in a lamp socket by measuring the value of the current pulse Idp. After the detection period Tw shown in FIG. 37D , the detection pulse generating module 3110 stops generating a pulse signal for installation detection, to cause the detection path or the power loop to be in a cutoff state. Viewing the detection current signal Iin broadly along the time axis, the detection pulse generating module 3110 generates a group of current pulses DPg during the detection period Tw, and judges whether the LED tube lamp is correctly/properly installed in a lamp socket by performing installation detection using the group of current pulses DPg. For example, in the embodiment of FIG. 37D , the detection pulse generating module 3110 generates current pulses Idp only during the detection period Tw, wherein the detection period Tw may be set in a range of between 0.5 s and 2 s and including every two-digit decimal number between and including the 0.5 s and 2 s, such as 0.51, 0.52, 0.53, . . . 0.60, 0.61, 0.62, . . . , 1.97, 1.98, 1.99, and 2, all in seconds, but this present invention is not limited to this range embodiment. And it is noted that by appropriately choosing a detection period Tw, it can be achieved that performing installation detection using the group of current pulses DPg does not generate excessive electrical power by the detection current that will endanger the touching human body, so the electric shock protection can be achieved.

With respect to circuit design, the way of the detection pulse generating module 3110 generating detection current pulses Idp only during the detection period Tw can be implemented by various different circuit embodiments. For example, in one embodiment, a detection pulse generating module 3110 is implemented by a pulse generating circuit (as illustrated in FIG. 12B or FIG. 13B ) along with a timing circuit (not illustrated herein), wherein the timing circuit may be configured to, upon detecting a period, output a signal to cause the pulse generating circuit to stop generating the pulse(s). In another embodiment, a detection pulse generating module 3110 is implemented by a pulse generating module (as illustrated in FIG. 12B or FIG. 13B ) along with a shielding/isolation circuit (not illustrated herein), wherein the shielding/isolation circuit may be configured to, after a predefined time, shield or prevent the detection pulse(s) from being generated or output by the pulse generating circuit, by any of a number of ways such as pulling (the voltage of) the output terminal of the detection pulse generating module to ground. Under the configuration with a shielding/isolation circuit, the shielding/isolation circuit may be implemented by a simple circuit such as an RC circuit, without the need to modify an original circuit design of the pulse generating circuit.

In some embodiments, the detection pulse generating module 3110 is configured to generate pulses or pulse signals for performing installation detection, at intervals each of which intervals between two consecutive pulses is set greater than or equal to a safety value, in order to prevent the detection current from causing electric shock on the touching human body. FIG. 37E is a signal waveform diagram of the detection current according to some exemplary embodiment. Referring to FIG. 37E , within a detection stage, the detection pulse generating module 3110 generates pulses for performing installation detection, at intervals each of which intervals between two consecutive pulses is set at TIVs (the ‘s’ denoting second) greater than a specific safety value such as 1 second, to cause conduction of a detection path or a power loop in the LED tube lamp, wherein details of how the pulse width of each pulse is set are referred to other described relevant embodiments elsewhere herein. Since the detection path or power loop is being conducted, a detection current signal Iin on the detection path or power loop, whose value may be obtained by measuring an input current to the power supply module of the LED tube lamp, includes a current pulse Idp generated corresponding to the time that each of the pulse signals is generated, and a detection determining circuit 3130 judges whether the LED tube lamp is correctly/properly installed in a lamp socket by measuring the value of the current pulse Idp.

In some embodiments, the detection pulse generating module 3110 is configured to generate a group of pulses or pulse signals for performing installation detection, each group generated during a specific detection period Tw, periodically at intervals each of which intervals being greater than or equal to a specific safety value, in order to prevent the detection current from causing electric shock on the touching human body. FIG. 37F is a signal waveform diagram of the detection current according to a third embodiment. Referring to FIG. 37F , within a detection stage, the detection pulse generating module 3110 generates a group of pulse signals for performing installation detection, during a first detection period Tw, to cause conduction of a detection path or a power loop in the LED tube lamp, wherein details of how the pulse width of each pulse and the interval between two consecutive pulses are set are referred to other described relevant embodiments herein. Since the detection path or power loop is being conducted, a detection current signal Iin on the detection path or power loop includes a current pulse Idp generated corresponding to the time that each of the group of the pulse signals is generated, resulting in a first current pulse group DPg 1 of the generated current pulses Idp for or during the first detection period Tw. After the first detection period Tw, during a set period TIV such as a period greater than or equal to 1 second, the detection pulse generating module 3110 stops generating a pulse signal for installation detection, to cause the detection path or the power loop to be in a cutoff state; and then the detection pulse generating module 3110 continues to generate again a group of pulse signals for performing installation detection, only upon entering into the next or a second detection period Tw. Similar to the operations and the waveform of the detection current signal Iin during the first detection period Tw, a second current pulse group DPg 2 of generated current pulses Idp and a third current pulse group DPg 3 of generated current pulses Idp are produced on the detection current signal Iin during the second detection period Tw and the third detection period Tw, respectively. And in this process, a detection determining circuit 3130 judges whether the LED tube lamp is correctly/properly installed in a lamp socket by measuring the value(s) of each of the first current pulse group DPg 1 , the second current pulse group DPg 2 , the third current pulse group DPg 3 , etc.

It's noted that in practice the magnitude of current of the current pulse Idp is related to or depends on impedance (such as resistance) on the detection path or power loop. Therefore when designing a detection pulse generating module 2540 , the format of the output detection pulse may be designed according to the adopted choice and configuration of the detection path or power loop.

In some embodiments, the time point for generating the pulse signal DP 1 /DP 2 can be determined by sampling the external driving signal/AC supply signal and the pulse width of the pulse signal DP 1 /DP 2 is designed to be fixed. For example, the detection pulse generating module includes a sampling circuit and a pulse generating circuit. The sampling circuit outputs a pulse generating signal to the pulse generating circuit when the AC voltage of the external driving signal rises or falls to exceed a reference voltage, so that the pulse generating circuit outputs a pulse signal when receiving the pulse generating signal.

As discussed in the above examples, in some embodiments, an LED tube lamp includes an installation detection circuit comprising a pulse generating circuit configured to output two pulse signals, the first pulse signal DP 1 output at a first time and the second pulse signal DP 2 output at a second time after the first time, and a switch configured to receive an LED driving signal and to receive the two pulse signals, wherein the two pulse signals control turning on and off of the switch. The installation detection circuit may be configured to, during a detection mode DTM, detect during each of the two pulse signals whether the LED tube lamp is properly connected to a lamp socket. When it is not detected during either pulse signal that the LED tube lamp is properly connected to the lamp socket, the switch may remain in an off state after the detection mode DTM. When it is detected during at least one of the pulse signals that the LED tube lamp is properly connected to the lamp socket, the switch may remain in an on state after the detection mode DTM. The two pulse signals may occur such that they are separated by a time different from a multiple of half of a period of the LED driving signal, and such that at least one of them does not occur when the LED driving signal has a current value of substantially zero. It should be noted that although a circuit for producing two pulse signals is described, the disclosure is not intended to be limiting as such. For example, a circuit may be implemented such that a plurality of pulse signals may occur, wherein at least two of the plurality of pulse signals are separated by a time different from a multiple of half of a period of the LED driving signal, and such that at least one of the plurality of pulse signals does not occur when the LED driving signal has a current value of substantially zero.

Referring to FIG. 13A , an installation detection module according to an exemplary embodiment is illustrated. The installation detection module 3000 b includes a detection pulse generating module 3210 , a detection result latching circuit 3220 , a switch circuit 3200 b , and a detection determining circuit 3230 .

FIG. 37B is a signal waveform diagram of an exemplary power supply module according to an exemplary embodiment. The installation detection operation is described further in accordance with FIG. 37B . The detection pulse generating module 3210 is coupled (e.g., electrically connected) to the detection result latching circuit 3220 via a path 3211 , and is configured to generate a control signal Sc having at least one pulse signal DP. A path as described herein may include a conductive line connecting between two components, circuits, or modules, and may include opposite ends of the conductive line connected to the respective components, circuits or modules. The detection result latching circuit 3220 is coupled (e.g., electrically connected) to the switch circuit 3200 b via a path 3221 , and is configured to receive and output the control signal Sc from the detection pulse generating module 3210 . The switch circuit 3200 b is coupled (e.g., electrically connected) to one end (e.g., a first installation detection terminal TE 1 ) of a power loop of an LED tube lamp and the detection determining circuit 3230 , and is configured to receive the control signal Sc output from the detection result latching circuit 3220 , and configured to conduct (or turn on) during the control signal Sc so as to cause the power loop of the LED tube lamp to be conducting. The detection determining circuit 3230 is coupled (e.g., electrically connected) to the switch circuit 3200 b , the other end (e.g., a second installation detection terminal TE 2 ) of the power loop of the LED tube lamp and the detection result latching circuit 3220 , and is configured to detect at least one sample signal Ssp on the power loop when the switch circuit 3200 b and the power loop are conductive, so as to determine an installation state between the LED tube lamp and a lamp socket. The power loop of the present embodiment can be regarded as a detection path of the installation detection module. The detection determining circuit 3230 is further configured to transmit detection result(s) to the detection result latching circuit 3220 for next control. In some embodiments, the detection pulse generating module 3210 is further coupled (e.g., electrically connected) to the output of the detection result latching circuit 3220 to control the time of the pulse signal DP.

In some embodiments, one end of a first path 3201 is coupled to a first node of the detection determining circuit 3230 and the opposite end of the first path 3201 is coupled to a first node of the switch circuit 3200 b . In some embodiments, a second node of the detection determining circuit 3230 is coupled to the second installation detection terminal TE 2 of the power loop and a second node of the switch circuit 3200 b is coupled to the first installation detection terminal TE 1 of the power loop. In some embodiments, one end of a second path 3231 is coupled to a third node of the detection determining circuit 3230 and the opposite end of the second path 3231 is coupled to a first node of the detection result latching circuit 3220 , one end of a third path 3211 is coupled to a second node of the detection result latching circuit 3220 and the opposite end of the third path 3211 is coupled to a first node of the detection pulse generating circuit 3210 . In some embodiments, one end of a fourth path 3221 is coupled to a third node of the switch circuit 3200 b and the opposite end of the fourth path 3221 is coupled to a third node of the detection result latching circuit 3220 . In some embodiments, the fourth path 3221 is also coupled to a second node of the detection pulse generating circuit 3210 .

In some embodiments, the detection determining circuit 3230 is configured for detecting a signal between the first installation detection terminal TE 1 and the second installation detection terminal TE 2 through the first path 3201 and the switch circuit 3200 b . For example, because of the above configuration, the detection determining circuit 3230 is capable of detecting and determining whether a current passing through the first installation detection terminal TE 1 and the second installation detection terminal TE 2 is below or above a predetermined current value and transmitting or providing a detection result signal Sdr to the detection result latching circuit 3220 via the second path 3231 .

In some embodiments, the detection pulse generating circuit 3210 , also referred to generally as a pulse generating circuit, generates a pulse signal DP through the detection result latching circuit 3220 to make the switch circuit 3200 b remain in a conducting state during the pulse signal. For example, the pulse signal DP generated by the detection pulse generating circuit 3210 controls turning on the switch circuit 3200 b which is coupled to the detection pulse generating circuit 3210 . As a result of maintaining a conducting state of the switch circuit 3200 b , the power loop of the LED tube lamp between the installation detection terminals TE 1 and TE 2 is also maintained in a conducting state. The detection determining circuit 3230 detects a sample signal Ssp on the power loop and generates a signal based on a detection result to inform the detection result latching circuit 3220 of a time point for latching (storing) the detection result received by the detection result latching circuit 3220 from the detection determining circuit 3230 . For example, the detection determining circuit 3230 may be a circuit configured to generate a signal that causes a latching circuit, such as the detection result latching circuit 3220 to enter and remain in a state that corresponds to one of a conducting state (e.g., “on” state) and a cut-off state for the LED tube lamp. The detection result latching circuit 3220 stores the detection result according to the detection result signal Sdr (or detection result signal Sdr and pulse signal DP 1 /DP 2 ), and transmits or provides the detection result to the switch circuit 3200 b coupled to the third node of the detection result latching circuit 3220 via the fourth path 3221 . The switch circuit 320 b 0 receives the detection result transmitted from the detection result latching circuit 3220 via the third node of the switch circuit 3200 b and controls the state between conducting or cut off between the installation detection terminals TE 1 and TE 2 according to the detection result. For example, when the detection determining circuit 3230 detects during the pulse signal DP that the LED tube lamp is not properly installed in the lamp socket, the pulse signal DP controls the switch circuit 3200 b to remain in an off state to cause a power loop of the LED tube lamp to be open, and when the detection determining circuit 3230 detects during the pulse signal DP that the LED tube lamp is properly installed in the lamp socket, the pulse signal DP controls the switch circuit 3200 b to remain in a conducting state to cause the power loop of the LED tube lamp to maintain a conducting state.

In some embodiments, the installation detection module 3000 b further includes an emergency control module 3240 , whose configurations and operations are similar to those of the described emergency control module 3140 above and thus are not repeatedly described again here.

In some embodiments, the detection pulse generating module 3210 , detection determining circuit 3230 , detection result latching circuit 3220 , and the switching circuit 3200 b of the installation detection module 3000 b comprise or are implemented by, but are not limited to, circuit structures of FIGS. 13B-13E respectively, which FIGS. 13B-13E are circuit structure diagrams of respective circuits and module of an installation detection module 3000 b according to a second embodiment. Descriptions of the circuit embodiments of FIGS. 13B-13E are presented below.

Referring to FIG. 13B , a detection pulse generating module according to an exemplary embodiment is illustrated. The detection pulse generating module 3210 includes: a resistor R 21 (which also may be referred to as a sixth resistor), a capacitor C 21 (which also may be referred to as a fourth capacitor), a Schmitt trigger STRG, a resistor R 22 (which also may be referred to as a seventh resistor), a transistor M 21 (which also may be referred to as a second transistor), and a resistor R 23 (which also may be referred to as an eighth resistor).

In some embodiments, one end of the resistor R 21 is connected to a driving signal, for example, VCC, and the other end of the resistor R 21 is connected to one end of the capacitor C 21 . The other end of the capacitor C 21 is connected to a ground node. In some embodiments, the Schmitt trigger STRG has an input end and an output end, the input end connected to a connection node of the resistor R 21 and the capacitor C 21 , the output end connected to the detection result latching circuit 3220 via the third path 3211 ( FIG. 13A ). In some embodiments, one end of the resistor R 22 is connected to the connection node of the resistor R 21 and the capacitor C 21 and the other end of the resistor R 22 is connected to a collector of the transistor M 21 . An emitter of the transistor M 21 is connected to a ground node. In some embodiments, one end of the resistor R 23 is connected to a base of the transistor M 21 and the other end of the resistor R 23 is connected to the detection result latching circuit 3220 ( FIG. 13A ) and the switch circuit 3200 b ( FIG. 13A ) via the fourth path 3221 . In certain embodiments, the detection pulse generating module 3210 further includes: a Zener diode ZD 1 , having an anode and a cathode, the anode connected to the other end of the capacitor C 21 to the ground, the cathode connected to the end of the capacitor C 21 (the connection node of the resistor R 21 and the capacitor C 21 ). The detection pulse generating modules 3110 and 3210 in the embodiments of FIG. 12B and FIG. 13B are merely examples, and in practice specific operations of a detection pulse generating circuit may be performed based on configured functional modules in an embodiment of FIG. 21 , and thus will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 21 . Referring to FIG. 13C , a detection determining circuit according to an exemplary embodiment is illustrated. The detection determining circuit 3230 includes: a resistor R 24 (which also may be referred to as a ninth resistor), one end of the resistor R 24 connected to the emitter of the transistor M 22 ( FIG. 13E ), the other end of the resistor R 24 connected to the other end of the power loop, such as the second installation detection terminal TE 2 ; a diode D 21 (which also may be referred to as a second diode), having an anode and a cathode, the anode connected to an end of the resistor STRG that is not connected to a ground node; a comparator CP 21 (which also may be referred to as a second comparator), having a first input end, a second input end, and an output end; a comparator CP 22 (which also may be referred to as a third comparator), having a first input end, a second input end, and an output end; a resistor R 25 (which also may be referred to as a tenth resistor); a resistor R 26 (which also may be referred to as an eleventh resistor); and a capacitor C 22 (which also may be referred to as a fifth capacitor).

In some embodiments, the first input end of the comparator CP 21 is connected to a predefined signal, for example, a reference voltage, Vref=1.3V, but the reference voltage value is not limited thereto, the second input end of the comparator CP 21 is connected to the cathode of the diode D 21 , and the output end of the comparator CP 21 is connected to the clock input end of the D flip-flop DFF ( FIG. 13D ). In some embodiments, the first input end of the comparator CP 22 is connected to the cathode of the diode D 21 , the second input end of the comparator CP 22 is connected to another predefined signal, for example, a reference voltage, Vref=0.3V, but the reference voltage value is not limited thereto, and the output end of the comparator CP 22 is connected to the clock input end of the D flip-flop DFF ( FIG. 13D ). In some embodiments, one end of the resistor R 25 is connected to the driving signal mentioned above (e.g., VCC) and the other end of the resistor R 25 is connected to the second input end of the comparator CP 21 and one end of the resistor R 26 that is not connected to a ground node and the other end of the resistor R 26 is connected to the ground node. In some embodiments, the capacitor C 22 is connected to the resistor R 26 in parallel. In certain embodiments, the diode D 21 , the comparator CP 22 , the resistors R 25 and R 26 , and the capacitor C 22 may be omitted, and the second input end of the comparator CP 21 may be directly connected to the end of the resistor R 24 (e.g., the end of the resistor R 24 that is not connected to the ground node) when the diode D 21 is omitted. In certain embodiments, the resistor R 24 may include two resistors connected in parallel based on the consideration of power consumption having an equivalent resistance value ranging from about 0.1 ohm to about 5 ohm.

Referring to FIG. 13D , a detection result latching circuit according to an exemplary embodiment is illustrated. The detection result latching circuit 3220 includes: a D flip-flop DFF (which also may be referred to as a second D flip-flop), having a data input end D, a clock input end CLK, and an output end Q, the data input end D connected to the driving signal mentioned above (e.g., VCC), the clock input end CLK connected to the detection determining circuit 3230 ( FIG. 13C ); and an OR gate OG (which also may be referred to as a third OR gate), having a first input end, a second input end, and an output end, the first input end connected to the output end of the Schmitt trigger STRG ( FIG. 13B ), the second input end connected to the output end Q of the D flip-flop DFF, the output end of the OR gate OG connected to the other end of the resistor R 23 ( FIG. 13B ) and the switch circuit 3200 b ( FIG. 13A ).

Referring to FIG. 13E , a switch circuit according to an exemplary embodiment is illustrated. The switch circuit 3200 b includes: a transistor M 22 (which also may be referred to as a third transistor), having a base, a collector, and an emitter, the base connected to the output of the OR gate OG via the fourth path 3221 ( FIG. 13D ), the collector connected to one end of the power loop, such as the first installation detection terminal TE 1 , the emitter connected to the detection determining circuit 3230 ( FIG. 13A ). In some embodiments, the transistor M 22 may be replaced by other equivalently electronic parts, e.g., a MOSFET.

In some embodiments, some parts of the installation detection module may be integrated into an integrated circuit (IC) in order to provide reduced circuit layout space resulting in reduced manufacturing cost of the circuit. For example, the Schmitt trigger STRG of the detection pulse generating module 3210 , the detection result latching circuit 3220 , and the two comparators CP 21 and CP 22 of the detection determining circuit 3230 may be integrated into an IC, but the disclosure is not limited thereto.

An operation of the installation detection module will be described in more detail according to some example embodiments. In one exemplary embodiment, the capacitor voltage may not mutate; the voltage of the capacitor in the power loop of the LED tube lamp before the power loop is conductive is zero and the capacitor's transient response may appear to have a short-circuit condition; when the LED tube lamp is correctly installed to the lamp socket, the power loop of the LED tube lamp in a transient response may have a smaller current-limiting resistance and a bigger peak current; and when the LED tube lamp is incorrectly installed to the lamp socket, the power loop of the LED tube lamp in transient response may have a bigger current-limiting resistance and a smaller peak current. This embodiment may also meet the UL standard to make the leakage current of the LED tube lamp less than 5 MIU (Measurement Indication Unit), in which the unit “MIU” is defined by. The following table illustrates the current comparison in a case when the LED tube lamp works normally (e.g., when the two end caps of the LED tube lamp are correctly installed to the lamp socket) and in a case when the LED tube lamp is incorrectly installed to the lamp socket (e.g., when one end cap of the LED tube lamp is installed to the lamp socket but the other one is touched by a human body).

As illustrated in the above table, in the part of the denominator: R fuse represents the resistance of the fuse of the LED tube lamp. For example, 10 ohm may be used, but the disclosure is not limited thereto, as resistance value for R fuse in calculating the minimum transient current i pk_min and 510 ohm may be used as resistance value for R fuse in calculating the maximum transient current i pk_max (an additional 500 ohms is used to emulate the conductive resistance of human body in transient response). In the part of the numerator: maximum voltage from the root-mean-square voltage (Vmax=Vrms*1.414=305*1.414) is used in calculating the maximum transient current i pk_max and minimum voltage difference, for example, 50V (but the disclosure is not limited thereto) is used in calculating the minimum transient current i pk_min . Accordingly, when the LED tube lamp is correctly installed to the lamp socket (e.g., when two end caps of the LED tube lamp are installed to the lamp socket correctly) and works normally, its minimum transient current is 5 A. But, when the LED tube lamp is incorrectly installed to the lamp socket (e.g., when one end cap is installed to the lamp socket but the other one is touched by human body), its maximum transient current is only 845 mA. Therefore, certain examples of the disclosed embodiments use the current which passes transient response and flows through the capacitor in the LED power loop, such as the capacitor of the filtering circuit, to detect and determine the installation state between the LED tube lamp and the lamp socket. For example, such embodiments may detect whether the LED tube lamp is correctly installed to the lamp socket. Certain examples of the disclosed embodiments further provide a protection mechanism to protect the user from electric shock caused by touching the conductive part of the LED tube lamp which is incorrectly installed to the lamp socket. The embodiments mentioned above are used to illustrate certain aspects of the disclosed invention but the disclosure is not limited thereto.

Further, referring to FIG. 13A again, in some embodiments, when an LED tube lamp is being installed to a lamp socket, after a period (e.g., the period utilized to determine the cycle of a pulse signal), the detection pulse generating module 3210 outputs a first high level voltage rising from a first low level voltage to the detection result latching circuit 3220 through a path 3211 (also referred to as a third path). The detection result latching circuit 3220 receives the first high level voltage, and then simultaneously outputs a second high level voltage to the switch circuit 3200 b and the detection pulse generating module 3210 through a path 3221 (also referred to as a fourth path). In some embodiments, when the switch circuit 3200 b receives the second high level voltage, the switch circuit 3200 b conducts to cause the power loop of the LED tube lamp to be conducting as well. In this exemplary embodiment, the power loop at least includes the first installation detection terminal TE 1 , the switch circuit 3200 b , the path 3201 (also referred to as a first path), the detection determining circuit 3230 , and the second installation detection terminal TE 2 . In the meantime, the detection pulse generating module 3210 receives the second high level voltage from the detection result latching circuit 3220 , and after a period (e.g., the period utilized to determine the width (or period) of pulse signal), its output from the first high level voltage falls back to the first low level voltage (the first time of the first low level voltage, the first high level voltage, and the second time of the first low level voltage form a first pulse signal DP 1 ). In some embodiments, when the power loop of the LED tube lamp is conductive, the detection determining circuit 3230 detects a first sample signal, such as a voltage signal, on the power loop. When the first sample signal is greater than or equal to a predefined signal, such as a reference voltage, the installation detection module determines that the LED tube lamp is correctly installed to the lamp socket according to the application principle of this disclosed embodiments described above. Therefore, the detection determining circuit 3230 included in the installation detection module outputs a third high level voltage (also referred to as a first high level signal) to the detection result latching circuit 3220 through a path 3231 (also referred to as a second path). The detection result latching circuit 3220 receives the third high level voltage (also referred to as the first high level signal) and continues to output a second high level voltage (also referred to as a second high level signal) to the switch circuit 3200 b . The switch circuit 3200 b receives the second high level voltage (also referred to as the second high level signal) and maintains conducting state to cause the power loop to remain conducting. The detection pulse generating module 3210 does not generate any pulse signal while the power loop remains conductive.

However, in some embodiments, when the first sample signal is smaller than the predefined signal, the installation detection module, according to certain exemplary embodiments as described above, determines that the LED tube lamp has not been correctly installed to the lamp socket. Therefore, the detection determining circuit 3230 outputs a third low level voltage (also referred to as a first low level signal) to the detection result latching circuit 3220 . The detection result latching circuit 3220 receives the third low level voltage (also referred to as the first low level signal) and continues to output a second low level voltage (also referred to as a second low level signal) to the switch circuit 3200 b . The switch circuit 3200 b receives the second low level voltage (also referred to as the second low level signal) and then keeps blocking to cause the power loop to remain open. Accordingly, the occurrence of electric shock caused by touching the conductive part of the LED tube lamp which is incorrectly installed in the lamp socket can be sufficiently avoided.

In some embodiments, when the power loop of the LED tube lamp remains open for a period (a period that represents the width (or period) of pulse signal DP or the pulse-on period of the control signal Sc), the detection pulse generating module 3210 outputs the first high level voltage rising from the first low level voltage to the detection result latching circuit 3220 through the path 3211 once more. The detection result latching circuit 3220 receives the first high level voltage, and then simultaneously outputs a second high level voltage to the switch circuit 3200 b and the detection pulse generating module 3210 . In some embodiments, when the switch circuit 3200 b receives the second high level voltage, the switch circuit 3200 b conducts again to cause the power loop of the LED tube lamp (in this exemplary embodiment, the power loop at least includes the first installation detection terminal TE 1 , the switch circuit 3200 b , the path 3201 , the detection determining circuit 3230 , and the second installation detection terminal TE 2 ) to be conducting as well. In the meantime, the detection pulse generating module 3210 receives the second high level voltage from the detection result latching circuit 3220 , and after a period (a period that is utilized to determine the width (or period) of pulse signal DP), its output from the first high level voltage falls back to the first low level voltage (the third time of the first low level voltage, the second time of the first high level voltage, and the fourth time of the first low level voltage form a second pulse signal DP 2 ). In some embodiments, when the power loop of the LED tube lamp is conductive again, the detection determining circuit 3230 also detects a second sample signal SP 2 , such as a voltage signal, on the power loop yet again. When the second sample signal SP 2 is greater than or equal to the predefined signal (e.g., the reference voltage Vref), the installation detection module determines, according to certain exemplary embodiments described above, that the LED tube lamp is correctly installed to the lamp socket. Therefore, the detection determining circuit 3230 outputs a third high level voltage (also referred to as a first high level signal) to the detection result latching circuit 3220 through the path 3231 . The detection result latching circuit 3220 receives the third high level voltage (also referred to as the first high level signal) and continues to output a second high level voltage (also referred to as a second high level signal) to the switch circuit 3200 b . The switch circuit 3200 b receives the second high level voltage (also referred to as the second high level signal) and maintains a conducting state to cause the power loop to remain conducting. The detection pulse generating module 3210 does not generate any pulse signal while the power loop remains conductive.

In some embodiments, when the second sample signal SP 2 is smaller than the predefined signal, the installation detection module determines, according to certain exemplary embodiments described above, that the LED tube lamp has not been correctly installed to the lamp socket. Therefore, the detection determining circuit 3230 outputs the third low level voltage (also referred to as the first low level signal) to the detection result latching circuit 3220 . The detection result latching circuit 3220 receives the third low level voltage (also referred to as the first low level signal) and continues to output the second low level voltage (also referred to as the second low level signal) to the switch circuit 3200 b . The switch circuit 3200 b receives the second low level voltage (also referred to as the second low level signal) and then keeps blocking to cause the power loop to remain open. According to the disclosure mentioned above, the pulse width (i.e., pulse on-time) and the pulse period are dominated by the pulse signal provided by the detection pulse generating module 3210 during the detection mode DTM; and the signal level of the control signal is determined according to the detection result signal Sdr provided by the detection determining circuit 3230 after the detection mode DTM.

According to the embodiments of FIG. 37B , since the signal level of the first sample signal SP 1 generated based on the first pulse signal DP 1 and the second sample signal SP 2 generated based on the second pulse signal DP 2 are smaller than the reference voltage Vref, the switch circuit 3200 b is maintained to be cut off and the driving circuit (not shown) does not perform effective power conversion during the timepoint is to td (i.e., the detection mode DTM). The effective power conversion refers to generating sufficient power for driving the LED module to emit light. The detection determining circuit 3230 generates a detection result, indicating the LED tube lamp has been correctly installed or is not touched by a user, according to the third sample signal SP 3 greater than the reference voltage Vref during the pulse-on period of the third pulse signal DP 3 , so that the switch circuit 3200 b is maintained in the conducting state in response to the high level voltage output by the detection result latching circuit 3220 and the power loop is therefore maintained in the conducting state as well. After the power loop is conducting, the driving circuit of the power supply module starts to operate based on the voltage on the power loop, so as to generate the lighting control signal Slc for controlling the conducting state of the power switch (not shown).

Next, referring to FIG. 13B to FIG. 13E at the same time, in some embodiments when an LED tube lamp is being installed to a lamp socket, the capacitor C 21 is charged by the driving signal VCC, for example, Vcc, through the resistor R 21 . And when the voltage of the capacitor C 21 rises enough to trigger the Schmitt trigger STRG, the Schmitt trigger STRG outputs a first high level voltage rising from a first low level voltage in an initial state to an input end of the OR gate OG. After the OR gate OG receives the first high level voltage from the Schmitt trigger STRG, the OR gate OG outputs a second high level voltage to the base of the transistor M 22 and the resistor R 23 . When the base of the transistor M 22 receives the second high level voltage from the OR gate OG, the collector and the emitter of the transistor M 22 are conducting to further cause the power loop of the LED tube lamp (in this exemplary embodiment, the power loop at least includes the first installation detection terminal TE 1 , the transistor M 22 , the resistor STRG, and the second installation detection terminal TE 2 ) to be conducting as well. In the meantime, the base of the transistor M 21 receives the second high level voltage from the OR gate OG through the resistor R 23 , and then the collector and the emitter of the transistor M 21 are conductive and grounded to cause the voltage of the capacitor C 21 to be discharged to the ground through the resistor R 22 . In some embodiments, when the voltage of the capacitor C 21 is not enough to trigger the Schmitt trigger STRG, the Schmitt trigger STRG outputs the first low level voltage falling from the first high level voltage (a first instance of a first low level voltage at a first time, followed by a first high level voltage, followed by a second instance of the first low level voltage at a second time form a first pulse signal DP 1 ). When the power loop of the LED tube lamp is conductive, the current passing through the capacitor in the power loop, such as, the capacitor of the filtering circuit, by transient response flows through the transistor M 22 and the resistor R 24 and forms a voltage signal on the resistor R 24 . The voltage signal is compared to a reference voltage, for example, 1.3V, but the reference voltage is not limited thereto, by the comparator CP 21 . When the voltage signal is greater than and/or equal to the reference voltage, the comparator CP 21 outputs a third high level voltage to the clock input end CLK of the D flip-flop DFF. In the meantime, since the data input end D of the D flip-flop DFF is connected to the driving signal VCC, the D flip-flop DFF outputs a high level voltage (at its output end Q) to another input end of the OR gate OG. This causes the OR gate OG to keep outputting the second high level voltage to the base of the transistor M 22 , and further results in the transistor M 22 and the power loop of the LED tube lamp remaining in a conducting state. Besides, since the OR gate OG keeps outputting the second high level voltage to cause the transistor M 21 to be conducting to the ground, the capacitor C 21 is unable to reach an enough voltage to trigger the Schmitt trigger STRG.

However, when the voltage signal on the resistor R 24 is smaller than the reference voltage, the comparator CP 21 outputs a third low level voltage to the clock input end CLK of the D flip-flop DFF. In the meantime, since the initial output of the D flip-flop DFF is a low level voltage (e.g., zero voltage), the D flip-flop DFF outputs a low level voltage (at its output end Q) to the other input end of the OR gate OG. Moreover, the Schmitt trigger STRG connected by the input end of the OR gate OG also restores outputting the first low level voltage, the OR gate OG thus keeps outputting the second low level voltage to the base of the transistor M 22 , and further results in the transistor M 22 to remain in a blocking state (or an off state) and the power loop of the LED tube lamp to remain in an open state. Still, since the OR gate OG keeps outputting the second low level voltage to cause the transistor 2764 to remain in a blocking state (or an off state), the capacitor C 21 is charged by the driving voltage VCC through the resistor R 21 once again for next (pulse signal) detection.

In some embodiments, the cycle (or interval TIV) of the pulse signal is determined by the values of the resistor R 21 and the capacitor C 21 . In certain cases, the cycle of the pulse signal may include a value ranging from about 3 milliseconds to about 500 milliseconds or may be ranging from about 20 milliseconds to about 50 milliseconds. In some cases, the cycle of the pulse signal may include a value ranging from about 500 milliseconds to about 2000 milliseconds. In some embodiments, the width (or period) of the pulse signal is determined by the values of the resistor R 22 and the capacitor C 21 . In certain cases, the width of the pulse signal may include a value ranging from about 1 microsecond to about 100 microseconds or may be ranging from about 10 microseconds to about 20 microseconds. In the embodiments of FIG. 13B and FIG. 13C , descriptions of mechanisms for generating pulse signal(s) and of corresponding states of applied detection current are according to certain embodiments can be seen referring to those of the embodiments of FIGS. 37D-37F , and thus are not presented here again.

The Zener diode ZD 1 provides a protection function but it may be omitted in certain cases. The resistor STRG may include two resistors connected in parallel based on the consideration of power consumption in certain cases, and its equivalent resistance may include a value ranging from about 0.1 ohm to about 5 ohm. The resistors R 25 and R 26 provides the function of voltage division to make the input of the comparator CP 22 bigger than the reference voltage, such as 0.3V, but the value of the reference voltage is not limited thereto. The capacitor C 22 provides the functions of regulation and filtering. The diode D 21 limits the signal to be transmitted in one way. In addition, the installation detection module disclosed by the example embodiments may also be adapted to other types of LED lighting equipment with dual-end power supply, e.g., the LED lamp directly using commercial power as its external driving signal. However, the invention is not limited to the above example embodiments.

Based on the embodiments illustrated in FIG. 13A to FIG. 13E , compared to the installation detection module of FIG. 12A , the installation detection module illustrated in FIG. 13A uses the control signal output by the detection result latching circuit 3220 for the reference of determining the end of the pulse or resetting the pulse signal by feeding back the control signal to the detection pulse generating module 3210 . Since the pulse on-time is not merely determined by the detection pulse generating module 3210 , the circuit design of the detection pulse generating module can be simplified. Compared to the detection pulse generating module illustrated in FIG. 12B , the number of the components of the detection pulse generating module illustrated in FIG. 13B is less than the detection pulse generating module 3110 , and thus the detection pulse generating module 3210 may have lower power consumption and may be more suitable for integrated design.

Referring to FIG. 14A , a block diagram of an installation detection module according to an exemplary embodiment is illustrated. The installation detection module 3000 c includes a pulse generating auxiliary circuit 3310 , an integrated control module 3320 , a switch circuit 3200 c , and a detection determining auxiliary circuit 3330 . The operation of the installation detection module of the present embodiment is similar to the embodiment of FIGS. 13A to 13C , and thus the signal waveform of the present embodiment can refer to the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 37B . The integrated control module 3320 includes at least three pins such as two input terminals IN 1 and IN 2 and an output terminal OT. The pulse generating auxiliary circuit 3310 is connected to the input terminal IN 1 and the output terminal OT of the integrated control module 3320 and configured to assist the integrated control module 3320 for generating a control signal. The detection determining auxiliary circuit 3330 is connected to the input terminal IN 2 of the integrated control module 3320 and the switch circuit 3200 c and configured to transmit a sample signal related to the signal passing through the LED power loop to the input terminal IN 2 of the integrated control module 3320 when the switch circuit 3200 c and the LED power loop are conducting, such that the integrated control module 3320 may determine an installation state between the LED tube lamp and the lamp socket according to the sample signal. For example, the sample signal may be based on an electrical signal passing through the power loop during the pulse-on period of the pulse signal (e.g., the rising portion of the pulse signal). Switch circuit 3200 c is connected between one end of the LED power loop and the detection determining auxiliary circuit 3330 and configured to receive the control signal, outputted by the integrated control module 3320 , in which the LED power loop is conducting during an enable period of the control signal (i.e., the pulse-on period).

Specifically, under the detection mode DTM, the integrated control module 3320 temporarily causes the switch circuit 3200 c to conduct, according to the signal received from the input terminal IN 1 , by outputting the control signal having at least one pulse. During the detection mode DTM, the integrated control module 3320 may detect whether the LED tube lamp is properly connected to the lamp socket and latch the detection result according to the signal on the input terminal IN 2 . The detection result is regarded as the basis of whether to cause the switch circuit 3200 c to conduct after the detection mode DTM (i.e., it determines whether to provide power to LED module). The detail circuit structure and operations of the present embodiment will be described below.

Referring to FIG. 14B , an inner circuit diagram of an integrated control module according to some exemplary embodiments is illustrated. The integrated control module 3320 includes a pulse generating unit 3322 , a detection result latching unit 3323 , and a detection unit 3324 . The pulse generating unit 3322 receives the signal provided by the pulse generating auxiliary circuit 3310 from the input terminal IN 1 and accordingly generates a pulse signal. The generated pulse signal will be provided to the detection result latching unit 3323 . In an exemplary embodiment, the pulse generating unit 3322 can be implemented by a Schmitt trigger (not shown, it can use a Schmitt trigger such as STRG illustrated in FIG. 13B ). According to the exemplary embodiment mentioned above, the Schmitt trigger has an input end coupled to the input terminal IN 1 of the integrated control module 3320 and an output terminal coupled to the output terminal OT of the integrated control module 3320 (e.g., through the detection result latching unit 3323 ). It should be noted that, the pulse generating unit 3322 is not limited to be implemented by the Schmitt trigger, any analog/digital circuit capable of implementing the function of generating the pulse signal having at least one pulse may be utilized in some disclosed embodiments.

The detection result latching unit 3323 is connected to the pulse generating unit 3322 and the detection unit 3324 . During the detection mode DTM, the detection result latching unit 3323 outputs the pulse signal generated by the pulse generating unit 3322 as the control signal to the output terminal OT. On the other hand, the detection result latching unit 3323 further stores the detection result signal Sdr provided by the detection unit 3324 and outputs the stored detection result signal Sdr to the output terminal OT after the detection mode DTM, so as to determine whether to cause the switch circuit 3200 c to conduct according to the installation state of the LED tube lamp. In an exemplary embodiment, the detection latching unit 3323 can be implemented by a circuit structure constituted by a D flip-flop and an OR gate (not shown, for example it can use the D flip-flop DFF and OR gate OG illustrated in FIG. 13D ). According to the exemplary embodiment mentioned above, the D flip-flop has a data input end connected to the driving voltage VCC, a clock input end connected to the detection unit 3324 , and an output end. The OR gate has a first input end connected to the pulse generating unit 3322 , a second input end connected to the output end of the D flip-flop, and an output end connected to the output terminal OT. It should be noted that, the detection result latching unit 3323 is not limited to be implemented by the aforementioned circuit structure, any analog/digital circuit capable of implementing the function of latching and outputting the control signal to control the switching of the switch circuit may be utilized in the present invention.

The detection unit 3324 is coupled to the detection result latching unit 3323 . The detection unit 3324 receives the signal provided by the detection determining auxiliary circuit 3330 from the input terminal IN 2 and accordingly generates the detection result signal Sdr indicating the installation state of the LED tube lamp, in which the generated detection result signal Sdr will be provided to the detection result latching unit 3323 . In an exemplary embodiment, detection unit 3324 can be implemented by a comparator (not shown, it can be, for example, the comparator CP 21 illustrated in FIG. 13C ). According to the exemplary embodiment mentioned above, the comparator has a first input end receiving a setting signal, a second input end connected to the input terminal IN 2 , and an output end connected to the detection result latching unit 3323 . It should be noted that, the detection unit 3324 is not limited to be implemented by the comparator, any analog/digital circuit capable of implementing the function of determining the installation state based on the signal on the input terminal IN 2 may be utilized in some disclosed embodiments.

Referring to FIG. 14C , a circuit diagram of a pulse generating auxiliary circuit according to some exemplary embodiments is illustrated. The pulse generating auxiliary circuit 3310 includes resistors R 31 , R 32 , and R 33 , a capacitor C 31 , and a transistor M 31 . The resistor R 31 has an end connected to a driving voltage (e.g., VCC). The capacitor C 31 has an end connected to another end of the resistor R 31 , and another end connected to ground. The resistor R 32 has an end connected to the connection node of the resistor R 31 and the capacitor C 31 . The transistor M 31 has a base, a collector connected to another end of the resistor R 32 , and an emitter connected to the ground. The resistor R 33 has an end connected to the base of the transistor M 31 , and another end connected to the output terminal OT of the integrated control module 3320 and the control terminal of the switch circuit 3200 c via the path 3311 . The pulse generating auxiliary circuit 3310 further includes a Zener diode ZD 1 . The Zener diode ZD 1 has an anode connected to another end of the capacitor C 31 and the ground and a cathode connected to the end connecting the capacitor C 31 and the resistor R 31 .

Referring to FIG. 14D , a circuit diagram of a detection determining auxiliary circuit according to some exemplary embodiments is illustrated. The detection determining auxiliary circuit 3330 includes resistors R 34 , R 35 and R 36 , a capacitor C 32 and diode D 31 . The resistor R 34 has an end connected to the switch circuit 3200 c , and another end connected to another end of the LED power loop (e.g., the second installation detection terminal TE 2 ). The resistor R 35 has an end connected to the driving voltage (e.g., VCC). The resistor R 36 has an end connected to another end of the resistor R 35 and the input terminal IN 2 of the integrated control module 3320 via the path 3331 , and another end connected to the ground. The capacitor C 32 is connected to the resistor R 36 in parallel. The diode D 31 has an anode connected to the end of the resistor R 34 and a cathode connected to the connection node of the resistors R 35 and R 36 . In one exemplary embodiment, the resistors R 35 and R 36 , the capacitor C 32 , and the diode D 31 can be omitted. When the diode D 31 is omitted, one end of the resistor R 34 is directly connected to the input terminal IN 2 of the integrated control module 3320 via the path 3331 . In another one exemplary embodiment, the resistor R 34 can be implemented by two paralleled resistors based on the power consideration, in which the equivalent resistance of each resistors can be 0.1 ohm to 5 ohm.

Referring to FIG. 14E , a circuit diagram of a switch circuit according to some exemplary embodiments is illustrated. The switch circuit 3200 c includes a transistor M 32 . The transistor M 32 has a base connected to the output terminal OT of the integrated control module 3320 via the path 3321 , a collector connected to one end of the LED power loop (e.g., the first installation detection terminal TE 1 ), and an emitter connected to the detection determining auxiliary circuit. In some embodiments, the transistor M 32 may be replaced by other equivalently electronic parts, e.g., a MOSFET.

It should be noted that, the installation detection module of the present embodiment utilizes the same installation detection principle as the aforementioned embodiment. For example, the capacitor voltage may not mutate; the voltage of the capacitor in the power loop of the LED tube lamp before the power loop being conductive is zero and the capacitor's transient response may appear to have a short-circuit condition; when the LED tube lamp is correctly installed to the lamp socket, the power loop of the LED tube lamp in transient response may have a smaller current-limiting resistance and a bigger peak current; and when the LED tube lamp is incorrectly installed to the lamp socket, the power loop of the LED tube lamp in transient response may have a bigger current-limiting resistance and a smaller peak current. This embodiment may also meet the UL standard to make the leakage current of the LED tube lamp less than 5 MIU. For example, the present embodiment may determine whether the LED tube lamp is correctly/properly connected to the lamp socket by detecting the transient response of the peak current. Therefore, the detail operation of the transient current under the correct installation state and the incorrect installation state may be seen by referring to the aforementioned embodiment, and it will not be repeated herein. The following disclosure will focus on describing the entire circuit operation of the installation detection module illustrated in FIGS. 14A to 14E .

Referring to FIG. 14A again, when an LED tube lamp is being installed to a lamp socket, the driving voltage may be provided to modules/circuits within the installation detection module 3000 c when power is provided to at least one end cap of the LED tube lamp. The pulse generating auxiliary circuit 3310 starts charging in response to the driving voltage. The output voltage (referred to “first output voltage” hereinafter) of the pulse generating auxiliary circuit 3310 rises from a first low level voltage to a voltage level greater than a forward threshold voltage after a period (e.g., the period utilized to determine the cycle of a pulse signal), in which the first output voltage may output to the input terminal of the integrated control module 3320 via the path 3311 . After receiving the first output voltage from the input terminal IN 1 , the integrated control module 3320 outputs an enabled control signal (e.g., a high level voltage) to the switch circuit 3200 c and the pulse generating auxiliary circuit 3310 . When the switch circuit 3200 c receives the enabled control signal, the switch circuit 3200 c is turned on so that a power loop of the LED tube lamp is conducted as well. Herein, at least the first installation detection terminal TE 1 , the switch circuit 3200 c , the path 3201 , the detection determining auxiliary circuit 3330 and the second installation detection terminal TE 2 are included in the power loop. In the meantime, the pulse generating auxiliary circuit 3310 conducts a discharge path for discharging in response to the enabled control signal. The first output voltage falls down to the first low level voltage from the voltage greater than the forward threshold voltage. When the first output voltage is less than a reverse threshold voltage (which can be defined based on the circuit design), the integrated control module 3320 pulls the enabled control signal down to a disable level in response to the first output voltage (i.e., the integrated control module 3320 outputs a disabled control signal, in which the disabled control signal is, for example, a low level voltage), and thus the control signal has a pulse-type signal waveform (i.e., the first time of the first low level voltage, the first high level voltage, and the second time of the first low level voltage form a first pulse signal DP 1 ). When the power loop is conducting, the detection determining auxiliary circuit 3330 detects a first sample signal (e.g., voltage signal) on the power loop and provides the first sample signal to the integrated control module 3320 via the input terminal IN 2 . When the integrated control module 3320 determines the first sample signal is greater than or equal to a setting signal (e.g., a reference voltage), which may represent the LED tube lamp has been properly installed in the lamp socket, the integrated control module 3320 outputs and keeps the enabled control signal to the switch circuit 3200 c . Since receiving the enabled control signal, the switch circuit 3200 c remains in the conductive state so that the power loop of the LED tube lamp is kept on the conductive state as well. During the period when the switch circuit 3200 c receives the enabled control signal, the integrated control module 3320 does not output the pulses anymore.

On the contrary, when the integrated control module 3320 determines the first sample signal is less than the setting signal, which may represent the LED tube lamp has not been properly installed in the lamp socket yet, the integrated control module 3320 outputs and keeps the disabled control signal to the switch circuit 3200 c . As a result of receiving the disabled control signal, the switch circuit 3200 c remains in the non-conducting state so that the power loop of the LED tube lamp is kept on the non-conducting state as well.

Since the discharge path of the pulse generating auxiliary circuit 3310 is cut off, the pulse generating auxiliary circuit 3310 starts to charge again. Therefore, after the power loop of the LED tube lamp remains in a non-conducting state for a period (i.e., pulse on-time), the first output voltage of the pulse generating auxiliary circuit 3310 rises from the first low level voltage to the voltage greater than the forward threshold voltage again, in which the first output voltage may output to the input terminal of the integrated control module 3320 via the path 3311 . After receiving the first output voltage from the input terminal IN 1 , the integrated control module 3320 pulls up the control signal from the disable level to an enable level (i.e., the integrated control module 3320 outputs the enabled control signal) and provides the enabled control signal to the switch circuit 3200 c and the pulse generating auxiliary circuit 3310 . When the switch circuit 3200 c receives the enabled control signal, the switch circuit 3200 c is turned on so that the power loop of the LED tube lamp is conducted as well. Herein, at least the first installation detection terminal TE 1 , the switch circuit 3200 c , the path 3201 , the detection determining auxiliary circuit 3330 and the second installation detection terminal TE 2 are included in the power loop. In the meantime, the pulse generating auxiliary circuit 3310 conducts, in response to the enabled control signal, a discharge path again for discharging. The first output voltage gradually falls down to the first low level voltage from the voltage greater than the forward threshold voltage again. When the first output voltage is less than a reverse threshold voltage (which can be defined based on the circuit design), the integrated control module 3320 pulls the enabled control signal down to a disable level in response to the first output voltage (i.e., the integrated control module 3320 outputs a disabled control signal, in which the disabled control signal is, for example, a low level voltage), and thus the control signal has a pulse-type signal waveform (i.e., the third time of the first low level voltage, the second time of the high level voltage, and the fourth time of the first low level voltage form a second pulse signal DP 2 ). When the power loop is conducted again, the detection determining auxiliary circuit 3330 detects a second sample signal (e.g., voltage signal) on the power loop and provides the second sample signal to the integrated control module 3320 via the input terminal IN 2 . When the integrated control module 3320 determines the second sample signal is greater than or equal to a setting signal (e.g., a reference voltage), which may represent the LED tube lamp has been properly installed in the lamp socket, the integrated control module 3320 outputs and keeps the enabled control signal to the switch circuit 3200 c . Since receiving the enabled control signal, the switch circuit 3200 c remains in the conductive state so that the power loop of the LED tube lamp is kept on the conductive state as well. During the period when the switch circuit 3200 c receives the enabled control signal, the integrated control module 3320 does not output the pulses anymore.

When the integrated control module 3320 determines the second sample signal is less than the setting signal, which may represent the LED tube lamp has not been properly installed in the lamp socket yet, the integrated control module 3320 outputs and keeps the disabled control signal to the switch circuit 3200 c . Since receiving the disabled control signal, the switch circuit 3200 c remains in the non-conducting state so that the power loop of the LED tube lamp is kept on the non-conducting state as well. Based on the above operation, when the LED tube lamp has not been properly installed in the lamp socket, the problem in which users may get electric shock caused by touching the conductive part of the LED tube lamp can be prevented.

Operation of circuits/modules within the installation detection module is further described below. Referring to FIGS. 14B to 14E , when the LED tube lamp is installed in the lamp socket, the capacitor C 31 is charged by a driving voltage VCC via resistor R 31 . When the voltage of the capacitor C 31 is raised to trigger the pulse generating unit 3322 (i.e., the voltage of the capacitor C 31 is raised greater than the forward threshold voltage), the output of the pulse generating unit 3322 changes to a first high level voltage from an initial first low level voltage and provides to the detection result latching unit 3323 . After receiving the first high level voltage outputted by the pulse generating unit 3322 , the detection result latching unit 3323 outputs a second high level voltage to the base of the transistor M 32 and the resistor R 33 via the output terminal OT. After the second high level voltage outputted from the detection result latching unit 3323 is received by the base of the transistor M 32 , the collector and the emitter of the transistor are conducted so as to conduct the power loop of the LED tube lamp. Herein, at least the first installation detection terminal TE 1 , the transistor M 32 , the resistor R 34 , and the second installation detection terminal TE 2 are included in the power loop.

In the meantime, the base of the transistor M 31 receives the second high level voltage on the output terminal OT via the resistor R 33 . The collector and the emitter of the transistor M 31 are conducting and connected to the ground, such that the capacitor C 31 discharges to the ground via the resistor R 32 . When the voltage of the capacitor C 31 is insufficient so that the pulse generating unit 3322 cannot be triggered, the output of the pulse generating unit 3322 is pulled down to the first low level voltage from the first high level voltage (i.e., the first time of the first low level voltage, the first high level voltage, and the second time of the first low level voltage form a first pulse signal DP 1 ). When the power loop is conducting, the current, generated by the transient response, passing through a capacitor (e.g., filtering capacitor in the filtering circuit) in the LED power loop flows through the transistor M 32 and the resistor R 34 so as to build a voltage signal on the resistor R 34 . The voltage signal is provided to the input terminal IN 2 , and thus the detection unit 3324 may compare the voltage signal on the input terminal IN 2 (i.e., the voltage on the resistor R 34 ) with a reference voltage.

When the detection unit 3324 determines the voltage signal on the resistor R 34 is greater than or equal to the reference voltage, the detection unit outputs a third high level voltage to the detection result latching unit 3323 . On the contrary, when the detection unit 3324 determines the voltage signal on the resistor R 34 is less than the reference voltage, the detection unit 3324 outputs a third low level voltage to the detection result latching unit 3323 .

The detection result latching unit 3323 latches/stores the third high level voltage/third low level voltage provided by the detection unit 3324 and performs a logic operation based on the latched/stored signal and the signal provided by the pulse generating unit 3322 , such that the detection result latching unit 3323 outputs the control signal. Herein, the result of the logic operation determines whether the signal level of the outputted control signal is the second high level voltage or the second low level voltage.

More specifically, when the detection unit 3324 determines that the voltage signal on the resistor is greater than or equal to the reference voltage, the detection result latching unit 3323 may latch the third high level voltage outputted by the detection unit 3324 , and the second high level voltage is maintained to be output to the base of the transistor M 32 , so that the transistor M 32 and the power loop of the LED tube lamp maintain the conductive state. Since the detection result latching unit 3323 may continuously output the second high level voltage, the transistor M 31 is conducted to the ground as well, so that the voltage of the capacitor C 31 cannot rise enough to trigger the pulse generating unit 3322 . When the detection unit 3324 determines that the voltage signal on the resistor R 34 is less than the reference voltage, both the detection unit 3324 and the pulse generating unit 3322 provide a low level voltage, and thus the detection result latching unit 3323 continuously outputs, after performing the OR logical operation, the second low level voltage to the base of the transistor M 32 . Therefore, the transistor M 32 is maintained to be cut off and the power loop of the LED tube lamp is maintained in the non-conducting state. However, since the control signal on the output terminal OT is maintained at a second low level voltage, the transistor M 31 is thus maintained in a cut-off state as well, and repeatedly performs the next (pulse) detection until the capacitor C 31 is charged by the driving voltage VCC via the resistor R 31 again.

It should be noted that, the detection mode DTM described in this embodiment can be defined as the period that the driving voltage VCC is provided to the installation detection module 3000 c , however, the detection unit 3324 has not yet determined that the voltage signal on the resistor R 34 is greater than or equal to the reference voltage. During the detection mode DTM, since the control signal outputted by the detection result latching unit 3323 alternatively conducts and cuts off the transistor M 31 , the discharge path is periodically conducted and cut off, correspondingly. Thus, the capacitor C 31 is periodically charged and discharged in response to the conducting state of the transistor M 31 , so that the detection result latching unit 3323 outputs the control signal having a periodic pulse waveform during the detection mode DTM. The detection mode DTM ends when the detection unit 3324 determines that the voltage signal on the resistor R 34 is greater than or equal to the reference voltage or the driving voltage VCC is stopped. The detection result latching unit 3323 is maintained to output the control signal having the second high level voltage or the second low level voltage after the detection mode DTM.

In one embodiment, compared to the exemplary embodiment illustrated in FIG. 13A , the integrated control module 3320 is constituted by integrating part of the circuit components in the detection pulse generating module 3210 , the detection result latching circuit 3220 , and the detection determining circuit 3230 (e.g., as part of an integrated circuit). Another part of the circuit components which are not integrated in the integrated control module 3320 constitutes the pulse generating auxiliary circuit 3310 and the detection determining auxiliary circuit 3330 of the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 14A . In some embodiments, the function/circuit configuration of the combination of the pulse generating unit 3322 in the integrated control module 3320 and the pulse generating auxiliary circuit 3310 can be equivalent to the detection pulse generating module 3210 . The function/circuit configuration of the detection result latching unit 3323 in the integrated control module 3320 can be equivalent to the detection result latching module 3220 . The function/circuit configuration of the combination of the detection unit 3324 in the integrated control module 3320 and the detection determining auxiliary circuit 3330 can be equivalent to the detection determining circuit 3230 . In these embodiments, the circuit elements included in the pulse generating unit 3322 , the detection result latching unit 3323 , and the detection unit 3324 are included in an integrated circuit (e.g., formed on a die or chip).

Referring to FIG. 15A , an internal circuit block diagram of a three-terminal switch device according to an exemplary embodiment is illustrated. The installation detection module according to one embodiment is, for example, a three-terminal switch device 3000 d including a power terminal VP 1 , a first switching terminal SP 1 , and a second switching terminal SP 2 . The power terminal VP 1 of the three-terminal switch device 3000 d is adapted to receive a driving voltage VCC. The first switching terminal SP 1 is adapted to connect one of the first installation detection terminal TE 1 and the second installation detection terminal TE 2 (the first switching terminal SP 1 is illustrated as being connected to the first installation detection terminal TE 1 in FIG. 15A , but the invention is not limited thereto), and the second switching terminal SP 2 is adapted to connect to the other one of the first installation detection terminal TE 1 and the second installation detection terminal TE 2 (the second switching terminal SP 2 is illustrated as being connected to the second installation detection terminal TE 2 in FIG. 15A , but the invention is not limited thereto).

The three-terminal switch device 3000 d includes a signal processing unit 3420 , a signal generating unit 3410 , a signal capturing unit 3430 , and a switch unit 3200 d . In addition, the three-terminal switch device 3000 d further includes an internal power detection unit 3440 . The signal processing unit 3420 outputs a control signal having a pulse or multi-pulse waveform during a detection mode DTM, according to the signal provided by the signal generating unit 3410 and the signal capturing unit 3430 . The signal processing unit 3420 outputs the control signal, in which the signal level of the control signal remains at a high level voltage or a low voltage level, after the detection mode DTM, so as to control the conducting state of the switch unit 3200 d and determine whether to conduct the power loop of the LED tube lamp. The pulse signal generated by the signal generating unit 3410 can be generated according to a reference signal received from outside, or by itself, and the present invention is not limited thereto. The term “outside” described in this paragraph is relative to the signal generating unit 3410 , which means the reference signal is not generated by the signal generating unit 3410 . As such, whether the reference signal is generated by any of the other circuits within the three-terminal switch device 3000 d , or by an external circuit of the three-terminal switch device 3000 d , those embodiments belong the scope of “the reference signal received from the outside” as described in this paragraph. The signal capturing unit 3430 samples an electrical signal passing through the power loop of the LED tube lamp to generate a sample signal and detects an installation state of the LED tube lamp according to the sample signal, so as to transmit a detection result signal Sdr indicating the detection result to the signal processing unit 3420 for processing.

In an exemplary embodiment, the three-terminal switch device 3000 d can be implemented by an integrated circuit. For example, the three-terminal switch device 3000 d can be a three-terminal switch control chip, which can be utilized in any type of the LED tube lamp having two end caps for receiving power so as to provide the function of preventing electric shock. It should be noted that, the three-terminal switch device 3000 d is not limited to merely include three pins/connection terminals. For example, a multi-pins switch device (with more than three pins) having at least three pins having the same configuration and function as the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 15A can include additional pins for other purposes, even though those pins may be not described in detail herein. It should be noted that the various “units” described herein, in some embodiments, are circuits, and will be described as circuits.

In an exemplary embodiment, the signal processing unit 3420 , the signal generating unit 3410 , the signal capturing unit 3430 , the switch unit 3200 d , and the internal power detection unit 3440 can be respectively implemented the circuit configurations illustrated in FIGS. 15B to 15F , but the present invention is not limited thereto. Detail exemplary operation of each of the units in the three-terminal control chip are described below.

Referring to FIG. 15B , a block diagram of a signal processing unit according to an exemplary embodiment is illustrated. The signal processing unit 3420 , which in one embodiment is a circuit, includes a driver DRV, an OR gate OG, and a D flip-flop DFF. The driver DRV has an input end, and has an output end connected to the switch unit 3200 d via the path 3421 , in which the driver DRV provides the control signal to the switch unit 3200 d via the output end and the path 3421 . The OR gate OG has a first input end connected to the signal generating unit 3410 via the path 3411 , a second input end, and an output end connected to the input end of the driver DRV. The D flip-flop DFF has a data input end (D) receiving a driving voltage VCC, a clock input end (CK) connected to the signal capturing unit 3430 via the path 3431 , and an output connected to the second input terminal of the OR gate OG.

Referring to FIG. 15C , a block diagram of a signal generating unit according to an exemplary embodiment is illustrated. The signal generating unit 3410 includes resistors R 41 and R 42 , a capacitor C 41 , a switch M 41 , and a comparator CP 41 . One end of the resistor R 41 receives the driving voltage VCC, and the resistors R 41 and R 42 and the capacitor C 41 are serial connected between the driving voltage VCC and the ground. The switch M 41 is connected to the capacitor C 41 in parallel. The comparator CP 41 has a first input end connected to the connection node of the resistors R 41 and R 42 , a second input end receives a reference voltage Vref, and an output end connected to the control terminal of the switch M 41 .

Referring to FIG. 15D , a block diagram of a signal capturing unit according to an exemplary embodiment is illustrated. The signal capturing unit 3430 includes an OR gate and comparators CP 42 and CP 43 . The OR gate OG has a first input end and a second input end, and an output end connected to the signal processing unit 3420 via the path 3431 . The comparator CP 42 has a first input end connected to one end of the switch unit 3200 d (i.e., a node on the power loop of the LED tube lamp) via the path 3202 , a second input end receiving a first reference voltage (e.g., 1.25V, but not limited thereto), and an output end connected to the first input end of the OR gate OG. The comparator CP 43 has a first input end connected to a second reference voltage (e.g., 0.15V, but not limited thereto), a second input end connected to the first input end of the comparator CP 42 , and an output end connected to the second input end of the OR gate OG.

Referring to FIG. 15E , a block diagram of a switch unit according to an exemplary embodiment is illustrated. The switch unit 3200 d includes a transistor M 42 . The transistor M 42 has a gate connected to the signal processing unit 3420 via the path 3421 , a drain connected to the first switch terminal SP 1 via the path 3201 , and a source connected to the second switch terminal SP 2 , the first input end of the comparator CP 42 , and the second input end of the comparator CP 43 via the path 3202 . In one embodiment, for example, the transistor M 42 is an NMOS transistor.

Referring to FIG. 15F , a block diagram of an internal power detection unit according to an exemplary embodiment is illustrated. The internal power detection unit 3440 includes a clamp circuit 3442 , a reference voltage generating circuit 3443 , a voltage adjustment circuit 3444 , and a Schmitt trigger STRG. The clamp circuit 3442 and the voltage adjustment circuit 3444 are respectively connected to the power terminal VP 1 for receiving the driving voltage, so as to perform a voltage clamp operation and a voltage level adjustment operation, respectively. The reference voltage generating circuit 3443 is coupled to the voltage adjustment circuit 3444 and is configured to generate a reference voltage to the voltage adjustment circuit 3444 . The Schmitt trigger STRG has an input end coupled to the clamp circuit 3442 and the voltage adjustment circuit 3444 , and an output end to output a power confirmation signal for indicating whether the driving voltage VCC is normally supplied. If the driving voltage VCC is normally supplied, the Schmitt trigger STRG outputs the enabled power confirmation signal, such that the driving voltage VCC is allowed to be provided to the component/circuit within the three-terminal switch device 3000 d . On the contrary, if the driving voltage VCC is abnormal, the Schmitt trigger STRG outputs the disabled power confirmation signal, such that the component/circuit within the three-terminal switch device 3000 d won't be damaged based on working under the abnormal driving voltage VCC.

Referring to FIGS. 15A to 15F , under the circuit operation of the present embodiment, when the LED tube lamp is installed in the lamp socket, the driving voltage VCC is provided to the three-terminal switch device 3000 d via the power terminal VP 1 . At this time, the driving voltage VCC charges the capacitor C 41 via the resistors R 41 and R 42 . When the capacitor voltage is raised greater than the reference voltage Vref, the comparator CP 41 switches to output a high level voltage to the first input end of the OR gate OG and the control terminal of the switch M 41 . The switch M 41 is conducted in response to the received high level voltage, such that the capacitor starts to discharge to the ground. The comparator CP 41 outputs an output signal having pulse-type waveform through this charge and discharge process.

During the period when the comparator CP 41 outputs the high level voltage, the OR gate OG correspondingly outputs the high level voltage to conduct the transistor M 42 , such that the current flows through the power loop of the LED tube lamp. When the current passes the power loop, a voltage signal corresponding to the current size can be established on the path 3202 . The comparator CP 42 samples the voltage signal and compares the signal level of the voltage signal with the first reference voltage (e.g., 1.25V).

When the signal level of the sampled voltage signal is greater than the first reference voltage, the comparator CP 42 outputs the high level voltage. The OR gate OG generates another high level voltage to the clock input end of the D flip-flop DFF in response to the high level voltage outputted by the comparator CP 42 . The D flip-flop DFF continuously outputs the high level voltage based on the output of the OR gate OG. Driver DRV generates an enabled control signal to conduct the transistor M 42 in response to the high level voltage on the input terminal. At this time, even if the capacitor C 41 has been discharged to below the reference voltage Vref and thus the output of the comparator CP 41 is pulled down to the low level voltage, the transistor M 42 still remains in the conductive state since the output of the D flip-flop DFF is kept on the high level voltage.

When the sampled voltage signal is less than the first reference voltage (e.g., 1.25V), the comparator CP 42 outputs the low level voltage. The OR gate OG generates another low level voltage in response to the low level voltage outputted by the comparator, and provides the generated low level voltage to the clock input end of the D flip-flop DFF. The output end of the D flip-flop DFF remains on the low level voltage based on the output of the OR gate OG. At this time, once the capacitor C 41 discharges to the capacitor voltage below the reference voltage Vref, the output of comparator CP 41 is pulled down to the low level voltage which represents the end of the pulse on-time (i.e., the fallen edge of the pulse). Since the two input ends of the OR gate OG are at the low level voltage, the output end of the OR gate OG also outputs the low level voltage, therefore, the driver DRV generates the disabled control signal to cut off the transistor M 42 in response to the received low level voltage, so as to cut off the power loop of the LED tube lamp.

As noted above, the operation of the signal processing unit 3420 of the present embodiment is similar to that of the detection result latching circuit 3220 illustrated in FIG. 13D , the operation of the signal generating unit 3410 is similar to that of the detection pulse generating module 3210 illustrated in FIG. 13B , the operation of the signal capturing unit 3430 is similar to that of the detection determining circuit 3230 illustrated in FIG. 13C , and the operation of the switch unit 3200 d is similar to that of the switch circuit 3200 b illustrated in FIG. 13E .

Referring to FIG. 16A , a block diagram of an installation detection module according to an exemplary embodiment is illustrated. The installation detection module 3000 e includes a detection pulse generating module 3510 , a control circuit 3520 , a detection determining circuit 3530 , a switch circuit 3200 e , and a detection path circuit 3560 . The detection determining circuit 3530 is coupled to the detection path circuit 3560 via the path 3561 for detecting the signal on the detection path circuit 3560 . The detection determining circuit 3530 is coupled to the control circuit 3520 via the path 3531 for transmitting the detection result signal Sdr to the control circuit 3520 via the path 3531 . The detection pulse generating module 3510 is coupled to the detection path circuit 3560 via the path 3511 and generates a pulse signal to inform the detection path circuit 3560 of a time point for conducting the detection path or performing the installation detection. The control circuit 3520 outputs a control signal according to the detection result signal Sdr and is coupled to the switch circuit 3200 e via the path 3521 , so as to transmit the control signal to the switch circuit 3200 e . The switch circuit 3200 e determines whether to conduct the current path between the installation detection terminals TE 1 and TE 2 (i.e., part of the power loop). The detection path circuit 3560 is coupled to the power loop of the power supply module through a first detection connection terminal DE 1 and a second detection connection terminal DE 2 .

In some embodiments, the detection pulse generating module 3510 , the control circuit 3520 , the detection determining circuit 3530 , and the detection path circuit 3200 e can be referred to a detection circuit or an electric shock detection/protection circuit, which is configured to control the switching state of the switch circuit 3200 e.

In the present embodiment, the configuration of the detection pulse generating module 3510 can correspond to the configurations of the detection pulse generating module 3110 shown in FIG. 12B or the detection pulse generating module 3210 shown in FIG. 13B . Referring to FIG. 12B , when the detection pulse generating module 3110 is applied to implement the detection pulse generating module 3510 , the path 3511 of the present embodiment can correspond to the path 3111 , which means the OR gate OG 1 is connected to the detection path circuit 3560 via the path 3511 . Referring to FIG. 13B , when the detection pulse generating module 3210 is applied to implement the detection pulse generating module 3510 , the path 3511 can correspond to the path 3211 . In one embodiment, the detection pulse generating module is also connected to the output terminal of the control circuit 3520 via the path 3521 , so that the path 3521 can correspond to the path 3221 .

The control circuit 3520 can be implemented by a control chip or any circuit capable of performing signal processing. When the control circuit 3520 determines the tube lamp is properly installed (e.g., the pins on both ends of the tube lamp are plugged into the lamp socket) according to the detection result signal Sdr, the control circuit 3520 may control the switch state of the switch circuit 3200 e so that the external power can be normally provided to the LED module when the tube lamp is properly installed into the lamp socket. In this case, the detection path will be cut off by the control circuit 3520 . On the contrary, when the control circuit 3520 determines the tube lamp is not properly installed (e.g., a user is touching the pins on one end of the tube lamp with the other end plugged in) according to the detection result signal Sdr, the control circuit 3520 keeps the switch circuit 3200 e at the off-state since the user has the risk from getting electric shock.

In an exemplary embodiment, the control circuit 3520 and the switch circuit 3200 e can be part of the driving circuit in the power supply module. For example, if the driving circuit is a switch-type DC-to-DC converter, the switch circuit 3200 e can be the power switch of the converter, and the control circuit 3520 can be the controller of the power switch.

An example of the configuration of the detection determining circuit 3530 can be seen referring to the configurations of the detection determining circuit 3130 shown in FIG. 12C or the detection determining circuit 3230 shown in FIG. 13C . Referring to FIG. 12C , when the detection determining circuit 3130 is applied to implement the detection determining circuit 3530 , the resistor R 14 can be omitted. The path 3561 of the present embodiment can correspond to the path 3201 , which means the positive input terminal of the comparator CP 11 is connected to the detection path circuit 3560 . The path 3531 of the present embodiment can correspond to the path 3131 , which means the output terminal of the comparator CP 11 is connected to the control circuit 3520 . Referring to FIG. 13C , when the detection determining circuit 3230 is applied to implement the detection determining circuit 3530 , the resistor R 24 can be omitted. The path 3561 of the present embodiment can correspond to the path 3201 , which means the anode of the diode D 21 is connected to the detection path circuit 3560 . The path 3531 of the present embodiment can correspond to the path 3231 , which means the output terminal of the comparators CP 21 and CP 22 are connected to the control circuit 3520 .

The configuration of the switch circuit 3200 can correspond to the configurations of the switch circuit 3200 a shown in FIG. 12E or the switch circuit 3200 b shown in FIG. 13E . Since the switch circuit in both embodiments of FIG. 12E and FIG. 13E are similar to each other, the following description discusses the switch circuit 3200 a shown in FIG. 12E as an example. Referring to FIG. 12E , when the switch circuit 3200 a is applied to implement the switch circuit 3200 e , the path 3521 of the present embodiment can correspond to the path 3121 . The path 3201 is not connected to the detection determining circuit 3130 , but directly connected to the installation detection terminal TE 2 .

The detection path circuit 3560 can be disposed on the input side or the output side of one of the rectifying circuit 510 , the filtering circuit 520 , the driving circuit 530 and the LED module 50 , and the present invention is not limited thereto. In addition, in the practical application, the detection path circuit 3560 can be implemented by any circuit structure capable of responding the impedance variation caused by the human body. For example, the detection path circuit 3560 can be formed by at least one passive component (e.g., resistor, capacitor, inductor), at least one active component (e.g., MOSFET, silicon controlled rectifier (SCR)) or the combination of the above.

Exemplary configurations of the detection path circuit 3090 is shown in FIG. 16B or FIG. 16C . Referring to FIG. 16B , the detection path circuit 3560 includes a transistor M 52 and resistors R 53 and R 54 . The transistor M 52 has a base, a collector, and an emitter. The base of the transistor M 52 is connected to the detection pulse generating module 3510 via the path 3511 . The resistor R 54 has a first end connected to the emitter of the transistor M 52 , and has a second end acting as the second detection connection terminal DE 2 connected to the ground terminal GND, so the resistor R 54 is serially connected between the emitter of the transistor M 52 and the ground terminal GND. The resistor R 53 has a first end acting as the first detection connection terminal DE 1 connected to the first installation detection terminal TE 1 , which installation detection terminal TE 1 is for example connected to the first rectifying output terminal 511 in the embodiment of FIG. 16B , so the resistor Rt 3 is serially connected between the drain of the transistor M 52 and the installation detection terminal TE 1 /first rectifying output terminal 511 . Regarding the configured position of the detection path, the detection path in the embodiment of FIG. 16B is in effect disposed between a rectifying output terminal and the ground terminal GND.

In the present embodiment, the transistor M 52 is conducting during a pulse-on period when receiving a pulse signal provided by the detection pulse generating module 3510 . Under the situation where at least one end of the LED tube lamp is inserted into the lamp socket, a detection path between the first rectifying output terminal 511 and the second rectifying output terminal 512 of FIG. 11 is conducted through the resistor R 53 , the transistor M 52 , and the resistor R 54 in response to the conducted transistor M 52 , so as to establish a voltage signal on the node X of the detection path. When the user does not touch the tube lamp or when both ends of the tube lamp are correctly plugged into the lamp socket, the signal level of the voltage signal is determined by the voltage division between the resistors R 53 and R 54 , wherein the second detection connection terminal DE 2 and the ground terminal GND are at the same voltage level. When the user touches the tube lamp, some equivalent body impedance is as connected between the resistor R 54 /the second detection connection terminal DE 2 and the ground terminal GND, which means it is connected to the resistors R 53 and R 54 in series (by the transistor M 52 ). At this time, the signal level of the voltage signal is determined by the voltage division between the resistor R 53 , the resistor R 54 , and the equivalent body impedance. Accordingly, by setting appropriate values of the resistors R 53 and R 54 , the voltage signal on the node X may reflect or indicate the state of whether the user touches the LED tube lamp, and thus the detection determining circuit 3530 may generate a corresponding detection result signal according to the voltage signal on the node X. In addition to being temporarily turned on during the detection mode, the transistor M 52 remains in a cut-off state when the control circuit 3520 determines the LED tube lamp has been correctly installed in the lamp socket, so that the power supply module is capable of providing power normally to the LED module.

The value of the body impedance is typically between 500 ohm to 2000 ohm, depending on the skin humidity. Accordingly, by setting the resistors R 53 and R 54 having reasonable resistance, the voltage signal on the node X may reflect or indicate the state of whether the user touches the tube lamp, and thus the detection determining circuit 3530 may generate the corresponding detection result signal Sdr according to the voltage signal on the node X. In addition to temporarily turning on during the detection mode, the transistor M 52 remains in a cut-off state when the control circuit 3520 determines the LED tube lamp has been correctly installed in the lamp socket, so that the power supply module is capable of providing power normally to the LED module.

Referring to FIG. 16B , the detection path circuit 3560 includes the transistor M 52 and the resistors R 53 and R 54 , the detection path circuit 3560 in FIG. 16B is disposed between the first rectifying output terminal 511 and the second rectifying output terminal 512 . In this embodiment, the resistor R 53 has a first end (or the first detection connection terminal DE 1 ) connected to the first rectifying output terminal 511 , and the resistor R 54 has a second end (or the second detection connection terminal DE 2 ) connected to the second rectifying output terminal 512 .

In the present embodiment, the transistor M 52 is conducting during a pulse-on period when receiving a pulse signal provided by the detection pulse generating module 3510 . Under the situation where at least one end of the LED tube lamp is inserted into the lamp socket, a detection path between the first rectifying output terminal 511 and the second rectifying output terminal 512 of FIG. 11 is conducted through the resistor R 53 , the transistor M 52 , and the resistor R 54 in response to the conducted transistor M 52 , so as to establish a voltage signal on the node X of the detection path. When the user does not touch the tube lamp or when both ends of the tube lamp are correctly plugged into the lamp socket, the signal level of the voltage signal is determined by the voltage division between the resistors R 53 and R 54 , wherein the second detection connection terminal DE 2 and the ground terminal GND are at the same voltage level. When the user touches the tube lamp, some equivalent body impedance is as connected between the resistor R 54 /the second detection connection terminal DE 2 and the ground terminal GND, which means it is connected to the resistors R 53 and R 54 in series (by the transistor M 52 ). At this time, the signal level of the voltage signal is determined by the voltage division between the resistor R 53 , the resistor R 54 , and the equivalent body impedance. Accordingly, by setting appropriate values of the resistors R 53 and R 54 , the voltage signal on the node X may reflect or indicate the state of whether the user touches the LED tube lamp, and thus the detection determining circuit 3530 may generate a corresponding detection result signal according to the voltage signal on the node X. In addition to being temporarily turned on during the detection mode, the transistor M 52 remains in a cut-off state when the control circuit 3520 determines the LED tube lamp has been correctly installed in the lamp socket, so that the power supply module is capable of providing power normally to the LED module.

In summary, whether a user is exposed or liable to the risk of electric shock on the LED tube lamp can be determined by conducting a detection path and then detecting a voltage signal on the detection path. In addition, compared to the above embodiments of FIGS. 12A, 13A, 14A and 15A , instead of forming a detection path directly connected to or on a power loop of the power supply module, the detection path circuit 3560 illustrated in FIGS. 16A-16C forms/causes an additional detection path separate from, independent of, or other than the power loop, i.e., the power loop and the detection path do not overlap at least partially. In some embodiments, since the number of electrical components on the separate detection path is substantially smaller than that of the electrical components on the power loop, the detected voltage signal on the additional detection path can reflect more accurately the state of whether a user has touched and thus been exposed to the risk of electric shock on part of the LED tube lamp which is not yet correctly installed in the lamp socket.

In some embodiments, the installation detection module 3000 e further includes a ripple detection circuit 3580 configured to provide a flicker suppression function while the LED tube lamp is in a state of normally lighting up. In addition, the switching circuit 3200 e of FIG. 16A may be disposed as being serially connected to the LED module in the LED tube lamp, wherein for example one of the installation detection terminal TE 1 and installation detection terminal TE 2 is electrically connected to a negative terminal of the LED module and the other of the two installation detection terminals is electrically connected to a ground terminal.

In an installation detection module 3000 e of FIG. 16A having the function of flicker suppression, in a detection mode circuit operations of the detection pulse generating module 3510 , the control circuit 3520 , the detection determining circuit 3530 , the switching circuit 3200 e , and the detection path circuit 3560 of FIG. 16A are respectively similar to those thereof described above, and the control circuit 3520 does not change its operation state or state of outputting signal in response to a signal output by the ripple detection circuit 3580 .

On the other hand, when the LED tube lamp of an installation detection module 3000 e of FIG. 16A having the function of flicker suppression enters into a normal operation mode, the ripple detection circuit 3580 is configured to detect a voltage at the installation detection terminal TE 2 and generate and transmit a corresponding signal to the control circuit 3520 . The control circuit 3520 is then configured to control operation of the switching circuit 3200 e within a linear region, according to the signal received from the ripple detection circuit 3580 , causing an equivalent impedance of the switching circuit 3200 e between the installation detection terminals TE 1 and TE 2 to vary with the magnitude of the voltage detected by the ripple detection circuit 3580 , thereby realizing the effects of maintaining stable luminance and suppressing flicker phenomenon.

Next, circuit operations of an installation detection module having the function of flicker suppression are further described with the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 16D . FIG. 16D is a schematic diagram of an installation detection module having the function of flicker suppression according to some embodiments. Referring to FIG. 16D , only module(s) and circuit(s) directly related to the function of flicker suppression of the installation detection module are illustrated and explained below, with other possible structures and configurations of the installation detection module similar to those described above with reference to embodiments of FIGS. 16A-16D .

In the present embodiment, the switching circuit 3200 e includes a transistor M 53 , which is for example but not limited to an N-type MOSFET. The transistor M 53 has a first terminal (such as drain terminal) coupled to a negative terminal of the LED module 50 , and has a second terminal (such as source terminal) coupled through a resistor R 55 to a second driving output terminal 532 (coupled to a ground terminal). So the transistor M 53 is serially connected between the negative terminal of the LED module 50 and a ground terminal.

When the LED tube lamp enters into a normal operation or lighting mode, the ripple detection circuit 3580 is configured to detect a voltage at the second terminal of the transistor M 53 and then generate and transmit a corresponding ripple detection signal to the control circuit 3520 . Then the control circuit 3520 outputs a corresponding signal to cause the variation in equivalent impedance of the switching circuit 3200 e to be positively correlated with the magnitude of voltage detected by the ripple detection circuit 3580 . For example, when the voltage detected by the ripple detection circuit 3580 is relatively greater, the control circuit 3520 outputs a corresponding signal to cause the equivalent impedance of the switching circuit 3200 e to be greater; but when the voltage detected by the ripple detection circuit 3580 is relatively smaller, the control circuit 3520 outputs a corresponding signal to cause the equivalent impedance of the switching circuit 3200 e to be smaller. Therefore, any ripple current originally arising from voltage fluctuation can be offset or regarded as being absorbed by the equivalent impedance of the switching circuit 3200 e , thereby causing a current flowing through the LED module to be substantially maintained in relatively stable range and thus achieving the effects of flicker suppression.

In summary, in the embodiments of an installation detection module described above without the function of flicker suppression, under a normal operation mode a control circuit 3520 is configured to output a signal to cause a switching circuit 3200 e to stably operate in a saturation region, so under the normal operation mode the equivalent impedance of the switching circuit 3200 e substantially does not vary with the variation in voltage between the drain and source terminals of a transistor in the switching circuit 3200 e , ignoring its channel-length modulation effects. On the other hand, in the embodiments of an installation detection module having the function of flicker suppression, under a normal operation mode a control circuit 3520 is configured to control a switching circuit 3200 e to operate in a linear region rather than saturation region, thereby causing the equivalent impedance of the switching circuit 3200 e to vary with the variation of a detected voltage, thereby reducing the flicker phenomenon.

FIG. 17A is a block diagram of an installation detection module according to an exemplary embodiment. Referring to FIG. 17A , the installation detection module 3000 f includes a detection pulse generating module 3610 , a control circuit 3620 , a detection determining circuit 3630 , a switch circuit 3200 f and a detection path circuit 3660 . Connection relationship of the detection pulse generating module 3610 , the control circuit 3620 , the detection determining circuit 3630 and the switch circuit 3200 f are similar to the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 16A , and thus are not repeated herein. The difference between the present embodiment and the embodiment of FIG. 16A is the configuration and operation of the detection path circuit 3660 . Specifically, the detection path circuit 3660 has a first detection connection terminal DE 1 coupled to a low level terminal of the filtering circuit 520 and a second detection connection terminal DE 2 coupled to the rectifying output terminal 512 . In this manner, the detection path circuit 3660 can be regarded as connecting between the low level terminal of the filtering circuit 520 and the rectifying output terminal 512 . For example, the low level terminal of the filtering circuit 520 is connected to the rectifying output terminal 512 via the detection path circuit 3660 .

The configuration of the detection path circuit 3660 can be seen in FIG. 17B or FIG. 17C , which illustrates a schematic diagram of the installation detection module according to some embodiments. Referring to FIG. 17B , the filtering circuit 520 includes, for example, capacitors 725 and 727 and an inductor 726 , which are configured as a pi-type filter. The inductor 726 has a first end connected to the rectifying output terminal 511 and a second end connected to the filtering output terminal 512 , which means the inductor 726 is connected between the rectifying output terminal 511 and the filtering output terminal 521 in series. The capacitor 725 has a first end connected to the first end of the inductor 726 and a second end connected to the detection path circuit 3660 . The capacitor 726 has a first end connected to the second end of the inductor 726 and a second end connected to the second end of the capacitor 725 , and the second ends of the capacitors 725 and 727 can be regarded as the low level terminal. The installation detection module includes a detection pulse generating module 3610 , a control circuit 3620 , a detection determining circuit 3630 , a switch circuit 3200 f and a detection path circuit 3660 . The detection path circuit 3660 includes a resistor R 61 and a transistor M 61 . The transistor M 61 has a gate electrode coupled to the detection pulse generating module 3610 , a source electrode coupled a first end of the resistor R 61 , and a drain electrode coupled to the second ends of the capacitors 725 and 727 . A second end of the resistor R 61 can be regarded as the second detection connection terminal (e.g., DE 2 ) and coupled to the rectifying output terminal 512 and the first installation detection terminal TE 1 . The detection determining circuit 3630 is coupled to the first end of the resistor R 61 to detect magnitude of the current flowing through the detection path. In the present disclosed embodiment, the detection path can be regarded as formed by the capacitors 725 and 727 , the inductor 726 , the resistor R 61 and the transistor M 61 .

In some embodiments, when the transistor M 61 receives a pulse signal provided from the detection pulse generating module 3610 , which means the LED tube lamp (or power supply module) is under the detection mode, the transistor is turned on during the pulse-on period. Under the condition that at least one end of the LED tube lamp is correctly installed in the lamp socket, a current path formed, via the detection path, between the output rectifying terminals 511 and 512 is conducted in response to the transistor M 61 being turned on, and therefore generates a voltage signal on the first end of the resistor R 61 . When there is no person touching the conductive part of the LED tube lamp (or the LED tube lamp is correctly installed in the lamp socket), a level of the voltage signal is determined by the voltage division of the equivalent impedance of the filtering circuit 520 and the resistor R 61 . When there is a person touching the conductive part of the LED tube lamp (or the LED tube lamp is not correctly installed in the lamp socket), a body impedance is equivalent to serially connect between the second detection connection terminal (e.g., DE 2 ) and the ground terminal. In addition to temporarily turning on the transistor M 61 during the detection mode, in some embodiments, the transistor M 61 further remains being cut off when the control circuit 3620 determines that the LED tube lamp is correctly installed in the lamp socket, so that the power supply module can operate normally and provide current to the LED module.

Referring to FIG. 17C , the installation detection module includes a detection pulse generating circuit 3610 , a control circuit 3620 , a detection determining circuit 3630 , a switch circuit 3200 f , and a detection path circuit 3660 . The configuration and operation of the installation detection module of the present embodiment are substantially the same as the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 17B , the difference between the embodiments of FIG. 17B and FIG. 17C is that the detection path circuit 3660 of FIG. 17C is disposed between the second end of the capacitor 725 and the rectifying output terminal 512 , and the second end of the capacitor 727 is directly connected to the second installation detection terminal TE 2 (or second filtering output terminal 522 ).

Compared to the embodiments illustrated in FIG. 16A , since the passive components of the filtering circuit 520 become part of the detection path, the current size of the current flowing through the detection path circuit 3660 is much smaller than the detection path circuit 3560 , and thereby the transistor (e.g., transistor M 61 or R 61 ) of the detection path circuit 3660 can be implemented by the components with smaller size to effectively reduce the cost.

Referring to FIG. 18A , FIG. 18A is a circuit block diagram of a power supply module of an LED tube lamp according to some embodiments of the present disclosure. The power supply module of these embodiments includes a rectifying circuit 510 , a filtering circuit 520 , a driving circuit 530 and an installation detection module 3000 g . The installation detection module 3000 g includes a detection controller 3100 g , a switch circuit 3200 g and a bias circuit 3300 . The detection controller 3100 g includes a control module 3710 , an activation control circuit 3770 and a detection period determining circuit 3780 . The configurations and operations of rectifying circuit 510 , filtering circuit 520 , and driving circuit 530 can refer to the descriptions of the related above embodiments, and the relevant details are not described herein again.

In installation detection module 3000 g , the switch circuit 3200 g is electrically connected in series to the power supply loop/power loop of the power supply module (in FIG. 18A , the switch circuit 3200 g is disposed between the rectifying circuit 510 and the filtering circuit 520 , as an exemplary embodiment), and is controlled by the control module 3710 to switch the turn on/off state. The control module 3710 outputs a control signal in a detection mode to temporarily turn on the switch circuit 3200 g , in order to detect whether an external impedance is electrically connected to the detection path of the power supply module (which means the user may be exposed to an electric shock risk) during the period in which the switch circuit 3200 g is turned on (i.e., during the period in which the power supply loop/power loop is turned on/conducted). The detection result determines whether to maintain the detection mode so that the switch circuit 3200 g is temporarily turned on in a discontinuous form, or to enter into an operating mode so that switch circuit 3200 g responds to the installation status to remain turned-on or cut-off. The length of the period represented by “temporarily turning on the switch circuit” refers to the length of the period in which the current on the power loop passes through the human body and does not cause any harm to the human body. For example, the length of the period is less than 1 millisecond. However, the present disclosure is not limited thereto. In general, the control module 3710 can achieve the operation of temporarily turning on the switch circuit 3200 g by transmitting a control signal having pulse waveform. The specific duration of the pulse-on period can be adjusted according to the impedance of the detection path. Descriptions of the circuit configuration examples and the related control actions of the control module 3710 and the switch circuit 3200 g can refer to those description of other embodiments related to the installation detection module.

The bias circuit 3300 is electrically connected to the power loop to generate a driving voltage VCC based on the rectified signal (i.e., the bus voltage). The driving voltage VCC is provided to control module 3710 to activate/enable the control module 3710 , and for the control module 3710 operate in response to the driving voltage.

The activation control circuit 3770 is electrically connected to the control module 3710 , and is configured to determine whether to affect the operating state of control module 3710 according to the output signal of detection period determining circuit 3780 . For example, when detection period determining circuit 3780 outputs an enable signal, activation control circuit 3770 will respond to the enable signal and control module 3710 to stop operating when detection period determining circuit 3780 outputs a disable signal, activation control circuit 3770 will respond to the disable signal and control the control module 3710 to maintain a normal operating state (i.e., which does not affect the operational state of the control module 3710 ), where activation control circuit 3770 can control the control module 3710 to stop operation by using the driving voltage VCC or providing a low-level start signal to the enable pin of the control module 3710 However, the present disclosure is not limited to these particular examples.

The detection period determining circuit 3780 is configured to sample the electrical signal on the detection path/power loop, thereby calculating the operation time of the control module 3710 , and outputting a signal indicating the calculation result to activation control circuit 3770 , so that activation control circuit 3770 controls the operating state of the control module 3710 based on the indicated the calculation result.

The operation of installation detection module 3000 g of the embodiment of FIG. 18A is described below. When rectifying circuit 510 receives an external power source through pins 501 and 502 , bias circuit 3300 generates a driving voltage VCC according to the rectified bus voltage. The control module 3710 is activated or enabled in response to the driving voltage VCC and enters the detection mode. In the detection mode, control module 3710 periodically outputs a pulse-shaped control signal to switch circuit 3200 g , so that switch circuit 3200 g is periodically turned on and turned off. Under the operation of the detection mode, the current waveform on the power loop is similar to the current waveform within the detection period Tw in FIG. 37D (i.e., a plurality of spaced-apart current pulses Idp). In addition, detection period determining circuit 3780 , upon receiving the bus voltage on the power loop, starts calculating the operation time of the control module 3710 in the detection mode, and outputs a signal indicating the calculation result to activation control circuit 3770 .

In the case when the operation time of the control module 3710 has not reached the preset time length, the activation control circuit 3770 does not affect the operating state of the control module 3710 . At this time, the control module 3710 determines to maintain the detection mode or enter into the operational mode according to its own detection result. If the control module 3710 determines to enter into the operating mode, the control module 3710 controls the switch circuit 3200 g to remain in the turn-on state and block the effect of other signals on its operating state. In this case, in the operating mode, regardless the output by the activation control circuit 3770 , the operating state of the control module 3710 is not affected.

In the case when the operation time of the control module 3710 has reached the preset time length, and the control module 3710 is still in the detection mode, the activation control circuit 3770 controls, in response to the output of the detection period determining circuit 3780 , the control module 3710 to stop operating. At this time, the control module 3710 no longer outputs a pulse signal, and maintains the switch circuit 3200 g in the turn-off state until the control module 3710 is reset. The preset time length can be regarded as the detection period Tw shown in FIG. 37D .

According to operation described above, the installation detection module 3000 g can let the power supply module have input current (Iin) waveforms as shown in FIGS. 37D to 37F by setting the pulse interval and the reset cycle of the control signal, thereby ensuring that the electric power in the detection mode is still within a reasonably safe range, to avoid any danger to the human body by the detection current.

From the point of view of circuit operation, the activation control circuit 3770 and the detection period determining circuit 3780 can be regarded as a delay control circuit, which is capable of turning on a specific path, after the LED tube lamp is powered up for a preset delay, to control a target circuit (e.g., the control module 3710 ). By selecting the setting of the specific path, a delay conduction for the power loop or a delay turning-off/cut-off for the installation detection module can be implemented by the delay control circuit in the LED tube lamp.

Referring to FIG. 18B , FIG. 18B is a circuit block diagram of an installation detection module for an LED tube lamp according to some embodiments of the present disclosure. The power supply module includes a rectifying circuit 510 , a filtering circuit 520 , a driving circuit 530 , and an installation detection module 3000 h . The installation detection module 3000 h includes a detection controller 3100 h , a switch circuit 3200 h , and a bias circuit 3300 . The detection controller 3100 h includes a control module 3810 , an activation control circuit 3870 , and a detection period determining circuit 3880 . The configurations and operations of rectifying circuit 510 , filtering circuit 520 , and driving circuit 530 can refer to the descriptions of the related embodiments. In addition, the configurations and operations of control module 3810 and switch circuit 3200 h can refer to the descriptions of the embodiment of FIG. 18A above, and details are not described herein again.

In one embodiment, bias circuit 3300 includes a resistor R 71 , a capacitor C 71 , and a Zener diode ZD 1 . The first end of resistor R 71 is electrically connected to the rectified output terminal (i.e., electrically connected to the bus). Capacitor C 71 and Zener diode ZD 1 are electrically connected in parallel with each other, and their first ends are both electrically connected to the second end of resistor R 71 . The power input terminal of control module 3810 is electrically connected to a common node of resistor R 71 , capacitor C 71 , and Zener diode ZD 1 (i.e., the bias node of bias circuit 3300 ) to receive the driving voltage VCC on the common node.

Activation control circuit 3870 includes a Zener diode ZD 2 , a transistor M 71 , and a capacitor C 72 . The anode of Zener diode ZD 2 is electrically connected to the control terminal of transistor M 71 . The first end of transistor M 71 is electrically connected to control module 3810 , and the second end of transistor M 71 is electrically connected to the ground terminal GND. Capacitor C 72 is electrically connected between the first end and the second end of transistor M 71 .

Detection period determining circuit 3880 includes a resistor R 72 , a diode D 71 , and a capacitor C 73 . The first end of resistor R 72 is electrically connected to the bias node of bias circuit 3300 , and the second end of resistor R 72 is electrically connected to the cathode of Zener diode ZD 2 . The anode of diode D 71 is electrically connected to the second end of resistor R 72 , and the cathode of diode D 71 is electrically connected to the first end of resistor R 72 . The first end of capacitor C 73 is electrically connected to the second end of resistor R 72 and the anode of diode D 71 , and the second end of capacitor C 73 is electrically connected to the ground terminal GND.

The operation of installation detection module 3000 h of the embodiment of FIG. 18A is described below. When rectifying circuit 510 receives an external power source through pins 501 and 502 , the rectified bus voltage charges capacitor C 71 , thereby establishing a driving voltage VCC at the bias node. Control module 3810 is enabled in response to the driving voltage VCC and enters into the detection mode. In the detection mode, in the first signal cycle, control module 3810 outputs a pulse-shaped control signal to the switch circuit 3200 h , so that the switch circuit 3200 h is temporarily turned on and then cut off.

During the switch circuit 3200 h being turned-on, the capacitor C 73 is charged in response to the driving voltage VCC on the bias node, such that the voltage across capacitor C 73 gradually rises. In the first signal period, because the increased voltage across capacitor C 73 has not reached the threshold level of transistor M 71 , transistor M 71 will remain in the off state. As a result, the enable signal Ven is maintained at a high level accordingly. Then, during the switch circuit 3200 h being turned-off or cut-off, capacitor C 73 will substantially maintain the voltage level or slowly discharge, wherein the voltage change caused by the discharge of capacitor C 73 during the switch circuit being turned-off is less than that caused by the charging during the switch circuit being turned-on. The voltage across capacitor C 73 during the switch being turned off will be less than or equal to the highest voltage level during the switch being turned on, and the lowest voltage level will not be lower than its initial level at the charging start point, so transistor M 71 will always remain in the off state in the first signal period, and the start signal Ven is maintained at a high level. Control module 3810 is maintained in an enabled state in response to a high level enable signal Ven. In the enabled state, control module 3810 determines whether the LED tube lamp is correctly installed according to the signal on the detection path (i.e., determines whether there is additional impedance is introduced). The installation detection mechanism of this part is the same as the previous embodiment, and details are not further described herein.

When control module 3810 determines that the LED tube lamp has not been properly installed to the socket, control module 3810 maintains the detection mode and continuously outputs a pulse-shaped control signal to control switch circuit 3200 h . In the following signal periods, activation control circuit 3870 and detection period determining circuit 3880 continue to operate in a manner similar to the operation of the first signal period. Specifically, capacitor C 73 is charged during the on period of each signal period, so that the voltage across capacitor C 73 rises step by step in response to the pulse width and the pulse period. When the voltage across capacitor C 73 exceeds the threshold level of transistor M 71 , transistor M 71 is turned on so that the enable signal Ven is pulled down to the ground level/low level. At this time, control module 3810 is turned off in response to the low level enable signal Ven. When control module 3810 is turned off, switch circuit 3200 h is maintained in turn-off/cut-off state regardless of whether or not an external power source is electrically connected.

When the control module 3810 determines that the LED tube lamp has been properly installed in the lamp socket, the control module 3810 enters an operational mode and outputs a control signal to maintain the switch circuit 3200 h in a turn-on state. In the operating mode, the control module 3810 does not change the output control signal in response to the enable signal Ven. Even if the enable signal Ven is pulled down to a low level, the control module 3810 does not turn off switch circuit 3200 h again.

From the point of view of the multiple signal periods in the detection mode, the current waveform measured on the power loop is as shown in FIG. 37D , in which the period of capacitor C 73 charged from the initial level to the threshold level of transistor M 71 corresponds to the detection period Tw. In the detection mode, control module 3810 continues outputting pulse signal until capacitor C 73 is charged to the threshold level of transistor M 71 , resulting in intermittent current in the power loop. And when the voltage across capacitor C 73 exceeds the threshold, the pulse signal is stopped to avoid any danger to the human body by the increased electric power in power loop.

From another perspective, the detection period determining circuit 3880 can be regarded as calculating the pulse-on period of the calculation control signal. When the preset value is reached during the pulse-on period, the control signal is sent out to control activation control circuit 3870 , then activation control circuit 3870 affects the operation of control module 3810 to block the pulse output.

In the circuit architecture of this embodiment, the length of the detection period Tw (i.e., the time required for capacitor C 73 to reach the threshold voltage of transistor M 71 ) is mainly controlled by adjusting the capacitance value of capacitor C 73 . The main function of the components such as resistor R 72 , diode D 71 , Zener diode ZD 2 , and capacitor C 72 is to support activation control circuit 3870 and detection period determining circuit 3880 to provide voltage stability, voltage limit, current limit, or protection.

Referring to FIG. 18C , FIG. 18C is a circuit diagram of an installation detection module for a LED tube lamp according to some embodiments of the present disclosure. The power supply module of the embodiment includes rectifying circuit 510 , filtering circuit 520 , driving circuit 530 , and an installation detection module 3000 i . Installation detection module 3000 i includes a detection controller 3100 i , a switch circuit 3200 i , and a bias circuit 3300 . The detection controller 3100 i includes a control module 3910 , an activation control circuit 3970 and a detection period determining circuit 3980 . The configurations and operations of rectifying circuit 510 , filtering circuit 520 , and driving circuit 530 can refer to the descriptions of the related embodiments. In addition, the configurations and operations of control module 3910 and switch circuit 3200 i can refer to the descriptions of the embodiment of FIG. 18A mentioned above, and the details are not described herein again.

Bias circuit 3300 includes a resistor R 81 , a capacitor C 81 , and a Zener diode ZD 3 . The first end of resistor R 81 is electrically connected to the rectified output (i.e., electrically connected to the bus). Capacitor C 81 and Zener diode ZD 3 are electrically connected in parallel with each other, and their first ends are both electrically connected to the second end of resistor R 81 . The power supply input of control module 3910 is electrically connected to a common node of resistor R 81 , capacitor C 81 , and Zener diode ZD 3 (i.e., the bias node of bias circuit 3300 ) to receive the driving voltage VCC.

Activation control circuit 3970 includes a Zener diode ZD 4 , a transistor M 81 , and resistors R 82 and R 83 . The anode of Zener diode ZD 2 is electrically connected to the control terminal of transistor M 81 . The first end of resistor R 82 is electrically connected to the anode of Zener diode ZD 4 and the control terminal of transistor M 81 , and the second end of resistor R 82 is electrically connected to the ground terminal GND. The first end of transistor M 81 is electrically connected to the bias node of bias circuit 3300 through a resistor R 83 , and the second end of transistor M 81 is electrically connected to the ground terminal GND.

Detection period determining circuit 3980 includes a diode D 81 , resistors R 84 and R 85 , a capacitor C 82 , and a Zener diode 3775 . The anode of diode D 81 is electrically connected to one end of switch circuit 3200 i , which can be regarded as the detecting node of detection period determining circuit 3980 . The first end of resistor R 84 is electrically connected to the cathode of diode D 81 , and the second end of resistor R 84 is electrically connected to the cathode of Zener diode ZD 4 . The first end of resistor R 85 is electrically connected to the second end of resistor R 84 , and the second end of resistor R 85 is electrically connected to the ground terminal GND. Capacitor C 82 and Zener diode ZD 5 are both electrically connected in parallel with resistor R 85 , wherein the cathode and the anode of Zener diode ZD 5 are electrically connected to the first end and the second end of resistor R 85 respectively.

The operation of the installation detection module 3000 i of this embodiment is described below. When rectifying circuit 510 receives an external power source through pins 501 and 502 , the rectified bus voltage charges capacitor C 81 , thereby establishing a driving voltage VCC at the bias node. Control module 3910 is enabled in response to the driving voltage VCC and enters the detection mode. In the detection mode, in the first signal cycle, control module 3910 sends a pulse-shaped control signal to switch circuit 3200 i , so that switch circuit 3200 i is temporarily turned on and then turned off.

During the period that switch circuit 3200 i is turned on, the anode of diode D 81 can be regarded as electrically connected to ground, so capacitor C 82 is not charged. During the first signal period, the voltage across capacitor C 82 will remain at the initial level during the switch circuit 3200 i being turned on, and transistor M 81 will remain in the turn-off/cut-off state, and thus will not affect the operation of control module 3910 . Next, during the switch circuit 3200 i being turned off/cut off, the power loop causes the voltage level on the detecting node to rise in response to the external power supply, wherein the voltage applied to the capacitor C 82 is equal to the voltage division of the resistors R 84 and R 85 . Therefore, during the period that the switch circuit 3200 i is turned off, the capacitor C 82 is charged in response to the voltage division of resistors R 84 and R 85 , and the voltage across the capacitor C 82 gradually rises. During the first signal period, because the increased voltage across the capacitor C 82 has not reached the threshold level of the transistor M 81 , the transistor M 81 remains in an off state, so that the driving voltage VCC remains unchanged. Since the transistor M 81 remains in the off state during the first signal period no matter whether the switch circuit 3200 i is turned on or cut off, the driving voltage VCC is not affected. Therefore, control module 3910 is maintained in the enabled or activated state in response to the driving voltage VCC. In the activated state, control module 3910 determines whether the LED tube lamp is correctly installed according to the signal on the detection path (i.e., determines whether an external impedance is introduced). The installation detection mechanism of this part is the same as the previous embodiment, and details are not described herein again.

When control module 3910 determines that the LED tube lamp has not been properly installed to the socket, control module 3910 maintains the detection mode and continuously outputs a pulse-shaped control signal to control switch circuit 3200 i . In the following signal periods, activation control circuit 3970 and detection period determining circuit 3980 continue to operate in a manner similar to the operation of the first signal period. That is, capacitor C 82 is charged during the off period of each signal period, so that the voltage across capacitor C 82 rises step by step in response to the pulse width and the pulse period. When the voltage across capacitor C 82 exceeds the threshold level of transistor M 81 , transistor M 81 is turned on causing the bias node to be shorted to the ground terminal GND, thereby causing the driving voltage VCC to be pulled down to the ground/low voltage level. At this time, the control module 3910 is disabled or deactivated in response to the driving voltage VCC of the low voltage level. When the control module 3910 is disabled or deactivated, the switch circuit 3200 i is maintained in an off state regardless of whether or not an external power source is electrically connected.

When the control module 3910 determines that the LED tube lamp has been properly installed in the lamp socket, the control module 3910 will enter an operating mode and issue a control signal to maintain the switch circuit 3200 i in a conductive state or turn-on state. In the operating mode, since the switch circuit 3200 i remains turned on, the transistor M 81 is maintained in an off state, so that the driving voltage VCC is not affected, and the control module 3910 can operate normally.

From the point of view of the multiple signal periods in the detection mode, the current waveform measured on the power loop is as shown in FIG. 37D , in which the period of capacitor C 82 charged from the initial level to the threshold level of transistor M 81 corresponds to the detection period Tw. In the detection mode, control module 3910 continues outputting pulse signal until capacitor C 82 is charged to the threshold level of transistor M 81 , resulting in intermittent current in the power loop. And when the voltage across capacitor C 82 exceeds the threshold, the pulse signal is stopped to avoid any danger to human body by the increased electric power in power loop.

From another perspective, the detection period determining circuit 3980 is in effect used to calculate the pulse-off period of the control signal, and when the calculated pulse-off period has reached a preset value, then to output a signal to control the activation control circuit 3970 , causing the activation control circuit 3970 to affect operation of the control module 3910 so as to block or stop outputting of the pulse signal.

In the circuit architecture, the length of the detection period Tw (i.e., the time required for capacitor C 82 to reach the threshold voltage of transistor M 81 ) is mainly controlled by adjusting the capacitance value of capacitor C 82 and resistance values of resistors R 84 , R 85 , and R 82 . Components such as diode D 81 , Zener diodes ZD 5 and ZD 4 , and resistor R 83 are used to assist in the operations of activation control circuit 3970 and the detection period determining circuit 3980 to provide the function of voltage stabilization, voltage limiting, current limiting, or protection.

Referring to FIG. 18D , FIG. 18D is a circuit diagram of an installation detection module for an LED tube lamp according to some embodiments of the present disclosure. The power supply module of the embodiment includes rectifying circuit 510 , filtering circuit 520 , driving circuit 530 , and installation detection module 3000 j . Installation detection module 3000 j includes detection controller 3100 j , switch circuit 3200 j , and bias circuit 3300 . The detection controller 3100 j includes control module 3910 , activation control circuit 3970 , and detection period determining circuit 3980 . In the present embodiment, the configurations and operations of installation detection module 3000 j is almost the same as these of the embodiment of FIG. 18C . The main difference between FIGS. 18C and 18D is that detection period determining circuit 3980 of the present embodiment in FIG. 18D includes not only diode D 81 , resistors R 84 and R 85 , capacitor C 82 and Zener diode ZD 5 , but also resistors R 86 , R 87 and R 88 and diode D 82 . Resistor R 86 is disposed in series between diode D 81 and resistor R 84 . The first end of resistor R 87 is electrically connected to the first end of resistor R 84 , and the second end of resistor R 87 is electrically connected to the cathode of Zener diode ZD 4 . Resistor R 88 and capacitor C 82 are electrically connected in parallel with each other. The anode of diode D 82 is electrically connected to the first end of capacitor C 82 and the cathode of Zener diode ZD 4 , and the cathode of diode D 82 is electrically connected to the second end of resistor R 84 and the first end of resistor R 85 .

In the circuit architecture of this embodiment, the circuit for charging capacitor C 82 is changed from resistors R 84 and R 85 to resistors R 87 and R 88 . Capacitor C 82 is charged based on the voltage division of resistors R 87 and R 88 . Specifically, the voltage on the detecting node first generates a first-order partial voltage on the first end of resistor R 84 based on the voltage division of resistors R 86 , R 84 , and R 85 , and then the first-order partial pressure generates a second order partial voltage at the first end of capacitor C 82 based on the voltage division of resistors R 87 and R 88 . In this configuration, the charging rate of capacitor C 82 can be controlled by adjusting the resistance values of resistors R 84 , R 85 , R 86 , R 87 , and R 88 , and not limited by just adjusting capacitor value. As a result, the size of capacitor C 82 can be effectively reduced. On the other hand, since resistor R 85 is no longer working as a component on the charging circuit, a smaller resistance value can be selected, so that the discharging rate of capacitor C 82 can be increased, thereby the reset time for the detection period determining circuit 3980 can be reduced.

Although the modules/circuits are named by their functionality in the embodiments described in the present disclosure, it should be understood by those skilled in the art that the same circuit component may be considered to have different functions based on the circuit design and different modules/circuits may share the same circuit component to implement their respective circuit functions. Thus, the functional naming of the present disclosure is not intended to limit a particular unit, circuit, or module to particular circuit components.

For example, the installation detection module of the above embodiments may be alternatively referred to as a detection circuit/module, a leakage current detection circuit/module, a leakage current protection circuit/module, an impedance detection circuit/module, or generically referred to as circuitry. The detection result latching module of the above embodiments may be alternatively referred to as a detection result storage circuit/module, or a control circuit/module. And the detection controller of the above embodiments may be a circuit including the detection pulse generating module, the detection result latching module, and the detection determining circuit, although the present invention is not limited to such a circuit of detection controller.

FIG. 19 is a circuit block diagram of a power supply module in an LED tube lamp according to some embodiments. Referring to FIG. 19 , the LED tube lamp 1200 is, for example, configured to receive an external driving signal directly provided by an external AC power source 508 , wherein the external driving signal is input through the live wire (marked as “L”) and the neutral wire (marked as “N”) to two pins 501 and 502 on two ends of the LED tube lamp 1200 . In practical applications, the LED tube lamp 1200 may further have two additional pins 503 and 504 , also on the two ends. Under the structure of the LED tube lamp 1200 having the four pins 501 - 504 , depending on design requirements two pins (such as the pins 501 and 503 , or the pins 502 and 504 ) on an end cap coupled to one end of the LED tube lamp 1200 may be electrically connected or mutually electrically independent, but the invention is not limited to any of the mentioned cases. An electric-shock detection module 4000 is disposed inside the LED tube lamp 1200 and includes a detection control circuit 4100 and a current-limiting circuit 4200 . The electric-shock detection module 4000 may be and is hereinafter referred to as an installation detection module 4000 . The current-limiting circuit 4200 is coupled to a rectifying circuit 510 through a first installation detection terminal TE 1 and coupled to a filtering circuit 520 through a second installation detection terminal TE 2 , so is serially connected on a power loop in the LED tube lamp 1200 . Under a detection mode, the detection control circuit 4100 is configured to detect a signal on an input side of the rectifying circuit 510 such as an input signal provided by the external AC power source 508 , and configured to determine whether to prevent a current from passing through the LED tube lamp 1200 according to the detection result. When the LED tube lamp 1200 is not yet correctly/properly installed into a lamp socket, the detection control circuit 4100 detects a relatively small current signal and then assumes/presumes it to be facing or passing through relatively high impedance, so the current-limiting circuit 4200 in response cuts off a current path between the first installation detection terminal TE 1 and second installation detection terminal TE 2 to prevent the LED tube lamp 1200 from operating (i.e., suspending the LED tube lamp 1200 from lighting up). On the other hand, when a relatively large current signal is detected or a relatively small current signal is not detected, the detection control circuit 4100 determines that the LED tube lamp 1200 is correctly/properly installed into a lamp socket, and then the current-limiting circuit 4200 causes or allows the LED tube lamp 1200 to operate in a normal lighting mode (i.e., allowing the LED tube lamp 1200 being lighted up) by maintaining current conduction between the first installation detection terminal TE 1 and second installation detection terminal TE 2 . In some embodiments, when a current signal passing on the input side of the rectifying circuit 510 sampled and detected by the detection control circuit 4100 is equal to or higher than a defined or set current value, the detection control circuit 4100 determines that the LED tube lamp 1200 is correctly/properly installed into a lamp socket and then causes the current-limiting circuit 4200 to conduct current, thereby causing the LED tube lamp 1200 to operate in a normal lighting mode. When the current signal is lower than a defined or set current value, the detection control circuit 4100 determines that the LED tube lamp 1200 is not correctly/properly installed into a lamp socket and thus cuts off the current-limiting circuit 4200 or a current path thereof, thereby causing the LED tube lamp 1200 to enter into a non-conducting state or limiting an effective current value on a power loop in the LED tube lamp 1200 to being smaller than, for example, 5 mA (or 5 MIU according to certain certification standards). The installation detection module 4000 can be regarded as determining whether to allow or limit current conduction based on the detected impedance, thereby causing the LED tube lamp 1200 to operate in a conducting state or enter into a cutoff or current-limited state. Accordingly, the LED tube lamp 1200 using such an installation detection module 4000 has the benefit of avoiding or reducing the risk of electric shock hazard occurring on the body of a user when accidentally touching or holding a conducting part of the LED tube lamp 1200 which is not yet correctly/properly installed into a lamp socket.

Specifically, when (part of) a human body touches or contacts the LED tube lamp, impedance of the human body may cause a change in equivalent impedance on a power loop in the LED tube lamp, so the installation detection module 4000 of FIG. 19 can determine whether a human body has touched or contacted the LED tube lamp by e.g., detecting a change in current/voltage on the power loop, in order to implement the function of electric-shock prevention. The installation detection module 4000 of the present embodiment can determine whether the LED tube lamp 1200 is correctly/properly installed into a lamp socket or whether the body of a user has accidentally touched a conducting part of the LED tube lamp which is not yet correctly/properly installed into a lamp socket, by detecting an electrical signal such as a voltage or current. Further, compared to the embodiment of FIG. 11 , since a signal used for determining the installation state is detected/sampled, by the detection control circuit 4100 , from the input side of the rectifying circuit 510 , the signal characteristics may not be easily influenced by other circuits in the power supply module, so that the possibility of misoperation of the detection control circuit 4100 can be reduced.

From circuit operation perspectives, a method performed by the detection control circuit 4100 and configured to determine, under a detection mode, whether the LED tube lamp 1200 is correctly/properly installed to a lamp socket or whether there is any unintended external impedance being connected to the LED tube lamp 1200 is shown in FIG. 40A . The method includes the following steps: temporarily conducting a detection path for a period and then cutting it off (step S 101 ); sampling an electrical signal on the detection path during the conduction period (step S 102 ); determining whether the sample of electrical signal conforms with predefined signal characteristics (step S 103 ); if the determination result in step S 103 is positive, controlling the current-limiting circuit 4200 to operate in a first state (step S 104 ); and if the determination result in step S 103 is negative, controlling the current-limiting circuit 4200 to operate in a second state (step S 105 ) and then returning to the step S 101 .

In the method of FIG. 40A performed in the embodiment of FIG. 19 , the detection path can be a current path connected between the input side of the rectifying circuit 510 and a ground terminal, and its detailed circuit configurations in the embodiment are presented and illustrated below with reference to FIGS. 20A and 20B . In addition, the detailed description of how to set parameters such as the conduction period, intervals between multiple conduction periods, and the time point to trigger conduction, of the detection path in the detection control circuit 4100 can refer to the relevant embodiments described in the disclosure.

In the step S 101 , conducting the detection path for a period may be implemented by means using pulse signal to control switching of a switch.

In the step S 102 , the sample of electrical signal is a signal that can represent or express impedance variation on the detection path, which signal may comprise a voltage signal, a current signal, a frequency signal, a phase signal, etc.

In the step S 103 , the operation of determining whether the sampled electrical signal conforms to predefined signal characteristics may comprise, for example, a relative relation of the sampled electrical signal to a predefined signal. In some embodiments, the sampled electrical signal that is determined by the detection control circuit 4100 to conform to the predefined signal characteristics may correspond to a determination or state that the LED tube lamp 1200 is correctly/properly connected to the lamp socket or there is no unintended external impedance being coupled to the LED tube lamp 1200 , and the sampled electrical signal that is determined by the detection control circuit 4100 to not conform to the predefined signal characteristics may correspond to a determination or state where the LED tube lamp 1200 is not correctly/properly connected to the lamp socket or there is a foreign external impedance (e.g., a human body impedance, simulated/test human body impedance, or other impedance connected to the lamp and which the lamp is not designed to connect to for proper lighting operations) being coupled to the LED tube lamp 1200 .

In the steps S 104 and S 105 , the first state and the second state can refer to two distinct circuit-configuration states, and may be set according to the configured position and type of the current-limiting circuit 4200 . For example, in the case or embodiment where the current-limiting circuit 4200 is independent of the driving circuit 530 and refers to a switching circuit or a current-limiting circuit that is serially connected on the power loop, the first state is a conducting state (or non-current-limiting state) while the second state is a cutoff state (or current-limiting state).

Detailed operations and example circuit structures for performing the above method in FIG. 40A as under the structure of FIG. 19 are illustrated by descriptions herein of different embodiments of an installation detection module.

FIG. 20A is a block diagram of an installation detection module according to some exemplary embodiments. Referring to FIG. 20A , the installation detection module 4000 a includes a detection pulse generating module 4110 , a control circuit 4120 , a detection determining circuit 4130 , a switching circuit 4200 a , and a detection path circuit 4160 . The detection determining circuit 4130 is coupled to the detection path circuit 4160 through a path 4161 , in order to detect a signal on the detection path circuit 4160 . The detection determining circuit 4130 is also coupled to the control circuit 4120 through a path 4131 , in order to transmit a detection result signal to the control circuit 4120 through the path 4131 . The detection pulse generating module 4110 is coupled to the detection path circuit 4160 through a path 4111 and generates a pulse signal to inform the detection path circuit 4160 of a time point to conduct a detection path or perform the installation detection. The control circuit 4120 stores or latches a detection result according to the detection result signal and is coupled to the switching circuit 4200 a through a path 4121 , in order to transmit or reflect the detection result to the switching circuit 4200 a . The switching circuit 4200 a determines whether to conduct the current path between the installation detection terminals TE 1 and TE 2 (i.e., part of the power loop). The detection path circuit 4160 is coupled to the power loop of the power supply module through a first detection connection terminal DE 1 and a second detection connection terminal DE 2 . Detailed descriptions related to the detection pulse generating module 4110 , control circuit 4120 , detection determining circuit 4130 , and switching circuit 4200 a are similar to those of the embodiment of FIG. 16A , and thus are not repeated here again.

In the present embodiment, the detection path circuit 4160 has the first detection connection terminal DE 1 , the second detection connection terminal DE 2 , and a third detection connection terminal DE 3 , in which the first detection connection terminal DE 1 and second detection connection terminal DE 2 are electrically connected to two input terminals of a rectifying circuit 510 respectively to receive or sample an external driving signal through a first pin 501 and a second pin 502 . The detection path circuit 4160 is configured to rectify the received/sampled external driving signal and to determine under the control of the detection pulse generating module 4110 whether to conduct the rectified external driving signal through a detection path. The detection path circuit 4160 is configured to determine whether to conduct the detection path, in response to the control of the detection pulse generating module 4110 . Detailed circuit operations such as using pulse signal for conducting the detection path and detecting whether there is any external impedance being connected to a conductive part of the LED tube lamp are similar to those described in the embodiments of FIGS. 16B-16D , and thus are not repeatedly described here again.

In some embodiments, the installation detection module 4000 a further includes an emergency control module 4140 and a ballast detection module 4400 , wherein operations of these two modules are similar to those described in the embodiment of FIG. 19A . A main difference of the embodiment of FIG. 24A from some previous embodiments is that the emergency control module 4140 and a ballast detection module 4400 of the embodiment of FIG. 24A are configured to determine and perform later operations by detecting the signal(s) at the input side/terminal of a rectifying circuit 510 , with the other structural and operational similarities to the previous embodiments not described again.

FIG. 20B is a schematic circuit diagram of an installation detection module according to some exemplary embodiments. Configurations and operations of a detection path circuit 4160 of the present embodiment as those in above embodiments of installation detection module (as of FIGS. 16A-16C ). A main difference is that the detection path circuit 4160 of FIG. 20B has current-limiting elements D 91 and D 92 , which are for example, and hereinafter referred to as, a diode D 91 connected between a first rectifying input terminal (or the first pin 501 ) and a first end of a resistor R 91 , and a diode D 92 connected between a second rectifying input terminal (or the second pin 502 ) and the first end of the resistor R 91 , respectively. The diode D 91 has an anode coupled to the first rectifying input terminal or a terminal of the rectifying circuit 510 connected to the first pin 501 , and has a cathode coupled to the first end of the resistor R 91 . The diode D 92 has an anode coupled to the second rectifying input terminal or a terminal of the rectifying circuit 510 connected to the second pin 502 , and has a cathode coupled to the first end of the resistor R 91 . In this embodiment of FIG. 26B , an external driving signal or AC signal received by the first and second pins 501 and 502 are provided to the first end of the resistor R 91 via the diodes D 91 and D 92 . During the positive half cycle of the external driving signal, the diode D 91 is turned on as being forward-biased and the diode D 92 is turned off as being reverse-biased, making the detection path circuit 4160 equivalently form a detection path between the first rectifying input terminal (or pin 501 ) and a second rectifying output terminal 512 , which in this embodiment of FIG. 20B is coupled to a second filtering output terminal 522 (through the switching circuit 4200 a ). During the negative half cycle of the external driving signal, the diode D 91 is turned off as being reverse-biased and the diode D 92 is turned on as being forward-biased, making the detection path circuit 4160 equivalently form a detection path between the second rectifying input terminal (or pin 502 ) and the second rectifying output terminal 512 .

The diodes D 91 and D 92 of the present embodiment serve to limit the direction of the input AC signal, so that the first end of the resistor R 91 receives a positive voltage (compared to the ground level) during both the positive half cycle and the negative half cycle of the input AC signal, and therefore the phase change of the input AC signal, which may affect the voltage on the node X to cause a wrong detection result, is unlikely to affect the voltage on the node X when the diodes D 91 and D 92 are included. Further, compared to some above embodiments, instead of forming a detection path directly connected on the power loop of the power supply module, such as the detection path illustrated in FIGS. 16B and 16C , the detection path circuit 4160 forms a detection path between (either of) the two rectifying input terminals and the second rectifying output terminal 512 (or the ground terminal) through the diodes D 91 and D 92 , which the detection path is separate from or substantially independent from the power loop. Since the detection path circuit 4160 is not directly connected to the power loop and only turned on under a detection mode, the current on the power loop for driving the LED module would not flow through the detection path circuit 4160 when the LED tube lamp is correctly/properly installed in the lamp socket and its power supply module is operating normally. Therefore, since the detection path circuit 4160 does not need to withstand high current when the LED tube lamp's power supply module is operating normally, there is higher flexibility in selecting specifications of the components of the detection path circuit 4160 , and accordingly the power consumption on the detection path circuit 4160 can be lower due to the flexible selecting. Compared to the embodiments illustrated in FIGS. 16B and 16C where a detection path is directly connected to the power loop, since the detection path circuit 4160 of FIG. 20B is not directly connected to the filtering circuit 520 in the power loop, the issue of reverse discharging from a filtering capacitor of the filtering circuit 520 can be avoided, which makes the circuit design simpler.

FIG. 21 is a block diagram of an exemplary power supply module in an LED tube lamp according to some exemplary embodiments. Referring to FIG. 21 , the LED tube lamp 1300 is, for example, configured to receive an external driving signal directly provided by an external AC power source 508 , wherein the external driving signal is input through the live wire (marked as “L”) and the neutral wire (marked as “N”) to two pins 501 and 502 on two ends of the LED tube lamp 1300 . In practical applications, the LED tube lamp 1300 may further have two additional pins 503 and 504 , also on the two ends. Under the structure of the LED tube lamp 1300 having the four pins 501 - 504 , depending on design needs two pins (such as the pins 501 and 503 , or the pins 502 and 504 ) on an end cap coupled to one end of the LED tube lamp 1300 may be electrically connected or mutually electrically independent, but the invention is not limited to any of the mentioned cases. A shock detection module 5000 is disposed inside the LED tube lamp 1300 and includes a detection control circuit 5100 and a current-limiting circuit 5200 . The shock detection module 5000 may be and is hereinafter referred to as an installation detection module 5000 . The current-limiting circuit 5200 may be disposed in combination with a driving circuit 530 , and may be the driving circuit 530 itself or may comprise a bias adjustment circuit (to be further described in embodiments below) configured for controlling the enabling/disabling of the driving circuit 530 . From another perspective, a driving circuit 530 and a shock detection module 5000 as in FIG. 25 may together be regarded or integrated as a driving circuit having the function of electric-shock detection or installation detection. The detection control circuit 5100 is electrically connected to a power loop of the LED tube lamp 1300 through a first detection connection terminal DE 1 and a second detection connection terminal DE 2 , in order to sample and detect, under a detection mode, a signal on the power loop, and is configured to control the current-limiting circuit 5200 according to the detection result, so as to determine whether to prevent a current from passing through the LED tube lamp 1300 . When the LED tube lamp 1300 is not yet correctly/properly installed into a lamp socket, the detection control circuit 5100 detects a relatively small current signal and then assumes/presumes it to be facing or passing through relatively high impedance, so the current-limiting circuit 5200 in response disables the driving circuit 530 to prevent the LED tube lamp 1300 from operating in a normal lighting mode (i.e., suspending the LED tube lamp 1300 from lighting up). On the other hand, when a relatively large current signal is detected or a relatively small current signal is not detected, the detection control circuit 5100 determines that the LED tube lamp 1300 is correctly/properly installed into a lamp socket, and then the current-limiting circuit 5200 allows the LED tube lamp 1300 to operate in a normal lighting mode (i.e., allowing the LED tube lamp 1300 being lighted up) by enabling the driving circuit 530 . In some embodiments, when a current signal on the power loop sampled and detected by the detection control circuit 5100 is equal to or higher than a defined or set current value, the detection control circuit 5100 determines that the LED tube lamp 1300 is correctly/properly installed into a lamp socket and then causes the current-limiting circuit 5200 to enable the driving circuit 530 . But when the current signal sampled and detected by the detection control circuit 5100 is lower than a defined or set current value, the detection control circuit 5100 determines that the LED tube lamp 1300 is not correctly/properly installed into a lamp socket and thus causes the current-limiting circuit 5200 to disable the driving circuit 530 , thereby causing the LED tube lamp 1300 to enter into a non-conducting state or limiting an effective current value on a power loop in the LED tube lamp 1300 to being smaller than, for example, 5 mA (or 5 MIU according to certain certification standards). The installation detection module 5000 can be regarded as determining whether to cause current conduction or cutoff of the current-limiting circuit 5200 based on the detected impedance, thereby causing the LED tube lamp 1300 to operate in a conducting or normally driven state or enter into a current-limited state or non-driven state. Accordingly, an LED tube lamp 1300 using such an installation detection module 5000 has the benefit of avoiding or reducing the risk of electric shock hazard occurring on the body of a user when accidentally touching or holding a conducting part of the LED tube lamp 1300 which is not yet correctly/properly installed into a lamp socket.

Specifically, when (part of) a human body touches or contacts the LED tube lamp, impedance of the human body may cause a change in equivalent impedance on a power loop in the LED tube lamp, so the installation detection module 5000 of FIG. 21 can determine whether a human body has touched or contacted the LED tube lamp by e.g. detecting a change in current/voltage on the power loop, in order to implement the function of electric-shock prevention. The installation detection module 5000 of the present embodiment can determine whether the LED tube lamp 1300 is correctly/properly installed into a lamp socket or whether the body of a user has accidentally touched a conducting part of the LED tube lamp which is not yet correctly/properly installed into a lamp socket, by detecting an electrical signal such as a voltage or current. Further, compared to the embodiments of FIGS. 11 and 19 , since the current limiting function is implemented by controlling the driving circuit 530 , an additional switching circuit, which may be designed for withstanding large current, serially connected on the power loop for providing electric shock protection is not required. The sizes of selected transistor(s) in such a switching circuit are often strictly limited, so when such a switching circuit is omitted or not required, the overall cost of manufacturing the installation detection module 5000 can be significantly reduced.

From circuit operation perspectives, a method performed by the detection control circuit 5100 and configured to determine under a detection mode whether the LED tube lamp 1300 is correctly/properly installed to a lamp socket or whether there is any unintended external impedance being connected to the LED tube lamp 1300 is shown in FIG. 40A . The method includes the following steps: temporarily conducting a detection path for a period and then cutting it off (step S 101 ); sampling an electrical signal on the detection path during the conduction period (step S 102 ); determining whether the sample of electrical signal conforms with predefined signal characteristics (step S 103 ); if the determination result in step S 103 is positive, controlling the current-limiting circuit 5200 to operate in a first state (step S 104 ); and if the determination result in step S 103 is negative, controlling the current-limiting circuit 5200 to operate in a second state (step S 105 ) and then returning to the step S 101 .

In the method of FIG. 40A performed in the embodiment of FIG. 21 , the detection path may be a current path connected to the output side of the rectifying circuit 510 , and its detailed circuit configurations in the embodiment are presented and illustrated below with reference to FIGS. 22A to 26B . And detailed description of how to set parameters such as the conduction period, intervals between multiple conduction periods, and the time point to trigger conduction, of the detection path in the detection control circuit 5100 is also presented below of different embodiments.

In the step S 101 , conducting the detection path for a period may be implemented by means using pulse signal to control switching of a switch.

In the step S 102 , the sample of electrical signal is a signal that can represent or express impedance variation on the detection path, which signal may comprise a voltage signal, a current signal, a frequency signal, a phase signal, etc.

In the step S 103 , the operation of determining whether the sampled electrical signal conforms to predefined signal characteristics may comprise, for example, a relative relation of the sampled electrical signal to a predefined signal. In some embodiments, the sampled electrical signal that is determined by the detection control circuit 5100 to conform with the predefined signal characteristics may correspond to a determination or state that the LED tube lamp 1300 is correctly/properly connected to the lamp socket or there is no unintended external impedance being coupled to the LED tube lamp 1300 , and the sampled electrical signal that is determined to not conform by the detection control circuit 5100 to the predefined signal characteristics may correspond to a determination or state where the LED tube lamp 1300 is not correctly/properly connected to the lamp socket or there is a foreign external impedance (e.g., a human body impedance, simulated/test human body impedance, or other impedance connected to the lamp and which the lamp is not designed to connect to for proper lighting operations) being coupled to the LED tube lamp 1300 .

In the steps S 104 and S 105 performed in the embodiment of FIG. 21 , the first state and the second state are two distinct circuit-configuration states, and may be set according to the configured position and type of the current-limiting circuit 5200 . For example, in the case or embodiment where the current-limiting circuit 5200 refers to a bias adjustment circuit connected to a power supply terminal or enable terminal of a controller of the driving circuit 530 , the first state is a cutoff state (or normal bias state, which allows the driving voltage to be normally supplied to the driving controller) while the second state is a conducting state (or bias adjustment state, which suspends the driving voltage from being supplied to the driving controller). And in the case or embodiment where the current-limiting circuit 5200 refers to a power switch in the driving circuit 530 , the first state is a driving-control state, where switching of the current-limiting circuit 5200 is only controlled by the driving controller in the driving circuit 530 and not affected by the detection control circuit 5100 ; while the second state is a cutoff state.

Detailed operations and example circuit structures for performing the above method in FIG. 40A as under the structure of FIG. 21 are illustrated by descriptions herein of different embodiments of an installation detection module.

Referring to FIG. 21 again, in some embodiments, an LED tube lamp 5000 further includes a flicker suppression circuit 590 , which may be coupled to an LED module and, when the LED tube lamp 5000 is in a normal operation mode, may be configured to adjust a current to be provided to the LED module based on an input power line voltage signal, in order to cause a current flowing through the LED module to be smooth or even and to be unlikely to be affected by ripple voltages.

In some embodiments, the current-limiting circuit 5200 may be disposed in combination with the flicker suppression circuit 590 ; for example, the current-limiting circuit 5200 may be for example (part or all of) the flicker suppression circuit 590 itself, or may be a bias adjustment circuit for controlling enabling and/or disabling of the flicker suppression circuit 590 , which will be further explained below in connection with certain embodiments.

Although the same functional block is used to illustrate a driving circuit 530 and a flicker suppression circuit 590 in embodiments of FIG. 21 , they are not limited to being combined together. In actual practice, a driving circuit 530 and a flicker suppression circuit 590 may coexist or be present in a power supply module of an LED tube lamp.

Specifically, the detection control circuit 5100 of FIG. 21 is electrically connected to a power loop of the LED tube lamp 1300 through a first detection connection terminal DE 1 and a second detection connection terminal DE 2 , in order to sample and detect, under a detection mode, a signal on the power loop, and is configured to control the current-limiting circuit 5200 according to the detection result, so as to determine whether to prevent a current from passing through the LED tube lamp 1300 . When the LED tube lamp 1300 is not yet correctly/properly installed into a lamp socket, the detection control circuit 5100 detects a relatively small current signal and then assumes/presumes it to be facing or passing through relatively high impedance, so the current-limiting circuit 5200 in response disables the flicker suppression circuit 590 in order to prevent the LED tube lamp 1300 from operating in a normal operation mode or lighting up. On the other hand, when a relatively large current signal is detected or a relatively small current signal is not detected, the detection control circuit 5100 judges that the LED tube lamp 1300 is correctly/properly installed into a lamp socket, and then the current-limiting circuit 5200 enables the flicker suppression circuit 590 in order to cause the LED tube lamp 1300 to operate in a normal operation mode, wherein the LED tube lamp 1300 may light up and the enabled flicker suppression circuit 590 adjusts a current flowing through an LED module based on variation in a voltage signal. In some embodiments, when a current signal on the power loop sampled and detected by the detection control circuit 5100 is equal to or higher than a defined or set current value, the detection control circuit 5100 judges that the LED tube lamp 1300 is correctly/properly installed into a lamp socket and then causes the current-limiting circuit 5200 to enable the flicker suppression circuit 590 to suppress variation in current in response to ripple voltages on the power line voltage signal, in order to suppress the flicker problem in the LED tube lamp. But when the current signal sampled and detected by the detection control circuit 5100 is lower than a defined or set current value, the detection control circuit 5100 judges that the LED tube lamp 1300 is not correctly/properly installed into a lamp socket and thus causes the current-limiting circuit 5200 to disable the flicker suppression circuit 590 , thereby causing the LED tube lamp 1300 to enter into a non-conducting state or limiting an effective current value on a power loop in the LED tube lamp 1300 to being smaller than for example 5 mA or 5 MIU according to certain standards.

FIG. 22A is a block diagram of an installation detection module according to an exemplary embodiment. Referring to FIG. 22A , the installation detection module 5000 a includes a detection pulse generating module 5110 (which may be referred to a first circuit 5110 ), a control circuit 5120 (which may be referred to a third circuit 3480 ), a detection determining circuit 5130 (which may be referred to a second circuit 5130 ), and a detection path circuit 5160 (which may be referred to a fourth circuit 5160 ). The detection pulse generating module 5110 is electrically connected to the detection path circuit 5160 via a path 5111 and is configured to generate a control signal having at least one pulse. The detection path circuit 5160 is electrically connected to the power loop of the power supply module via a first detection connection terminal DE 1 and a second detection connection terminal DE 2 and is configured to turn on a detection path during pulse-on period of the control signal. The detection determining circuit 5130 is electrically connected to the detection path via a path 5161 , and is configured to determine an installation state between the LED tube lamp and the lamp socket according to a signal feature on the detection path. A detection result signal corresponding to the determination result is generated and transmitted to the control circuit 5120 via a path 5131 . The control circuit 5120 is electrically connected to the driving circuit 530 via a path 5121 and is configured to affect or adjust the bias of the driving circuit to control the operating state of the driving circuit 530 , in which the driving circuit 530 itself or the power switch of the driving circuit 530 can be regarded as a current-limiting circuit 5200 a . In such a case, the control circuit 5120 may act or be regarded as the driving controller of the driving circuit 530 .

Based on the aspects of the operation of the installation detection module 5000 a , when the LED tube lamp is powered up, the detection pulse generating module 5110 is enabled in response to the connected power source and generates pulse to temporarily turn-on or conduct the detection path formed by the detection path circuit 5160 . During the period of the detection path being turned on, the detection determining circuit 5130 samples signal on the detection path to determine whether the LED tube lamp is correctly installed in the lamp socket or whether a leakage current is generated by touching the conductive part of the LED tube lamp. The detection determining circuit 5130 generates a corresponding detection result signal, according to the determination result, and transmits it to the control circuit 5120 . When the control circuit 5120 receives the detection result signal indicating the LED tube lamp has been correctly installed in the lamp socket, the control circuit 5120 transmits a corresponding installation state signal to control the driving circuit 530 to normally perform power conversion for providing electricity to the LED module. On the contrary, when the control circuit 5120 receives the detection result signal indicating the LED tube lamp is not correctly installed in the lamp socket, the control circuit 5120 transmits a corresponding installation state signal to control the driving circuit 530 to stop its normal operation or to be disabled. Since the driving circuit 530 disables, the current flowing through the power loop can be limited to less than a safety value (e.g., 5 MIU).

The configuration and operation of the detection pulse generating module 5110 , the detection determining circuit 5130 and the detection path circuit 5160 can be seen referring to the description of relevant embodiments of the present disclosure. The difference between the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 22A and the other relevant embodiments is that the control circuit 5120 can be configured for controlling the operation of the driving circuit 530 in the back end, so that the driving circuit 530 can be disabled by adjusting the bias voltage when the LED tube lamp is not correctly installed or when the risk of electric shock exists. Under such configuration, the switch circuit (e.g., switch circuit 3200 , 3200 a , 3200 b , 3200 c , or 3200 d ), which is disposed on the power loop and thus required to withstand high current, can be omitted, and therefore the cost of the overall installation detection module can be significantly reduced. On the other hand, since the leakage current is limited by controlling the bias voltage of the driving circuit 530 through the control circuit 5120 , the circuit design of the driving circuit 530 does not need to be changed, so as to make the commercialization easier.

In an exemplary embodiment, the detection pulse generating module 5110 , detection path circuit 5160 , detection determining circuit 5130 , and control circuit 5120 can be respectively implemented by, but not limited to, the circuit configurations illustrated in FIGS. 22B to 22G . Detailed operations of each of the module and circuits are described below with reference to FIGS. 22B to 22G .

FIG. 22B is a schematic circuit diagram of the detection pulse generating module according to some embodiments. Referring to FIG. 22B , the detection pulse generating module 5110 includes resistors Ra 1 and Ra 2 , a capacitor Ca 1 and a pulse generating circuit 5112 . The resistor Ra 1 has a first end and a second end, wherein the first end of the resistor Ra 1 is electrically connected to the rectifying circuit 510 via the rectifying output terminal 511 . The resistor Ra 2 has a first end electrically connected to the second end of the resistor Ra 1 and a second end electrically connected to the rectifying circuit 510 via the rectifying output terminal 512 . The capacitor Ca 1 is connected to the resistor Ra 2 in parallel. The pulse generating circuit 5112 has an input terminal connected to a connection terminal of the resistors Ra 2 and Ca 1 and an output terminal connected to the detection path circuit 5160 and for outputting a control signal having pulse DP.

In some embodiments, the resistors Ra 1 and Ra 2 form a voltage division resistor string configured to sample a bus voltage (i.e., the voltage on the power line of the power supply module). The pulse generating circuit 5112 determines a time point for generating the pulse DP according to the bus voltage and outputs the pulse DP as the control signal Sc based on a pulse-width setting. For example, the pulse generating circuit 5112 may output the pulse DP after the bus voltage rises or falls across zero-voltage point for a period, so that the issue of misjudgment caused by performing installation detection on the zero-voltage point can be addressed. The characteristics of the pulse waveform and the pulse interval setting can be seen by referring to the description of relevant embodiments, and thus are not repeated herein.

FIG. 22C is a schematic circuit diagram of the detection path circuit according to some embodiments. Referring to FIG. 22C , the detection path circuit 5160 includes a resistor Ra 3 , a transistor Ma 1 and a diode Da 1 . The resistor Ra 3 has a first end connected to the rectifying output terminal 511 . The transistor Ma 1 is, for example, a MOSFET or a BJT, and has a first terminal connected to a second end of the resistor Ra 3 , a second terminal connected to the rectifying output terminal 512 , and a control terminal receiving the control signal Sc. The diode Da 1 has an anode connected to the first end of the resistor Ra 3 and the rectifying output terminal 511 and a cathode connected to the input terminal of the filtering circuit in the back end. Taking a pi-filter as an example, the cathode of the diode Da 1 can be regarded as electrically connected to the connection terminal of the capacitor 725 and the inductor 726 .

In the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 22C , the resistor Ra 3 and the transistor Ma 1 form a detection path, which can be conducted when the transistor Ma 1 is turned on by the control signal Sc. During the period of the detection path being conducted, the detection voltage Vdet changes due to current flowing through the detection path, and the amount of the voltage changes is determined according to the equivalent impedance of the detection path. Taking the detection voltage Vdet, which samples from the first end of the resistor Ra 3 , as shown in FIG. 22C as an example, during the period of the detection path being conducted, the detection voltage Vdet substantially equals the bus voltage on the rectifying output terminal 511 if there is no body impedance being electrically connected (e.g., if the LED tube lamp is correctly installed); and if there is a body impedance electrically connected between the rectifying output terminal 511 and the ground terminal, the detection voltage Vdet changes into a voltage division of the resistor and the body impedance. Accordingly, the detection voltage Vdet can indicate whether a body impedance is electrically connected to the LED tube lamp.

FIG. 22D is a schematic circuit diagram of the detection determining circuit according to some embodiments. Referring to FIG. 22D , the detection determining circuit 5130 includes a sampling circuit 5132 , a comparison circuit 5133 and a determining circuit 5134 . According to some embodiments, the sampling circuit 5133 may sample the detection voltage Vdet according to a set time point and generate a plurality of sample signals Ssp_t 1 to Ssp_tn, respectively corresponding to the detection voltage Vdet at different time points. The comparison circuit 5133 is electrically connected to the sampling circuit 5132 and receives the sample signals Ssp_t 1 to Ssp_tn. In some embodiments, part or all of the sample signals Ssp_t 1 to Ssp_tn are selected to be compared with each other by the comparison circuit 5133 to generate a comparison result Scp. In some embodiments, the comparison circuit 5133 calculates a difference between any two of the sample signals Ssp_t 1 to Ssp_tn and then compares the difference with a preset signal. In some embodiments, the comparison circuit 5133 compares the sample signals Ssp_t 1 to Ssp_tn with a preset signal to generate a comparison result Scp. In some embodiments, the comparison circuit 5133 compares two sample signals at adjacent time points to generate a corresponding comparison result Scp. The comparison result Scp will be outputted to the determining circuit 5134 after being generated.

Specifically, when the LED tube lamp is correctly installed into a lamp socket (or when there is no touching/connecting external impedance), the first detection connection terminal DE 1 (as the first rectifying output terminal 511 ) and second detection connection terminal DE 2 (as the second rectifying output terminal 512 ) of the detection path circuit 5160 are equivalently directly connected to the external power source, so no matter whether the detection path of the detection path circuit 5160 is conducted or not, the voltage waveform of the detected voltage Vdet varies along with the phase change in the external driving signal and thus is in a complete waveform of a sinusoidal signal. Therefore, when the LED tube lamp is correctly installed into a lamp socket, no matter whether the detection path of the detection path circuit 5160 is conducted or not, the sampling circuit 5132 may generate the plurality of sample signals Ssp_t 1 to Ssp_tn having the same voltage level or close voltage levels respectively.

On the other hand, when the LED tube lamp is not correctly installed into a lamp socket, or when there is touching/connecting external impedance (e.g., body impedance), the first detection connection terminal DE 1 is equivalent to electrically connect, through the external impedance, to the external power source. During a time when the detection path is being conducted, the detected voltage Vdet is dropped due to voltage division between the external impedance and the impedance on the detection path (such as resistor Ra 3 ), so as to cause the waveform of the detected voltage Vdet to present discontinuous or non-smooth variations or changes in voltage levels, which means the voltage level has abruptly changed while the detection path is being conducted. During a time when the detection path is not being conducted, since at this time there is typically no conducting current path in the power loop of the LED tube lamp, there is almost and ideally no voltage drop at the first detection connection terminal DE 1 , and thus the waveform of the detected voltage Vdet maintains its normal complete sinusoidal form. As a result, an installation detection module may determine whether there is an external body impedance touching the LED tube lamp, by identifying the difference in characteristics between voltage waveforms of the detected voltage Vdet. The following is a description of several exemplary mechanisms of this determining.

Refer to FIGS. 22D and 22E , which is a signal waveform diagram of an installation detection module according to some embodiments. In the present embodiment, the sampling circuit 5132 may sample the detected voltage Vdet at the same phase point during each period of the detected voltage Vdet, in order to sample at least one signal level (such as the sample signal Ssp_t 1 ) at the same phase point in one period of the detected voltage Vdet and during a pulse period DPW and sample at least one signal level (such as the sample signal Ssp_t 2 ) at the same phase point in another period of the detected voltage Vdet and outside a pulse period DPW. When the LED tube lamp is not correctly installed into a lamp socket, a signal level sampled by the sampling circuit 5132 during the pulse period DPW (e.g., the sample signal Ssp_t 1 ) is lower than that sampled by the sampling circuit 5132 outside of each pulse period DPW (e.g., the sample signals Ssp_t 2 ). As a result, the comparison result Scp corresponding to the installation state can be generated by selecting and comparing part or all of the sample signals Ssp_t 1 to Ssp_tn, by comparing part or all of the sample signals Ssp_t 1 to Ssp_tn with a defined signal, or by comparing a signal, obtained by calculating a difference between two of the sample signals Ssp_t 1 to Ssp_tn, with a defined signal. For example, the comparison circuit 5133 may generate a comparison result Scp with a first logic level when the voltage levels of the sample signals Ssp_t 1 and Ssp_t 2 are the same or very close, and may generate a comparison result Scp with a second logic level when the difference between the voltage levels of the sample signals Ssp_t 1 and Ssp_t 2 reaches a set value. The comparison result Scp with the first logic level refers to the condition in which the LED tube lamp is correctly installed into a lamp socket, while the comparison result Scp with the second logic level refers to the condition in which the LED tube lamp is not correctly installed into a lamp socket.

The determining circuit 5134 receives the comparison result Scp and outputs a detection result signal Sdr. In some embodiments, the determining circuit 5134 can be configured to output the detection result signal Sdr indicating correct installation after (continuously or discontinuously) receiving a certain number of positive comparison results Scp, wherein the positive comparison result Scp refers to the comparison result Scp meeting the requirement of a correct installation condition, for example, the level of the sample signal is higher than the preset signal.

Referring to both FIGS. 22D and 22F , where FIG. 22F is a signal waveform diagram of an installation detection module (as 5000 a ) according to some embodiments. In the present embodiment, when the LED tube lamp is correctly installed into a lamp socket, the voltage level of the detected voltage Vdet during each pulse period DPW is approximately smoothly changing from that of the detected voltage Vdet at the starting point and ending point of the pulse period DPW, which smooth changing is illustrated by the broken line along the detected voltage signal Vdet during the pulse period DPW. On the contrary, when the LED tube lamp is not correctly installed into a lamp socket, the voltage level of the detected voltage Vdet during each pulse period DPW is significantly lower than that of the detected voltage Vdet at the starting point and ending point of the pulse period DPW, and thus is not smoothly changing from that of the detected voltage Vdet at the starting point and ending point of the pulse period DPW, which non-smooth changing is illustrated by the solid line along the detected voltage signal Vdet during the pulse period DPW. Therefore, the sampling circuit 5132 may be configured to sample the detected voltage Vdet at least one time close to and either before the starting point or after the ending point of a pulse signal DP 1 , and configured to sample the detected voltage Vdet at least one time during the pulse signal DP 1 , so that during one period of the detected voltage Vdet at least one signal level (such as the sample signal Ssp_t 1 ) outside a pulse period DPW is sampled and at least one signal level (such as the sample signal Ssp_t 2 ) during the pulse period DPW is sampled.

The case of the sampling circuit 5132 sampling the detected voltage Vdet before the starting point of a pulse signal DP 1 is taken as an example. When the LED tube lamp is correctly installed into a lamp socket, the sampling circuit 5132 samples to get a signal voltage level Vt 1 (corresponding to the sample signal Ssp_t 1 ) at a time point t 1 before entering into a pulse period DPW, which signal voltage level Vt 1 is lower than a signal voltage level Vt 3 (corresponding to the sample signal Ssp_t 2 ) obtained by sampling at a time point t 2 during the pulse period DPW. On the contrary, when the LED tube lamp is not correctly installed into a lamp socket, the sampling circuit 5132 samples to get a signal voltage level Vt 1 (corresponding to the sample signal Ssp_t 1 ) at a time point t 1 before entering into a pulse period DPW, which signal voltage level Vt 1 is higher than a signal voltage level Vt 3 (corresponding to the sample signal Ssp_t 2 ) obtained by sampling at a time point t 2 during the pulse period DPW.

The comparison circuit 5133 may be configured to generate a comparison result Scp corresponding to an installation state by comparing the sample signal Ssp_t 2 and the sample signal Ssp_t 1 , comparing each of the sample signal Ssp_t 2 and the sample signal Ssp_t 1 with a set value, or comparing a difference between the sample signal Ssp_t 2 and the sample signal Ssp_t 1 with a set value.

Operations of comparing the sample signals Ssp_t 1 and Ssp_t 2 are taken as an example. For this case, the comparison circuit 5133 may be configured to generate a comparison result Scp of a first logic level when the signal voltage level (such as Vt 3 ) of the sample signal Ssp_t 2 is greater than or equal to the signal voltage level (such as Vt 1 ) of the sample signal Ssp_t 1 ; and configured to generate a comparison result Scp of a second logic level when the signal voltage level (such as Vt 2 ) of the sample signal Ssp_t 2 is smaller than the signal voltage level (such as Vt 1 ) of the sample signal Ssp_t 1 . From another perspective, the operations of comparing the sample signals Ssp_t 1 and Ssp_t 2 can be described as the following steps: comparing the sample signal Ssp_t 1 (e.g., voltage level Vt 1 ) with the sample signal Ssp_t 2 (e.g., voltage level Vt 2 or Vt 3 ); generating an indication (e.g., comparison result Scp) with a first logic level for indicating a foreign external impedance is electrically connected to the LED tube lamp (i.e., the LED tube lamp is incorrectly installed) when sample signal Ssp_t 1 (e.g., voltage level Vt 1 ) is greater than sample signal Ssp_t 2 (e.g., voltage level Vt 2 ); and generating the indication with a second logic level for indicating a foreign external impedance is not electrically connected to the LED tube lamp (i.e., the LED tube lamp is correctly installed) when sample signal Ssp_t 1 (e.g. voltage level Vt 1 ) is not greater than sample signal Ssp_t 2 (e.g., voltage level Vt 3 ).

Operations of comparing each of the sample signals Ssp_t 1 and Ssp_t 2 with a set value are taken as an example. For this case, the set value may be designed to be, for example but it's not limited to, a value between such signal voltage levels Vt 1 and Vt 3 . In some embodiments, the comparison circuit 5133 may be configured to generate a comparison result Scp of a first logic level when the signal voltage level (such as Vt 3 ) of the sample signal Ssp_t 2 is greater than the set value and the signal voltage level (such as Vt 1 ) of the sample signal Ssp_t 1 is smaller than the set value; and configured to generate a comparison result Scp of a second logic level when each of the signal voltage level (such as Vt 2 ) of the sample signal Ssp_t 2 and the signal voltage level (such as Vt 1 ) of the sample signal Ssp_t 1 is smaller than the set value. From another perspective, the operations of comparing each of the sample signals Ssp_t 1 and Ssp_t 2 with a set value can be described as the following steps: respectively comparing the sample signal Ssp_t 1 (e.g., voltage level Vt 1 ) and Ssp_t 2 (e.g., voltage Vt 2 or Vt 3 ) with a set value; generating an indication (e.g., comparison result Scp) with a first logic level for indicating a foreign external impedance is electrically connected to the LED tube lamp (i.e., the LED tube lamp is incorrectly installed) when both sample signal Ssp_t 1 (e.g., voltage level Vt 1 ) and sample signal Ssp_t 2 (e.g., voltage level Vt 2 ) are not greater than the set value; and generating the indication with a second logic level for indicating a foreign external impedance is not electrically connected to the LED tube lamp (i.e., the LED tube lamp is correctly installed) when sample signal Ssp_t 1 (e.g. voltage level Vt 1 ) is not greater than the set value and sample signal Ssp_t 2 (e.g., voltage level Vt 3 ) is greater than the set value.

Operations of comparing the difference between the sample signals Ssp_t 1 and Ssp_t 2 with a set value are taken as an example. For this case, the set value may be designed to be, for example, a value between (Vt 2 −Vt 1 ) and (Vt 3 −Vt 1 ). Specifically, if the signal voltage level Vt 1 is 20V, the signal voltage level Vt 2 is 12V, and the signal voltage level Vt 3 is 25V, then the set value may be designed to be between −8V (=Vt 2 −Vt 1 ) and 5V (=Vt 3 −Vt 1 ). In some embodiments, the set value may be designed to be 0V. Also for this case, the comparison circuit 5133 may be configured to generate a comparison result Scp of a first logic level when the difference (such as Vt 3 −Vt 1 ) in signal voltage level between the sample signals Ssp_t 2 and Ssp_t 1 is greater than or equal to the set value; and configured to generate a comparison result Scp of a second logic level when the difference (such as Vt 2 −Vt 1 ) in signal voltage level between the sample signals Ssp_t 2 and Ssp_t 1 is smaller than the set value. Such a difference as described for this case may be calculated by one of different methods according to different circuit designs of relevant structures related to the comparison circuit 5133 , and is for example calculated by a voltage level sampled later minus a voltage level sampled earlier, calculated by a voltage level sampled earlier minus a voltage level sampled later, or calculated by taking the absolute value of the difference between two sampled voltage levels (or a greater sampled voltage level minus a smaller sampled voltage level), and the present invention is not limited to any of these ways of calculation. From another perspective, the operations of comparing the difference between the sample signal Ssp_t 1 and Ssp_t 2 with a set value can be described as the following steps: calculating a difference between the sample signal Ssp_t 1 (e.g., voltage level Vt 1 ) and Ssp_t 2 (e.g., voltage Vt 2 or Vt 3 ); comparing the difference with a set value; generating an indication (e.g., comparison result Scp) with a first logic level for indicating a foreign external impedance is electrically connected to the LED tube lamp (i.e., the LED tube lamp is incorrectly installed) when the difference is greater than the set value; and generating the indication with a second logic level for indicating a foreign external impedance is not electrically connected to the LED tube lamp (i.e., the LED tube lamp is correctly installed) when the difference is not greater than the set value.

In each of the above three cases of comparing operations, a comparison result Scp of a first logic level indicates conforming to the condition that the LED tube lamp is correctly installed into a lamp socket, while a comparison result Scp of a second logic level indicates conforming to the condition that the LED tube lamp is not correctly installed into a lamp socket.

It should be noted that the described sampling of the detected voltage Vdet and ways of comparing by the comparison circuit 5133 are not only applicable to the installation detection module (as 5000 a ) in the embodiment of FIG. 22A , but also applicable to an installation detection module in other embodiments, including especially an embodiment where there is a detection path circuit such as described herein.

In some embodiments, the above described circuit operations may be performed or realized by the steps of the flowchart in FIG. 40E , which include receiving a detection voltage signal (such as Vdet) on a detection path circuit (such as 5160 ) (step S 501 ); sampling the detection voltage signal during a conduction state of the detection path circuit (such as during a pulse period DPW of a pulse signal), to generate a first sample signal (step S 502 ); sampling the detection voltage signal during a cutoff state of the detection path circuit (such as under the control of a pulse signal), to generate a second sample signal (step S 503 ); and judging whether the LED tube lamp meets a correct-installation condition according to the voltage levels of the first sample signal and the second sample signal (step S 504 ).

As illustrated by the signal waveforms of FIG. 22E , the step S 502 may comprise sampling a detection voltage signal Vdet at a time point t 1 to generate a first sample signal Ssp_t 1 during a pulse period DPW, and the step S 503 may comprise sampling the detection voltage signal Vdet at a time point t 2 to generate a second sample signal Ssp_t 2 outside a pulse period DPW. In practice, the step S 502 and the step S 503 may for example be performed by using a pulse signal DP 1 /DP 2 to trigger a sampling circuit 5132 to perform a first-time signal sampling followed by performing signal sampling later at constant intervals for two times, wherein the constant interval may be designed to have a length of one or an integer multiple of a half signal period of a power supply signal from an AC power grid, such as a length in the range of between 10 ms (corresponding to a half signal period of a 50 Hz signal) and 16.67 ms (corresponding to a half signal period of a 60 Hz signal), but the present invention is not limited to any of these two lengths.

As illustrated by the signal waveforms of FIG. 22F , the step S 502 may comprise sampling a detection voltage signal Vdet at a time point t 2 to generate a first sample signal Ssp_t 2 during a pulse period DPW, and the step S 503 may comprise sampling the detection voltage signal Vdet at a time point t 1 to generate a second sample signal Ssp_t 1 outside a pulse period DPW. From these two ways of performing the steps S 502 and S 503 as illustrated by FIGS. 22E and 22F , it is understood that according to the distinct adopted detection structure or plan, the order or sequence of performing the steps S 502 and S 503 of FIG. 40E may be interchanged, which means in some embodiments the step S 502 is performed before performing the step S 503 , but in some other embodiments the step S 503 is performed before performing the step S 502 .

FIG. 22G is a circuit diagram illustrating a control circuit of an installation detection module according to some embodiments. Referring to FIG. 22G , the control circuit 5120 has an input terminal configured to receive a detection result signal Sdr and an output terminal electrically connected to a controller 633 of a driving circuit 630 , which driving circuit 630 may have configurations similar to those of a described embodiment herein of FIG. 13B . So the driving circuit 630 ′ s configurations are not repeatedly described.

When the control circuit 5120 receives a detection result signal Sdr indicating correct installation state (the external impedance does not connect to the LED tube lamp), the control circuit 5120 transmits a corresponding installation state signal Sidm to the controller 633 of the driving circuit 630 , which controller 633 is then enabled or activated in response to the installation state signal Sidm and controls the operation of a switch 635 so as to generate a driving signal to drive an LED module. On the other hand, when the control circuit 5120 receives a detection result signal Sdr indicating incorrect/improper installation state (the external impedance connects to the LED tube lamp), the control circuit 5120 transmits a corresponding installation state signal Sidm to the controller 633 of the driving circuit 630 , which controller 633 is then disabled or not activated, in response to the installation state signal Sidm.

In some embodiments, the controller 633 and the control circuit 5120 of FIG. 22G may be integrated together, wherein the controller 633 and the control circuit 5120 as a whole may be regarded as a driving controller for the driving circuit 630 of FIG. 22G .

Here an exemplary embodiment is described with reference to FIG. 22G which illustrates a circuit diagram of the detection circuit and the driving circuit according to one embodiment. The detection circuit of the present embodiment is similar to the embodiments of FIGS. 22B to 22G and includes a detection pulse generating module 5110 , a control circuit 5120 , a detection determining circuit 5130 , and a detection path circuit 5160 . The driving circuit 1030 takes the power conversion circuit structure in FIG. 7B for example and includes a controller 1033 , a diode 1034 , a transistor 1035 , an inductor 1036 , a capacitor 1037 , and a resistor 1038 .

Compared to the embodiments of FIGS. 22B to 22G , the detection path circuit 5160 is for example in a configuration similar to that of a detection path circuit 3660 in FIG. 17B , and includes a transistor Ma 1 and a resistor Ra 1 . The drain terminal of the transistor Ma 1 is connected to the common end of the capacitors 725 and 727 , and the source terminal of the transistor Ma 1 is connected to a first end of the resistor Ra 1 . The second end of the resistor Ra 1 is coupled to the first ground terminal GND 1 . And it is noted that the first ground terminal GND 1 and the second ground terminal GND 2 of the LED module 50 may be the same ground terminal or two electrically independent ground terminals, while the present invention is not limited to any one of these options.

The detection pulse generating module 5110 is coupled to the gate terminal of the transistor, and is used to control conduction state of the transistor Ma 1 . The detection determining circuit 5130 is coupled to a first end of the resistor Ra 1 and the controller 1033 , and is configured to sample an electrical signal on the first end of the resistor Ra 1 and then compare the sampled electrical signal with a reference signal, so as to determine whether the LED tube lamp is correctly installed. The detection determining circuit 5130 generates and transmits an installation detection signal Sidm to the controller 1033 according to the comparison result. In this embodiment, operation details and characteristics about the detection pulse generating module 5110 , the control circuit 5120 , the detection determining circuit 5130 , and the detection path circuit 5160 can be similar to those about the detection pulse generating module 3610 , the detection path circuit 3660 , and the detection determining circuit 3630 of FIG. 17B and thus are not repeatedly described here.

In summary, regarding the power supply module described above, the installation detection function and the electric shock protection function are integrated into the driving circuit, so that the driving circuit becomes the driving circuit having the installation detection function and the electric shock protection function. Specifically, for the circuit structure in one embodiment, only an additional detection circuit, for detecting the electrical signal on the power loop/detection path, is used to implement the installation detection function and the electric shock protection function with the driving circuit 1030 . For example, through adjusting a control method in the driving circuit 1030 , the detection pulse generating module, the detection result latching circuit, the detection determining circuit and the switch circuit of the installation detection module 3000 can be implemented by the hardware circuit structure of an existing driving circuit 1030 , without requiring additional circuit elements. Since the detection pulse generating module, the detection result latching circuit, the detection determining circuit and the switch circuit are not required, the cost of the overall power supply module can be effectively reduced. In addition, since the circuit components/elements are reduced, the power supply module may have more area for layout and the power consumption can be reduced. The saved power can be used for driving the LED module so as to enhance the luminous efficiency, and the heat caused by the power supply module can be reduced as well.

Configuration and operation method of the detection circuit in the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 22H can be similar to the detection pulse generating module, the detection path circuit, and the detection determining circuit of the installation detection module 3000 , and the detection result latching circuit and the switch circuit of the installation detection module 3000 are replaced in the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 22H by existing controller and power switch of the driving circuit 1030 . In the exemplary embodiment of FIG. 22C , through a specific configuration of the detection path circuit 5160 , the format of the installation detection signal Sidm can easily be designed to be compatible with signal format of the controller 1033 , so that circuit design difficult can be significantly reduced on the basis of a reduced circuit complexity.

It's noted that although the embodiment of FIG. 22H is described and illustrated to include the configuration of the detection path circuit 3660 in FIG. 17B , the present invention is not limited to this configuration of FIG. 17B . In other applications, the detection path circuit may be configured as in the above other embodiments described, to implement the transient sampling or detection of the electrical signal.

In some embodiments, the installation detection module 5000 a shown in FIG. 22A may selectively include a dimming circuit 5170 for realizing a dimming function (or adjusting of brightness of a lighting LED module) of an LED tube lamp. As shown in FIG. 22A , the dimming circuit 5170 is electrically connected to a first detection connection terminal DE 1 through a path 5171 , and electrically connected to the control circuit 5120 through a path 5172 . In a normal operation mode, the dimming circuit 5170 may be configured to generate a dimming signal based on a received electrical signal, and to provide the dimming signal to the control circuit 5120 through the path 5172 . Then based on the received dimming signal the control circuit 5120 is configured to adjust controlling of a power switch, in order to adjust the luminance of a lighting LED module corresponding to the dimming signal. Though the dimming circuit 5170 is illustrated in FIG. 22A as being directly connected to a first detection connection terminal DE 1 for receiving an electrical signal, the present invention is not limited to such a connection.

Specifically, in the process of operations for normally lighting up an LED tube lamp, the dimming circuit 5170 may be configured to sample an electrical signal on a power loop to obtain a dimming message therein, wherein the dimming message may originate from a message which was converted or changed into a corresponding signal feature according to a specific way or specified rule and carried into an input power signal for the LED tube lamp, i.e. the input power signal is a carrier signal. A way for the dimming circuit 5170 to obtain the dimming message may be by performing reverse conversion on or demodulating the signal feature obtained by the sampling. Based on the obtained dimming message, the dimming circuit 5170 may further generate a dimming signal conforming to the input-voltage rating of the control circuit 5120 , which may be then a driving controller for a driving circuit 530 , for causing the control circuit 5120 to perform dimming control according to the generated dimming signal.

Upon an LED tube lamp starting to receive electrical power and then performing electric-shock detection (as in a detection mode), since the LED tube lamp is not yet lighted up, there is no need yet to perform a dimming function, so in some embodiments during the detection mode the dimming circuit 5170 is maintained in a disabled state, and the dimming circuit 5170 is only enabled, which may be realized by an enabling signal issued by the control circuit 5120 , after confirming that the detection is finished, in order to avoid misoperation or wrong operation of the control circuit 5120 due to influence of the dimming signal.

In some embodiments, a dimming circuit 5170 is electrically connected to an input terminal of a rectifying circuit (such as 510 ), for obtaining a dimming message by sampling a not yet rectified external driving signal.

In some embodiments, a dimming circuit 5170 is configured to receive a dimming control signal through an independent or separate port or interface, and to generate a dimming signal corresponding to the received dimming control signal.

In some embodiments, the detection pulse generating module 5110 , control circuit 5120 , detection determining circuit 5130 , and dimming circuit 5170 of FIG. 22A may be integrated together into a unit to act as a driving controller for the driving circuit 530 in order to control operation of a power switch, for the power supply module to have the integrated functions of constant-current driving, electric-shock detection, and dimming control. The following description further explains a whole circuit structure and configurations of a power supply module having the integrated functions of constant-current driving, electric-shock detection, and dimming control with reference to FIG. 26I . FIG. 22I is a schematic diagram of a power supply module having the functions of constant-current driving, electric-shock detection, and dimming control according to some embodiments. Referring to FIG. 22I , the power supply module of such an embodiment includes a rectifying circuit 510 , a filtering circuit 520 , a driving circuit 1530 , and a detection path circuit 5160 . Configurations and operations of the passive components 1534 , 1536 , and 1537 in the rectifying circuit 510 , filtering circuit 520 , and driving circuit 1530 are similar or analogous to those of such components in other embodiments described above. A main difference between the embodiment of FIG. 22I and the embodiments previously described is that the driving circuit 1530 of the embodiment of FIG. 22I includes a multi-function or multi-function driving controller 533 m having the integrated functions of constant-current driving, electric-shock detection, and dimming control. The multi-function driving controller 533 m may include a control circuit 5120 m and a power switch 1535 , wherein the control circuit 5120 m under a detection mode is configured to cause periodically brief conduction of the detection path circuit 5160 in order to judge the installation state of the LED tube lamp. Upon judging that the LED tube lamp is correctly installed into a lamp socket the control circuit 5120 m is configured to enter into a normal operation mode to issue a lighting control signal for controlling switching of the power switch 1535 , in order for the driving circuit 1530 to generate a stable current for driving an LED module 50 . Furthermore, in the normal operation mode, the control circuit 5120 m may be configured to obtain a dimming message according to a sample electrical signal from the detection path circuit 5160 , and configured to adjust the lighting control signal based on the obtained dimming message, in order to adjust the luminance of the LED module 50 accordingly. For example, when obtaining a dimming message indicating a 50% of luminance, the control circuit 5120 m may be configured to adjust the duty cycle of the power switch 1535 to be half of its rated value, which rated duty-cycle value corresponds to 100% of the rated luminance, in order to reduce the effective value of an output current of the driving circuit 1530 , thereby reducing the luminance of the LED module 50 to be half of its rated luminance.

In some embodiments, if the sampling point of the detection path circuit 5160 is directly connected to the first detection connection terminal DE 1 , the control circuit 5120 m may be regarded as sampling an electrical signal directly from the first detection connection terminal DE 1 or the power loop.

In some embodiments, the detection path circuit 5160 and the multi-function driving controller 533 m may be integrated together and as a whole be regarded as a driving controller for the driving circuit 1530 .

FIG. 23A is a block diagram of an installation detection module according to some embodiments. Referring to FIG. 23A , the installation detection module 5000 A includes a detection pulse generating module 5110 , a detection determining circuit 5130 , a detection path circuit 5160 , and a current-limiting circuit 5200 A. Configurations and operations of the detection pulse generating module 5110 , detection determining circuit 5130 , and detection path circuit 5160 are similar to those of the above analogous embodiments of FIGS. 22A-22E , and thus are not repeatedly described here.

A difference between the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 23A and the other analogous embodiments is that the current-limiting circuit 5200 A of FIG. 23A comprises or is implemented by a bias adjustment circuit 5200 A. The detection determining circuit 5130 is configured to transmit a detection result signal Sdr to the bias adjustment circuit 5200 A, which is coupled to a driving circuit 530 through a path 5201 and is configured to affect or adjust the bias voltage of the driving circuit 530 in order to control the operation state of the driving circuit 530 .

FIG. 23B is a schematic circuit diagram of the control circuit according to some embodiments. Referring to FIG. 23B , the bias adjustment circuit 5200 A includes a transistor Ma 2 , which has a first terminal electrically connected to the connection terminal of a resistor Rbias and a capacitor Cbias and the power input terminal of the controller 633 , a second terminal electrically connected to the second filtering output terminal 522 , and a control terminal for receiving the adjustment control signal Vctl. In some embodiments, the resistor Rbias and the capacitor Cbias can be regarded as an external bias circuit of the driving circuit 630 , which is configured to provide an operating power for the controller 633 .

When the detection determining circuit 5130 determines that the LED tube lamp has been correctly installed in the lamp socket (no body impedance introduced), the detection determining circuit 5130 outputs a disabling detection result signal Sdr to the transistor Ma 2 , and the transistor Ma 2 cuts off in response to the disabling detection result signal Sdr. Under such state, the bias voltage can be provided to the controller 633 and thus enables the controller 633 to control the switching of the switch, and the lamp driving signal can be therefore generated to drive the LED module.

When the detection determining circuit 5130 determines that the LED tube lamp is not correctly installed in the LED tube lamp (body impedance introduced), the detection determining circuit 5130 outputs an enabling detection result signal Sdr to the transistor Ma 2 to turn the transistor Ma 2 on, so as to electrically connect the power input terminal of the controller 633 to the ground terminal. Under such a state, the controller 633 disables due to the power input terminal being grounded. It worth noting that an additional leakage path may be formed through the transistor Ma 2 when the transistor Ma 2 is turned on, however, the leakage current does not harm the human body, and meets the safety requirement since the bias voltage applied to the controller 633 is relatively low.

FIG. 24A is a block diagram of an installation detection module 5000 b for an LED tube lamp according to some embodiments. Referring to FIG. 24A , the installation detection module 5000 b includes a detection pulse generating module 5110 , a control circuit 5120 , a detection determining circuit 5130 , and a detection path circuit 5160 . Configurations and operations of the detection pulse generating module 5110 , detection path circuit 5160 , and detection determining circuit 5130 are similar to those of the above described embodiments of FIGS. 22A-22E , and thus are not repeatedly described here.

A main difference of the embodiment of FIG. 24A from some previous embodiments is that a current-limiting circuit 5200 b is disposed with a flicker suppression circuit 590 in the embodiments of FIG. 24A . In operation, a detection result signal Sdr from the detection determining circuit 5130 is transmitted to the control circuit 5120 , in order to control operation of the flicker suppression circuit 590 through the control circuit 5120 . The control circuit 5120 is connected to the flicker suppression circuit 590 through a path 5121 , and in a detection mode is configured to control operation state of the flicker suppression circuit 590 . In a normal operation mode, the flicker suppression circuit 590 is configured to perform current adjustment or compensation according to a detected voltage, in order to reduce the amplitude of a driving current output by a driving circuit, thereby suppressing ripple or flicker phenomena.

Compared to the embodiments of FIG. 11 or 20 , since the current-limiting circuit 5200 b of the embodiments of FIG. 20A achieves the function/effects of current limiting or electric-shock protection by controlling a flicker suppression circuit 590 , it's not needed to additionally and serially connect a switching circuit on a power loop of the LED tube lamp for electric-shock protection, so the overall cost in manufacturing an installation detection module without such a switching circuit is significantly lower.

FIG. 24B is a circuit diagram illustrating a control circuit 5120 of an installation detection module (as 5000 a ) according to some embodiments. Referring to FIG. 24B , a flicker suppression circuit 690 of these embodiments includes a voltage generating circuit 691 , an operational amplifier 692 , a resistor 693 , and a transistor 694 . The voltage generating circuit 691 is coupled to a control circuit 5120 , in order to generate a reference voltage Vref. The operational amplifier 692 has two input terminals and one output terminal, wherein one (such as a positive input terminal) of the two input terminals is coupled to an output terminal of the voltage generating circuit 691 in order to receive the reference voltage Vref, and the other (such as a negative input terminal) of the two input terminals is coupled to the resistor 693 and the transistor 694 . The resistor 693 has a first end coupled to the operational amplifier 692 and transistor 694 , and has a second end coupled to a second driving output terminal or a ground terminal. And the transistor 694 has a first terminal coupled to a cathode or negative terminal of the LED module 50 , a second terminal coupled to the operational amplifier 692 and the first end of the resistor 693 , and a control terminal coupled to the output terminal of the operational amplifier 692 .

Specifically, referring to FIGS. 24A and 24B , when the detection determining circuit 5130 determines that the LED tube lamp is not correctly installed into a lamp socket or is still in a detection mode, the control circuit 5120 based on a received detection result signal Sdr indicating incorrect-installation state is configured to transmit a corresponding installation state signal Sidm to the voltage generating circuit 691 , which then adjusts the reference voltage Vref to a ground voltage level or low level in response to the installation state signal Sidm, to cause the operational amplifier 692 to output a disabling signal or not output any signal, in order to cause or maintain the transistor 694 in a cutoff state. On the other hand, when the detection determining circuit 5130 judges that the LED tube lamp is correctly installed into a lamp socket or is in a normal operation mode, the control circuit 5120 based on a received detection result signal Sdr indicating correct-installation state is configured to transmit a corresponding installation state signal Sidm to the voltage generating circuit 691 , which then adjusts the reference voltage Vref to a proper stable value, enabling the operational amplifier 692 based on the proper reference voltage Vref and a voltage detected from the resistor 693 to generate a control signal to control operation of the transistor 694 within a linear region.

For example, referring to FIGS. 24A and 24B , under a normal operation mode, when the power line voltage increases, the voltage Vd at the negative input terminal of the operational amplifier 692 also increases, to cause the difference between the reference voltage Vref and the voltage Vd to decrease. Then the operational amplifier 692 is configured to generate a lower-voltage level control signal to drive the transistor 694 , causing an equivalent impedance between the first and second terminals of the transistor 694 to be relatively large. On the contrary, when the power line voltage decreases, the voltage Vd at the negative input terminal of the operational amplifier 692 also decreases, to cause the difference between the reference voltage Vref and the voltage Vd to increase. Then the operational amplifier 692 is configured to generate a higher-voltage level control signal to drive the transistor 694 , causing an equivalent impedance between the first and second terminals of the transistor 694 to be relatively small. Accordingly, when the power line voltage increases, the LED module 50 is in effect serially connected to increasing or higher impedance, but when the power line voltage decreases, the equivalent impedance connected in series with the LED module 50 decreases in response, so that no matter how the power line voltage varies the magnitude of current flowing through the LED module 50 can be maintained at a stable or nearly constant value, thereby avoiding/reducing the incidence of flicker phenomenon.

FIG. 25A is a block diagram of an installation detection module 5000 B for an LED tube lamp according to some embodiments. Referring to FIG. 25A , the installation detection module 5000 B includes a detection pulse generating module 5110 , a detection determining circuit 5130 , a detection path circuit 5160 , and a current-limiting circuit 5200 B. Configurations and operations of the detection pulse generating module 5110 , detection path circuit 5160 , and detection determining circuit 5130 of FIG. 25A are similar to those of the above described embodiments of FIGS. 22A-22E , and thus are not repeatedly described here.

A main difference of the embodiment of FIG. 25A from some previous embodiments is that the current-limiting circuit 5200 B of the embodiment of FIG. 25A comprises or is implemented by a bias adjustment circuit 5200 B. The detection determining circuit 5130 is configured to transmit a detection result signal Sdr to the bias adjustment circuit 5200 B, which is coupled to a flicker suppression circuit 590 through a path 5121 and is configured to affect or adjust the bias voltage of the flicker suppression circuit 590 in order to control operation state of the flicker suppression circuit 590 .

FIG. 25B is a circuit diagram of a bias adjustment circuit 5200 B according to some embodiments. Referring to FIG. 25B , the bias adjustment circuit 5200 B includes a transistor Mb 1 . The transistor Mb 1 has a first terminal electrically connected to a common node between a resistor Rbias and a capacitor Cbias and an enabling terminal of a flicker suppression circuit 690 (or a voltage generating circuit 691 ); a second terminal electrically connected to a second driving output terminal 532 ; and a control terminal for receiving a detection result signal Sdr. In this embodiment of FIG. 25B , the resistor Rbias and capacitor Cbias act as an external biasing circuit for the flicker suppression circuit 690 and configured to provide power for the flicker suppression circuit 690 (or the voltage generating circuit 691 ) to operate.

Specifically, referring to FIGS. 25A and 25B , when the detection determining circuit 5130 determines that the LED tube lamp is not correctly installed into a lamp socket or is still in a detection mode, the detection determining circuit 5130 is configured to transmit an enabling detection result signal Sdr to the transistor Mb 1 , which then conducts in response to the enabling detection result signal Sdr, causing the enabling terminal of the flicker suppression circuit 690 to be in effect shorted to ground (through the second driving output terminal 532 ), which prevents the voltage generating circuit 691 from being activated. At this state, the reference voltage Vref in FIG. 25B is maintained at a ground voltage level or low level, causing the operational amplifier 692 of FIG. 25B to output a disabling signal or not to output any signal, maintaining the transistor 694 of FIG. 25B in a cutoff state. On the other hand, when the detection determining circuit 5130 judges that the LED tube lamp is correctly installed into a lamp socket or is in a normal operation or lighting mode, the detection determining circuit 5130 is configured to transmit a disabling detection result signal Sdr to the transistor Mb 1 , which then is cut off in response to the disabling detection result signal Sdr, and therefore the flicker suppression circuit 690 or the voltage generating circuit 691 can normally generate a reference voltage Vref, enabling the operational amplifier 692 based on the generated reference voltage Vref and a voltage Vd detected from the resistor 693 of FIG. 25B to generate a control signal to control operation of the transistor 694 within a linear region.

For example, referring to FIGS. 25A and 25B , under a normal operation mode, when the power line voltage increases, the voltage Vd at the negative input terminal of the operational amplifier 692 increases in response, to cause the difference between the reference voltage Vref and the voltage Vd to decrease. Then the operational amplifier 692 is configured to generate a lower-voltage level control signal to drive the transistor 694 , causing an equivalent impedance between the first and second terminals of the transistor 694 to be relatively large. On the contrary, when the power line voltage decreases, the voltage Vd at the negative input terminal of the operational amplifier 692 decreases in response, to cause the difference between the reference voltage Vref and the voltage Vd to increase. Then the operational amplifier 692 is configured to generate a higher-voltage level control signal to drive the transistor 694 , causing an equivalent impedance between the first and second terminals of the transistor 694 to be relatively small. Accordingly, when the power line voltage increases, the LED module 50 is in effect serially connected to increasing or higher impedance, but when the power line voltage decreases, the equivalent impedance connected in series with the LED module 50 decreases in response, so that no matter how the power line voltage varies the magnitude of current flowing through the LED module 50 can be maintained at a stable or nearly constant value, thereby avoiding/reducing the incidence of flicker phenomenon.

FIG. 25C is a circuit diagram of a bias adjustment circuit 5200 B according to some embodiments. Referring to FIG. 25C , the bias adjustment circuit 5200 B includes a transistor Mb 2 . The transistor Mb 2 has a first terminal connected to an enabling terminal of an operational amplifier 692 (which is the terminal connected to a biasing voltage Vdd); a second terminal connected to a second driving output terminal 532 ; and a control terminal for receiving a detection result signal Sdr. The embodiment of FIG. 25C is largely similar to the embodiments of FIG. 25B , with a main difference that the bias adjustment circuit 5200 B of the embodiment of FIG. 25C achieves enabling/disabling of a flicker suppression circuit 690 of FIG. 25C by controlling whether the enabling terminal of the operational amplifier 692 be grounded or not.

Specifically, referring to FIGS. 25A and 25C , when the detection determining circuit 5130 judges that the LED tube lamp is not correctly installed into a lamp socket or is still in a detection mode, the detection determining circuit 5130 is configured to transmit an enabling detection result signal Sdr to the transistor Mb 2 , which then conducts in response to the enabling detection result signal Sdr, causing the enabling terminal of the operational amplifier 692 to be in effect shorted to ground (through the second driving output terminal 532 ). At this state, no matter what the voltage Vd on the resistor 693 is, the operational amplifier 692 outputs a disabling signal or is regarded as not outputting an enabling signal, to maintain the transistor 694 in a cutoff state. On the other hand, when the detection determining circuit 5130 judges that the LED tube lamp is correctly installed into a lamp socket or is in a normal operation or lighting mode, the detection determining circuit 5130 is configured to transmit a disabling detection result signal Sdr to the transistor Mb 2 , which then is cut off in response to the disabling detection result signal Sdr, and therefore the operational amplifier 692 can normally receive the biasing voltage Vdd, enabling the operational amplifier 692 based on the reference voltage Vref and a voltage Vd detected from the resistor 693 of FIG. 25C to generate a control signal to control operation of the transistor 694 within a linear region. Other related operations in the embodiment of FIG. 25C are similar to those described above in the embodiments of FIGS. 25A and 25B , so are not described again here.

FIG. 26A is a block diagram of an installation detection module according to some exemplary embodiments. Referring to FIG. 26A , the LED tube lamp includes a rectifying circuit 510 , a filtering circuit 520 and a driving circuit 1130 . Compared with the embodiment of FIG. 4A , the LED tube lamp of the present embodiment further includes a detection circuit 5000 b . The connection between the rectifying circuit 510 , the filtering circuit 520 , the driving circuit 1130 and the LED module 50 are similar to the embodiment illustrated in FIG. 4A , and thus is not described in detail herein. The detection circuit 5000 b has an input terminal coupled to the power loop of the LED tube lamp and an output terminal coupled to the driving circuit 1130 .

Specifically, after the LED tube lamp is powered up (no matter whether or not the LED tube lamp is correctly installed in the lamp socket), the driving circuit 1130 enters an installation detection mode. Under the installation detection mode, the driving circuit 1130 provides a lighting control signal having narrow pulse (e.g., the pulse-on period is smaller than 1 ms) for driving the power switch (not shown), so that the driving current, generated under the installation detection mode, is smaller than 5 MIU or 5 mA. On the other hand, under the installation detection mode, the detection circuit 5000 b detects an electrical signal on the power loop/detection path and generates an installation detection signal Sidm, in which the installation detection signal Sidm is transmitted to the driving circuit. The driving circuit 1130 determines whether to enter a normal driving mode according to the received installation detection signal Sidm. If the driving circuit 1130 determines to maintain in the installation detection mode, which means the LED tube lamp is not correctly installed in the lamp socket during the first pulse, the next pulse is output, according to a frequency setting, for temporarily conducting the power loop/detection path, so that the electrical signal on the power loop/detection path can be detected by the detection circuit 5000 b again. On the contrary, if the driving circuit 1130 determines to enter the normal driving mode, the driving circuit 1130 generates, according to at least one of the input voltage, the output voltage, the input current, the output current and the combination of the above, the lighting control signal capable of modulating the pulse width for maintaining the brightness of the LED module 50 . In the present embodiment, the input/output voltage and the input/output current can be sampled by a feedback circuit (not shown) in the driving circuit 1130 .

FIG. 26B is a schematic diagram of an exemplary driving circuit according to some exemplary embodiments. Referring to FIG. 26B , the driving circuit 1130 includes a controller 1133 and a conversion circuit 1134 . The controller 1133 includes a signal receiving unit 1137 , a sawtooth wave generating unit 1138 and a comparison unit CUd, and the conversion circuit 1134 includes a switch circuit (also known as power switch) 1135 and energy release circuit 1136 . The signal receiving unit 1137 has input terminals for receiving a feedback signal Vfb and installation detection signal Sidm and an output terminal coupled to a first input terminal of the comparison unit CUd. The sawtooth wave generating unit 1138 has an output terminal coupled to a second input terminal of the comparison unit CUd. An output terminal of the comparison unit CUd is coupled to a control terminal of the switch circuit 1135 . The circuit arrangement of the switch circuit 1135 and the energy release circuit 1136 can be referred to with respect to the embodiments of FIGS. 7A to 7E , and it will not be repeated herein.

In the controller 1133 , the signal receiving unit 1137 can be implemented by, for example, a circuit constituted by an error amplifier. The error amplifier is configured to receive the feedback signal Vfb related to the voltage/current information of the power supply module and the installation detection module Sidm. In the present embodiment, the signal receiving unit 1137 selectively outputs a preset voltage Vp or the feedback signal Vfb to the first input terminal of the comparison unit CUd. The sawtooth wave generating unit 1138 is configured to generate and provide a sawtooth signal Ssw to the second input terminal of the comparison unit CUd. In the waveform of the sawtooth signal Ssw of each cycle, the slope of at least one of the rising edge and the falling edge is not infinity. In some embodiments, the sawtooth wave generating unit 1138 generates the sawtooth signal Ssw, according to a fixed operation frequency, no matter what the operation mode of the driving circuit 1130 is. In some embodiments, the sawtooth wave generating unit 1138 generates the sawtooth signal Ssw according to different operation frequencies when operating in different operation modes. For example, the sawtooth wave generating unit 1138 can change the operation frequency according to the installation detection signal Sidm. The comparison unit CUd compares the signal level of the signal on the first and the second input terminal, in which the comparison unit CUd outputs the lighting control signal Slc with high voltage level when the signal level on the first input terminal is greater than the second input terminal and outputs the lighting control signal Slc with low voltage level when the signal level on the first input terminal is not greater than the second input terminal. For example, the comparison unit CUd outputs high voltage when the signal level of the sawtooth signal Ssw is greater than the preset voltage Vp or the feedback signal Vfb, so as to generate the lighting control signal having pulse waveform.

FIG. 37C is a signal waveform diagram of an exemplary power supply module according to an exemplary embodiment. Referring to FIGS. 26B and 37C , when the LED tube lamp is powered up (including the pins on the both end caps being connected to the connecting sockets, or the pins on one end cap being connected to the corresponding connecting socket and the pins on the other end cap being touched by the user), the driving circuit 1130 starts to operate and enter the installation detection mode DTM. The operation in the first period T 1 is described below. Under the installation detection mode, the signal receiving unit 1137 outputs the preset voltage Vp to the first input terminal of the comparison unit CUd, and the sawtooth wave generating unit 1138 provides the sawtooth signal SW to the second input terminal of the comparison unit CUd. From the perspective of the variation of the sawtooth wave SW, the signal level of the sawtooth wave SW gradually increases, after the start timepoint ts, from the initial level to a peak level. After reaching the peak level, the sawtooth wave SW is gradually decreased to the initial level. Before the signal level of the sawtooth wave SW rises to the preset voltage Vp, the comparison unit CUd outputs the lighting control signal Slc with low voltage. During the period from the timepoint of the signal level rising to exceed the preset voltage Vp to the timepoint falling back below the preset voltage Vp, the comparison unit CUd pulls the signal level up to the high voltage. After the signal level falling to lower than the preset voltage Vp, the comparison unit CUd pulls the signal level down to the low voltage again. By performing the above operation, the comparison unit CUd can generate the pulse DP based on the sawtooth wave SW and the preset voltage Vp, in which the pulse width/pulse-on period DPW of the pulse DP is the duration that the signal level of the sawtooth wave SW is higher than the preset voltage Vp.

The lighting control signal Slc having the pulse DP is transmitted to the control terminal of the switch circuit 1135 , so that the switch circuit 1135 is turned on during the pulse-on period DPW. Therefore, the energy release unit 1136 absorbs power and a current is generated on the